+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

Date post: 01-Mar-2018
Category:
Upload: arpitrathi
View: 362 times
Download: 3 times
Share this document with a friend
148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0) http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 1/148 PRINT FROM SAP HELP PORTAL Document: Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0) URL: http://help.sap.com/erp2005_ehp_05/helpdata/en/42/e34e3131023ee1e10000000a1553f6/content.htm Date created:  August 19, 2013 © 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permissi on of SAP AG. The i nformation contained herein may be changed without prior n otice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and i ts distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications m ay vary. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ( "SAP G roup") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP G roup products and services are those that are set forth i n the express warranty statements accompanyin g such products and services, if any. Nothi ng herein should be construed as constituting an additional w arranty. SAP and other SAP products and services m entioned herein as w ell as thei r respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG i n G ermany and other countries. Pl ease see www.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx#trademark for additional trademark inform ation and notices. Note This PDF document contains the selected topic and its subtopics (max. 150) in the selected structure. Subtopics from other structures are not included. The selected structure has more than 150 subtopics. This download contains only the first 150 subtopics. You can manually download the missing subtopics. PUBLIC © 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 148
Transcript
Page 1: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 1/148

PRINT FROM SAP HELP PORTAL

Document:Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0)

URL:http://help.sap.com/erp2005_ehp_05/helpdata/en/42/e34e3131023ee1e10000000a1553f6/content.htm

Date created: August 19, 2013

© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the expresspermission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and i ts distributors contain proprietary

software components of other software vendors. National product specifications m ay vary. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for 

informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only

warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein

should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as thei r respective logos are trademarks or 

registered trademarks of SAP AG in G ermany and other countries. Please see www.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx#trademark for additional trademark information

and notices.

Note

This PDF document contains the selected topic and its subtopics (max. 150) in the selected structure.Subtopics from other structures are not included.The selected structure has more than 150 subtopics. This download contains only the first 150 subtopics. Youcan manually download the missing subtopics.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 148

Page 2: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 2/148

 Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP6.0)

Introduction: Enhancement Packages and Business Functions 

Enhancement packages and business functions enable you to considerably simplify the process of introducing and using new developments for SAP Business

Suite. This technology enables you to selectively introduce individual new developments and to optimize selected business processes.

Enhancement packages are offered for the following applications of the SAP Business Suite:

SAP CRM

SAP ERP

SAP SCM

SAP SRM

There are also enhancement packages available for SAP NetWeaver. These enhancement packages form the basis for the enhancement packages of the

applications of the SAP Business Suite, but follow different principles. Therefore, the statements made in this documentation do not apply for the enhancement

packages of SAP NetWeaver.

Nonetheless, there are some bus iness functions in your SAP NetWeaver system. With very few exceptions, these are business functions that you can use

only in conjunction with one or more applications of the SAP Business Suite. You can find notes about these dependencies in the description of the given

business function.

This documentation provides you with an initial overview of the technology involved and the principles behind the enhancement packages. For detailed information

for technical consultants related to the concept, installation, and maintenance of enhancement packages, see the enhancement package pages of each

application on the SAP Service Marketplace.

Enhancement Packages 

With the enhancement package delivery technology, we provide you with new developments and enhancements of applications for your existing SAP Business

Suite installations. To take advantage of these new developments and enhancements, you can install enhancement packages on your existing installations on full

release levels on your SAP Business Suite applications. The business function technology makes it possible for you to pick and choose only those new

developments and enhancements you want to have, and to introduce these in your company. This delivery concept allows you to use new developments offered

by SAP for your business processes at your own pace and according to your own requirements.

Prerequisites

You are using the related full release and you have set up the business processes there that are relevant for your business.

You are using SAP Solution Manager.

Before beginning the installation of the enhancement package, you have informed yourself about which new developments are relevant for your business

processes. Then based on that information, you imported the relevant software component versions and content packages.

You imported all Support Package Stacks that are necessary for the enhancement package into your system for your applications of the SAP Business Suite

and SAP NetWeaver.

It is possible for you to first import the necessary Support Package Stack into your system, and then import the enhancement package in the next step.

However, we recommend that you combine the import of the enhancement package with the import of the current Support Package Stack. This approach

offers synergy effects for the testing process and when you are adapting your software modifications. See the notes, dependencies, and prerequisites

described in the Master Guide for the respective enhancement package.

FeaturesEnhancement packages contain functional enhancements, new user interfaces, and enterprise services that you can use to optimize your business processes.

The technology of enhancement packages offers the advantage that changes to interfaces and business processes only take effect for the applications that you

have also activated in the system. There is no change to the system behavior and the user interfaces of the other applications.

 Note

 Recommendation

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 2 of 148

Page 3: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 3/148

This delivery concept offers you the following advantages:

It provides you with long-term planning security on a stable platform but does not mean that you cannot take advantage of innovations and new developments.

You can provide individual departments with new developments at any time while other departments can continue to work and there is no change to the system

behavior or the user interfaces. Using the comprehensive documentation and presentations available about the contents of each enhancement package, you

can get the information you need before actually installing the enhancement package. This information about the scope of the new functions assists you in

selecting the new developments that are of interest for your company at a given point in time.

Since implementation activities are only necessary for the new features, this considerably reduces the efforts and time required for the implementation of new

applications and functions. No activities are necessary for the bus iness processes that remain uninfluenced by the new features.

Your employees and users only need training for those applications and functions that you have actively decided to use.

It provides tools that simplify the installation and implementation of new developments considerably. These include the following functions:New installation tools are available for enhancement packages. These tools considerably simplify the installation of the technical components and the related

Support Packages. You also receive detailed information about which technical components you have to install.

You use business functions to activate all changes in your ABAP-based systems. You can decide for each individual business function if you want to use

the new developments that it contains. Each business function also contains information about which additional technical components you have to install to be

able to use the business function.

For each business function, we provide test case templates that make it easier for you to test the new developments. This also reduces efforts required for 

the test. You only have to test the applications of the business processes that you have actively decided to optimize by activating a business function.

It provides you with analyses that tell you, for each business function, which user interfaces for which roles and users are affected by the activation of a

business function. You can use this information to calculate your costs in advance for training users to use the new functions.

The new developments and enhancements are only active once you have performed the following activities:

You have decided to use a business function.

You have installed the technical components and contents required for using the business function.

You have activated the required business functions in your ABAP-based sys tem.

More InformationFor more information about the upgrade and the installation of industry business solutions (SAP ERP only), see the Master Guide for the given enhancement

package.

Business Functions 

With business functions, SAP provides new features and enhancements in self-contained units for your existing SAP installations. This enables you to use

spec ific new features and enhancements for your various business processes.

Business function X is delivered with an enhancement package. This business function contains functions that allow you to more efficiently run a given

business process. At this moment in time, you are not interested in other functions of the enhancement package.

Therefore, you install only those technical components that you need in order to use business function X. After you install those technical components, other 

business functions are also available that were also part of the technical components you installed. But you activate only business function X.

 After you activate business function X, the functions you want to use are then available. No other implementation activities are needed for all of your other 

business processes and applications; users can continue to work in them as they always have.

Prerequisites

Before installing the enhancement package, you obtained information about the business functions that you want to use for your business processes.

You have implemented the relevant technical components in your SAP installations dependent on the business function you chose.

Features

The business function concept has two aspects:

The business function as a self-contained entity comprising new software developments. This aspect also includes comprehensive material that you can use

ahead of time to get information about the new developments, along with the technical components that have to be installed.

The business function as a technical object in your ABAP-based system. Along with this object, you also activate the new developments in your ABAP-based

system using transaction SFW5.

The business functions are only v isible in transaction SFW5 if you have implemented the related software component versions.

You cannot undo the activation of a business function in a live system. Deactivating a specific, ac tive business function is p ossible only for test purposes.

For more information, see Deactivating Business Functions.

The processes that run in the background when you activate a business function need a certain amount of time. This means that you cannot see the

changes in the system immediately after you activate the business function. You must also schedule a short downtime of approximately one half hour to an

hour in the respective system.

You call transaction SFW5 in your ABAP-based system from the first Customizing activity in your Implementation Guide. It provides a series of functions that

simplify the use of the new developments for you:

When you have activated a business function, the following changes and new developments are visible:

 Example

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 3 of 148

Page 4: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 4/148

New menu entries

New fields on the user interfaces

Customizing activities required for the implementation

New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables

Business Configuration Sets (Switch BC Sets) are also delivered with the business functions; these are unpacked automatically when you activate a

business function. For more information, see SAP Notes 337623 and 877008.

Transaction SFW5 gives you the following options for getting information about business functions and for scheduling their implementation:

Navigation to the business function description

Navigation to the release notes relevant for the business function

Navigation to the sample test catalogs for the business function

For more information, see Working with Test Case Templates

Notes about the dependencies between business functions

For some business functions you must also activate additional business functions. For notes about doing so, see the related description and the

Dependencies  column in transaction SFW5. It is not technically possible to activate business functions that exclude each other.

 Analysis of the effects on your users of activating a business function. For more information, see Analysis of the Effects on the Users.

From a technical view, the business functions consist of individual switches that can be used to activate coding strings, menu entries, and Customizing activities

in the Implementation Guide. For more technical information about the business functions and transaction SFW5, see Switch Framework.

If you implement your own customer enhancements at the explicit enhancement options that SAP defined with the statements ENHANCEMENT-POINT or 

ENHANCEMENT-SECTION, these can be made ineffective by a subsequent release or enhancement package, or they can cause errors. Therefore we

strongly recommend that you not use the enhancement options provided by SAP and defined with ENHANCEMENT-POINT or ENHANCEMENT-SECTION for 

your own customer enhancements. SAP does not guarantee that the interfaces and the existence of these explicit enhancement options will remain stable in

the source code.

We recommend that you use , for example, Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) or implicit enhancement options instead. For more information, see Enhancement

Framework.

More Information

For more information about activating business functions, see SAP Note 908007.

Deactivating Business Functions 

 Activating and using the contents of a business function stores data on databases, executes process s teps, changes user interfaces, sets statuses, and much

more. Therefore, for technical reasons, it is not possible to reverse the activation of a business function, since this can lead to irreparable data inconsistencies in

the system. This is especially the case for live systems.

Nonetheless, it would be helpful in many cases to be able to first test a business function without having to build a separate system for the test. For this reason,

SAP delivers some business functions for which it is possible to reverse their activation. This type of business function is called reversib le.

You can reverse the activation of business functions only in development and test sys tems. Reversal is not possible in live systems.

Features

In transaction SFW5, you can see that business functions are reversible based on the following information:

The system disp lays a double arrow symbol for the business function instead of a light bulb symbol.

Status of Business Function Symbol

Reversible Business Function (Double Arrow )

Business Function Switched Off (Light Bulb Switched Off )

Business Function Switched On (Light Bulb Switched On)

When you activate the business function, the Planned Status checkbox remains visible.

For business functions that are not reversible, this checkbox is no longer displayed once the business functions are activated. Instead, the sys tem displays

the information Business func. will remain switched on.

Business functions have to meet certain requirements before SAP can set them to being reversible. They are not allowed to be business functions that

irretrievably change the system, or that change it so that inconsistencies can arise. Therefore, to ensure the highest possible level of security in your 

systems, there are always a small number of business functions that are not reversible.

 Note

 Caution

 Caution

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 4 of 148

Page 5: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 5/148

If the activation of a business function is a prerequisite for activating another business function, then you cannot deactivate the prerequisite business function

once the dependent business function is activated. This applies even if the prerequisite business function is designated as being reversib le.

The following example assumes that the activation of business function BF1 is the prerequisite for activating business function BF2. The following scenarios

are possible:

Is BF1 Reversible? Is BF2 Reversible? Deactivation Possible?

Yes Yes You can deactivate both business functions.

No No You cannot deactivate either of the business

functions.

No Yes You can deactivate business function BF2, but

not business function BF1.

Yes No After business function BF2 is activated, you

cannot deactivate business function BF1, even

though it is reversible.

Reason: Once you have activated business

function BF2, you cannot deactivate it. If you were

to deactivate business function BF1, then the

prerequisites for business function BF2 would no

longer be met.

We strongly recommend that you also test reversible business functions in a separate test client that is set up solely for that purpose. Proceed as follows:

1. Create a test client, for instance using a client copy.

2. Activate the busines s function in the test client.

The activation of the business function is cross-client.

In the business function documentation, check if the activation of the business function has an effect on other integrated systems (such as BI system,

SCM system, and so on). If this is the case, we strongly advise you to set up an own test client in each of these systems. Configure the systems in

such a way that the relevant test clients are connected to one another.

3. Test the activated functions of the business function in the test client.

Make sure that the activated functions of the business function are not tested in any other client of the test system.

4. Depending on how satisfied you are with the test results, proceed as follows:

If you decide based on the test to use the business function, then leave it activated. If you have another business function to test, you can test it in the

same test client.

If you decide based on the test not to use the business function, then proceed as follows:

1. Deactivate the business function by deselecting the Planned Status checkbox and then choosing Activate Changes.

2. Delete the test clients that have been created.

3. If you need to test further business functions, create a new test client.

Importing Technical Components 

For each business function, we have defined which individual parts of the enhancement packages you have to implement in your system landscape to be able to

use the content of the business function.

Features

Enhancement Packages

The new features in the enhancement packages build on the underlying SAP product instances. The enhancement packages are delivered by means of new

versions of individual components of your SAP product instances.

Therefore, you need to import only a specific part of the delivery scope of an enhancement package into your system landscape. The specific individual technical

components and contents that you need in order to use a business function are fixed. These are described in the documentation.

The individual enhancement packages build on one another, and therefore all enhancement packages are numbered according to the sequence in which they

appeared. In each enhancement package, you can also use the business functions of earlier enhancement packages.

 Example

 Recommendation

 Caution

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 5 of 148

Page 6: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 6/148

Special installation tools are available for installing the enhancement packages, and these simp lify the import considerably.

When you import a new enhancement package or upgrade to a higher full release, the business functions that you have already activated and the related settings

in your ABAP-based system remain in place. After the installation, the business functions that you previously activated are activated automatically.

Technical Usage

For installation purposes, the technical components and contents are summarized in the technical usage. Each business function is assigned to a technical

usage, and this means that you select the components and contents required for a business function by selecting the technical usage for the installation.

Based on the technical usage you select and the current system status, SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer provides you the with the technical

components you need for the installation. These include any Support Packages that are required, and the necessary SAP NetWeaver enhancement package.

It may be the case that, for some business functions, you need further technical components in addition to the content of the technical usage, for example,

special SAP NetWeaver components or third-party products. This information is provided in the description of the business function.

Technical Components

The following technical components and contents contain new developments and enhancements that are available for a business function.

Software component versions of the ABAP-based system

Software component versions for Java-based applications

Portal content

 A business function can cover new or enhanced portal roles. Therefore, new versions of the business packages are available for the enhancement packages:

The version of an enhanced business package covers the following portal roles:

Portal roles in the version that was available for the previous full release (for example, SAP ERP 6.0)

Changed portal roles that are used in a business function. In addition to new iViews, the new version of a portal role can also cover iViews that were already

part of the portal role of the full release.

Business content (BI content)

In your BI system, new or changed objects in the enhancement packages are stored in their own separate InfoAreas. In addition, the documentation of the

individual objects contains information about the enhancement package starting in which the objects are available and for which business function they are

available.

Process Integration Content (XI Content)/Enterprise Services Repository Content (ESR Content)

 Along with the enhancement packages, you receive additional enterprise services. The implementations of these enterprise services are in the software

component versions of your ABAP-based system. In the XI system, these enterprise services are grouped in their own software components and namespaces

for the enhancement packages. For information about these enterprise services, see the documentation of the business function and the related release note.

Overview

The following figure shows an overview of the relationships between business functions, technical usages, and technical components.

More Information

For information about the technical components required for a business function, see the documentation. For more information, see the Business Function

Documentation and the Master Guide for the enhancement package.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 6 of 148

Page 7: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 7/148

Business Function Documentation 

The documentation of the new or enhanced applications in the enhancement packages is oriented on the content of the business functions. This applies for the

system documentation and the SAP Library.

Features

SAP Library

In the SAP Library, the documentation of the business functions consists of two areas: The description of the business functions themselves and the related

application documentation.

Business Function Description

The descriptions give you an initial overview of which new functions SAP offers with the enhancement packages. The description provides a point of entry to the

more detailed documentation and helps you to decide whether you might want to use the business function.

Related application documentation

In most cases, there is extensive application documentation in addition to the description of the business function.

You can access the descriptions of the business functions that are delivered with the enhancement packages as follows:

You can get information using the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com in the SAP Library for the given SAP app lication under Business Functions

(SAP Enhancement Package ...). All business functions are described there. Using the links to the application documentation contained in the documentation

of the business functions, you can get detailed information about the content of the business functions.

In transaction SFW5 in your ABAP-based system, use the links to the descrip tions of the individual business functions. Using these links, you can call up the

descriptions of the business functions in the SAP Help Portal. From there, you can use all links to further documentation.

The original for business functions can be in different software layers, and they can be delivered in different enhancement packages. For example, there

are business functions that are in SAP NetWeaver, in the layer for reusable processes and tools for the SAP Business Suite, or in the application layer. For 

technical reasons, business functions are always displayed in relation to their original assignment. Therefore, keep the following special considerations in

mind:

Example: If you call the description of a business function that is in SAP NetWeaver, then the SAP Help Portal structure displays only those business

functions that also are in the same enhancement package of SAP NetWeaver.

If you call the description of a business function of an application, then the structure displays the descriptions of all business functions available in

transaction SFW5 of the given enhancement package of that application.

You can use the SAP Library connected to your ABAP-based system to get information about the content of the business functions. You install the the SAP

Library on your server using the business functions. In doing so, you update only those parts of your SAP Library that contain information about the new

developments in a given business function. You can therefore update your SAP Library dependent on the parts of the software you have installed and activated.

This means that your SAP Library reflects the level of the software that you have installed and use.

For information about installing the SAP Library in the context of the enhancement packages, see the documentation DVD that is part of the software

delivery (“Readme” text) or 1066110.

When you call the SAP Lib rary that is on your server, you can display the descriptions of all business functions. However, the links from a b usiness

function description to further application documentation only function correctly if you have also installed the application documentation for this business

function. Only if you have installed the application documentation can you ensure the following:

You can execute all links from the business function description to the application documentation.

 All links from the business function description to the application documentation disp lay the current version of the appl ication documentation that

corresponds to the software when the business function is active.

Note that activating a business function does not automatically lead to the installation of the related application documentation. You have to install the

application documentation on your server in addition to activating the business function.

Business function descriptions contain technical data. The most important technical data is explained below.

 Note

 Note

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 7 of 148

Page 8: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 8/148

Explanation of the Technical Data in the Business Function Description

Technical Name of Business Function Unique Technical Name of Business Function

You can see the technical name in transaction SFW5 in the Business Function

column.

Type of Business Function Information about whether the business function is an enterprise extension, an

enterprise b usiness function, or an industry business function

This information is mainly relevant for SAP ERP. For more information, see

Types of Business Functions in SAP ERP.

Available As O f  Number of enhancement package from which the business function is

available

Technical Usage Grouping of software components and contents of SAP enhancement package

that have to be installed together in order for you to be able to use the contents

of a specific business function

In most cases, the technical usages have a c learly understandable name

from which you can recognize the business applications contained in them.

Application Component  App lication component for which the new functions in the business function

were developed

Based on this information, you can see if additional efforts are required for the

implementation, for example, if you are not yet using this application

component.

Prerequisite Business Function Business functions that have to be activated in addition to the business

function described in order for you to be able to use the new functions

Note that only the directly prerequisite business functions are listed in the

documentation. If you need a complete overview of the dependencies that need

to be considered, use the respective links in the documentation. Once you

have installed the corresponding software components, you can get information

about the complete dependency chain of a business function using transaction

SFW5.

Software Component Software components of your ABAP-based system that you have to import to

be ab le to use and activate the business function

SAP NetWeaver  SAP NetWeaver component that is not necessary for the full release, but that

is required for the use of the business function

Portal content Version of the business package that you need to be able to use the business

function or individual functions of the business function

BI Content Release version of the business content (BI content) that you need to be able

to use the business function or individual functions of the business function

XI/ESR Content Release version and namespace of the enterprise services that you can use

for the business function

Third-Party Product Non-SAP application that you can connect with, for example, using interfaces

System documentation

The system documentation for the functions that belong to the scope of a business function is only active and visible in your ABAP-based system if you have

activated the business function.

This does not include the release notes. Irrespective of the whether or not the business functions are active, you can see all release notes in the software

component that you have installed in your system. You can judge the relevance of a release note for a specific business function from the technical name of the

business function in the title. The business function is also named in the text of the release note.

Working with Test Case Templates 

Test case templates are available for the business functions that are delivered with enhancement packages. These test case templates help you to reduce the

implementation time and efforts. With the test case templates you can test the new functions that belong to the scope of a business function. The use of test case

templates gives you the following advantages:

Using the test case description, you can find out how to test the new functions and what you have to consider.

You can plan your tests using the test case templates and calculate the efforts accordingly.

You can prepare the content of the tests,for example, by creating the test data required.

For more information about using test cases, see SAP NetWeaver Library under Test Workbench.

FeaturesThe test case templates delivered give you examples that show you how to test the new functions. You can add further test cases.

You can access the test case templates in transaction SFW5. From there you can navigate to the related SAP test catalog for each business function.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 8 of 148

Page 9: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 9/148

Activities

Proceed as follows to look at the SAP test catalog for the individual business functions:

1. Call transaction SFW5. You access this transac tion in Customizing under Activate Business Funct ions.

2. In the Test Catalog  column, select the test catalog that you want information about.

The application Display Test Catalog <topic> appears.

3. Open the descriptions for the respective test cases.

Proceed as follows to copy and provide the test catalog for your tests:

Proceed in exactly the sequence that is described in this procedure.

1. Call transaction SFW5. You access this transac tion in Customizing under Activate Business Funct ions.

2. In the Test Catalog  column, select the test catalog that you want to use.

The application Display Test Catalog <topic> appears.

3. Make a note of the name of the highest node.

4. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Tools   ABAP Workbench  Test   Test Workbench  Test Organizer   Test Catalog Management   .

5. Choose the input help for the Test Catalog  field.

6. Enter the name of the test catalog that you noted and want to use, and choose Start Search. If necessary, remove the language from the selection criteria.

7. Add the entry to your list of favorites. Choose Favorite.

8. Select the new entry and choose Test Catalog   Copy   .

9. Give your test catalog a new name, choose Continue, and specify the package in which the new test catalog is to be saved.

Your new test catalog is now in the list of favorites.

10. Select your new test catalog and choose Test Catalog   Display   .

11. Choose View   Hierarchy Display   Title and Key   .

12. Open a new window.

13. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Tools   ABAP Workbench  Test   Test Workbench  Test Tools  CATT   .

The Computer Aided Test Tool  application appears.

14. In the Test Case field, enter the technical key of a test case from your test catalog and copy the test case.

15. Copy all further test cases and add them to your favorites list.

16. Go back to the Test Catalog Management  app lication.

17. In your copy of the test catalog, replace the individual test case templates from SAP with your copies of the test cases as follows.

1. Add the copy of your test case behind the original.

2. Delete the original from the test catalog.

Analysis of the Effects on the Users 

Using the Impact Analyzer, you can analyze the user interfaces that are affected and find out which roles and users are influenced if you activate a business

function.

This enables you to answer the following questions before you activate a business function:

Which training material is affected?

To what extent does the training material have to be adjusted?

Which users have to be informed and may need delta training courses or materials?

Prerequisites

The Impact Analyzer analyzes information from the Role Maintenance transaction (PFCG). Therefore, in order to be able to use the Impact Analyzer fully, you

must have created roles to which the related transactions and users are assigned.

Features

The Impact Analyzer determines all roles (roles of the transaction PFCG) in which applications are entered that change when the business function is activated.

Using the roles, it determines the assigned users. For each business function, the Impact Analyzer shows which roles and users and which tasks and

transactions are affected by changes to the interfaces or processes.

The Impact Analyzer evaluates the following user interfaces:

Transactions

Portal i-Views and portal roles

Reports/programs of the ABAP-based sy stem

WebDynpro ABAP applications

You have the following selection options for the analysis:

Evaluation of all business functions planned for the activation

Choose Impact Analyzer   Planned BFs  .

This may take a few minutes due to the dataset to be evaluated.

Evaluation of an individual business function planned

 Recommendation

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 9 of 148

Page 10: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 10/148

In SFW5, select a business function and choose Impact Analyzer   Planned BFs 

Selection of one or more business functions with own selection options

Choose Impact Analyzer   Free Selection  . There you have several options for selecting the business function and can choose the layout of the output

list.

You can call up this function independently of transaction SFW5 using the report SFW_IMPACT_ANALYZER.

The Impact Analyzer provides both an overview and a detailed view.

Business functions that exist for information purposes only and do not switch anything from a technical point of view cannot be evaluated using the Impact

 Analyzer. For information, see the description of the given business function.

Special Features of Individual Applications of SAP BusinessSuite

Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP 

For SAP ERP there are a number of special features in relation to enhancement packages.

Features

In SAP ERP there are several types of business functions available. In addition, you can use transaction SFW5 to activate certain industry business solutions.

For more information, see Types of Business Functions in SAP ERP and Industry Business Solutions of SAP ERP.

The SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) consists of multiple software components containing the various business applications of SAP ERP. To make

the installation easier for you, and to reduce the amount of time for the installation, you only need to import certain new software component versions for each

business function to your ABAP-based system. The software component versions needed in each case are part of the technical usages that are available to

you for installing the business functions.

You should always import the most current version of an enhancement package so that, for example, you can directly use any corrections or further 

developments in further business functions for this area.

For SAP ERP 6.0 system, you do not want to use the business functions for Human Capital Management . In that case, you leave your ECC software

component versions SAP_HR and EA-HR at level 600.

For your SAP ERP 6.0 system, you want to use a business function that was developed for enhancement package 2 for the Employee Interaction

Center  area. In that case, you nonetheless install the newest version of the technical usage Human Capital Management  with the software component

versions SAP_HR 60x and EA-HR 60x (for example SAP_HR 604 and EA-HR 604), even if you are only interested in a bus iness function from

enhancement package 2.

You can find extensive information on enhancement packages on the SAP Service Marketplace. This information assists you in selecting business functions

and in installing enhancement packages:

On the SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/erp-ehp, you can find overview information about enhancement packages and

new developments for the individual application areas of SAP ERP.

On the SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/ehp-inst, you can find detailed information about installing enhancement

packages.

On the SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/erp  SAP ERP Enhancement Packages  ERP Central Component Enhancement Package

<number>  Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package <number> for SAP ERP 6.0   , you can find detailed information about the individualbusiness functions and links to the appropriate application documentation.

Types of Business Functions in SAP ERP 

For SAP ERP, you have access to some special features in transaction SFW5. Here you have access to enterprise business functions, enterprise extensions,

and industry business functions.

Features

Business Functions

For SAP ERP, transaction SFW5 covers the following types of business functions:

Enterprise Extensions

 Example

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 10 of 148

Page 11: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 11/148

These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ERP (up to SAP ERP 6.0). You use them to activate a number of industry-independent and

industry-specific applications and business processes for each business function.

Enterprise Business Functions

Using these business functions, you can activate software developments that SAP provides within the framework of enhancement packages. For a description

of how the enterprise business functions work, see Business Functions.

SAP ERP contains both industry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions. The enterprise business functions are grouped together in

the general business function set BLANK.

Industry Business Functions

The industry business functions contain functions that belong to the industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 6.0, along with the new developments

from the enhancement packages. The industry business functions are part of the industry business function sets.

Business Function Sets

The business functions are grouped in business function sets in your ABAP-based SAP ERP system. There are two types of business functions sets:

For most industry business solutions, there is one business function set for each industry. You use this set to change over a client of your SAP ERP system to

the applications and solutions tailored for the particular industry. A bus iness function set includes all industry b usiness functions that can be used exclusively

for an industry solution on one system or one instance. These industry-specific contents and modifications are also available with SAP ERP, without your having

to install an add-on.

In addition to the industry-specific business function sets, there is a general business function set. This contains the enterprise business functions and the

enterprise extensions. These contain functions for the standard applications of Accounting, Logistics, Human Capital Management, and some additional

industry-specific applications.

The technical name of the general business function set is BLANK. The enterprise business functions and enterprise extensions contained in it are also

included in the industry business function sets. Therefore, you can also use the functions that are not industry-specific, if you have set up your system for a

certain industry.

 A business function set is activated when you activate at least one of the related business functions. We therefore recommend that you activate the business

function set when you start configuring your system, since the required industry-specific or non-industry-specific view of your Implementation Guide is not created

until you have activated the related business function.

 After an upgrade, the business function sets that you previously activated are automatically activated again.

You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry bus iness function set in an ABAP-based system or an ABAP-based instance, in parallel with the

industry business functions of another industry business function set. You can only activate one business function set for each instance. You cannot reverse

the activation. Therefore, some business function sets are available where the requirements of several industries are linked with one another, for example, the

SAP Oil and Gas with Utilities bus iness function set.

Industry Business Solutions of SAP ERP 

With SAP ERP, you have a series of industry business solutions available to support your business processes. You can use the majority of the Industry

Business Solutions by activating industry b usiness function sets. You use the industry business function sets to assist you in adapting your SAP ERP Central

Component system (SAP-ECC system) to the requirements of the industry business solution. However, SAP also delivers other forms of industry solutions.

Features

Within SAP ERP, the following forms of industry solutions are available:

Industry business solutions available as business function sets (industry enhancement)

These business function sets are available with SAP ECC; you do not have to install any additional technical components.

Industry solutions delivered as central components

These industry solutions are delivered using an industry-specific product instance.

Industry-speci fic bus iness p rocesses or industry solutions delivered as enterprise extension or enterprise b usiness functions.

Industry business solutions delivered as add-ons.

You have to install these industry solutions separately.

Business Functions in SAP NetWeaver 

CA Employee Qualifications for Concurrent/Global Employment 

Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 11 of 148

Page 12: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 12/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   CA_PA_CE_GE_QUALI

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SPS14 (recommended: SAP enhancement package 4

for SAP ERP 6.0)

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Qualifications and Requirements (CA-GTF-QR)

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Human Capital Management (EA-HR)

You need the EA-HR enterprise extension to use all of the functions of this

business function.

In this business function, a new relationship between qualifications and the central person is available.

 All of the prerequisites and functions of the business function that are described in the following only app ly if you implement the business function within SAP

ERP Human Capital Management.

If you implement SAP ERP Human Capital Management, you can use this business function to edit qualifications for concurrent or global employees. After you

activate the business function, the qualifications are assigned directly to the employees instead of to their personnel assignments or personnel numbers as before.

The concurrent or global employees, their superiors, or the HR Administrators can thus edit the qualifications more quickly and easily. They also receive more

exact information about which qualifications are stored for an employee.

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP 6.0 with enhancement package 4 and choose SAP ERP Central Component   Human Resources 

Personnel Management   Concurrent Employment   Personnel Management for Concurrent Employment   Employee Qualifications for Concurrent 

Employment/Global Employment   .

Integration

The functions of this business function are enhanced with elements of the following application components in SAP ERP:

Concurrent Employment (PA-CE)

Management of Global Employees (PA-GE)

PrerequisitesYou have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component   SAP_ABA 700

To use all of the functions of the business

function, you also need the following software

components:

SAP_HR (Recommendation:SAP_HR 604)

EA-HR (Recommendation:EA-HR 604)

You have activated the Human Capital Management (EA-HR) enterprise extension.

In Customizing for Personnel Management or Payroll, you have activated Concurrent Employment and/or Global Employment for the clients in your ERP system

in which you want to use the functions of this business function. For more information, see Employee Qualifications for Concurrent Employment/Global 

Employment  in the section "Implementation Considerations".

In the appropriate client of your ERP system, you use the application component Personnel Development and not the infotype Qualifications (0024) to store

qualifications for employees.

In the appropriate client of your ERP system, you use the application component Personnel Development and not object maintenance (transaction PP01) to

edit qualifications.

In customer applications (for example, a customer program or a customer iView for creating qualifications), you use the central function modules that provide the

application component Personnel Development to edit qualifications.

You have checked whether the relationship between qualifications and personnel assignments/personnel numbers can be easily converted into a relationship

between qualifications and the central person in the appropriate client of your ERP system. To do this, you start the conversion program Conversion of 

Qualification Relations from Assignment to Person (RHPE_CCE_CONVERT_RELATION) in test mode. For more information, see the program documentation.

When you activate the business function, the conversion program Conversion of Qualification Relations from Assignment to Person (XPRA)(RHPE_CCE_CONVERT_RELATION_XPRA) is automatically started. For more information, see the program documentation.

 Note

 Caution

 Note

 Note

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 12 of 148

Page 13: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 13/148

If you only activate Concurrent Employment/Global Employment after you have activated this business function in a client, you have to run the

RHPE_CCE_CONVERT_RELATION conversion program manually. Make sure that you start it directly after activating Concurrent Employment/Global

Employment.

You have specified how the ERP system responds when converting the relationships if different proficiencies are stored for the same qualification for an

employee in different personnel assignments.

You use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Merging Proficiencies for a Qualification in a Period  (HRCCE_INTG_PROF). For more information, see the documentation

on the BAdI. For the BAdI, see Customizing for Cross-Application Components by choosing General Application Functions  Generic Functions of the SAP 

Business Suite  Qualifications for Concurrent Employment/Global Employment   .

 As required, you have adjusted the distribution of the master data from Human Resources between various systems.

This is necessary if you distribute the data from a system in which the qualifications are linked to the central person into a system in which the qualifications are

linked to the personnel assignments, or vice versa.

You do not use the app lication component Defense Forces & Pub lic Security.

 As the component Defense Forces & Public Security does not use the central function modules for the application component Personnel Development to

edit qualifications, you may not activate this business function if you use the component Defense Forces & Public Security.

Features

The qualifications are stored for the employee and not for the employee's individual personnel assignments.

The time consuming multiple entry of qualifications for the individual personnel assignments of a concurrent or global employee is thus not required.

 All authorized persons (such as the employee, his or her manager, or an employee from the HR department) can access all of the employee's qualifications,

regardless of the personnel assignment.

If you create, change, delimit, or delete a qualification, this change takes effect for all of the employee's personnel assignments.

The transactions and reports for editing or reporting on qualifications show the qualifications at the level of the person ID.

For example, this enables a profile matchup for a concurrent or global employee.

CA, Appraisals, Evaluations, and Surveys 01 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   CA_HAP_CI_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP NetWeaver 7.01 SAP enhancement package 1

SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage HCM Self Services

Orig inal Software Component of Business Function SAP_ABA 7.01

ECC Software Component EA-HR 604

ECC Application Component Objective Settings and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM)

Portal Content Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.41

Business Package for Employee Self-Service 1.41

Business Package for Talent Management Specialist 1.40

Use outside of SAP ERP Human Capital Management  is not intended by SAP and is not covered by the terms of the license. Related application components

in SAP Library can therefore only be installed if you implement SAP ERP Human Capital Management .

You can use this business function to optimize appraisal processes. You do this by implementing Web-based user interfaces based on Web Dynpro for ABAP

technology.

You can create and edit the documents used in appraisal processes more efficiently using the relevant tool. You can implement the cross-application Tool for 

 Appraisals, Evaluations, and Surveys  in the application component Performance Management  (Objective Setting and Appraisals).

During the yearly appraisal process, managers as well as employees can process employee appraisal documents to conduct annual negotiations as well as

the performance appraisal for the employee.

For more information, see:

Documentation for business function HCM, Performance Management 01 (HCM_OSA_CI_1)

SAP Note 1239427

 Caution

 Caution

 Example

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 13 of 148

Page 14: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 14/148

Integration

The user interfaces from the Performance Management  (Objective Setting and Appraisals) application component is available to you in the following portal roles:

Portal Role: Manager in Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.41

Portal Role: Employee in Business Package for Employee Self-Service 1.41

Portal Role: Talent management specialist in Business Package for Talent Management Specialist 1.40

More Information

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0 under SAP ERP Central Component   Human Resources  Talent 

Management   Objective Setting and Appraisals (Performance Management)  .

Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   PCA_KEYV

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  Enhancement package 1 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Payment Card (AP-BP-PCA)

Payment Cards (SD-BIL-IV-PC)

You can use this b usiness function to increase security for payment card handling in your system.

You use this bus iness function if you manage payment card data in your system.

Prerequisites

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_ABA 7.01

You activated the Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption (PCA_KEYV) bus iness function.

Features

By activating this bus iness function you can:

Replace the keys used for payment card encryp tion on a periodic basis

Delete keys that are no longer used

Data Archiving: Standardization of Archiving Objects 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DA_ARCHOJB_STANDARD_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)

Application Component BC-CCM-ADK

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)

However, this business function is only relevant if you want to implement a

standardized archiving object together with SAP NetWeaver Information

Lifecycle Management.

You can use this b usiness function to use archiving objects with write programs whose characteristics and use have been standardized.

This business function documentation adds information about standardization to the documentation for the relevant archiving objects.

Standardization ensures that the write programs for the adjusted archiving objects have the same basic functions, therefore harmonizing the use of these

programs. This means that you can configure and expedite archiving projects for which these archiving objects are used more efficiently.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 14 of 148

Page 15: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 15/148

In addition to the changes to the write program, further improvements and enhancements have been made to some archiving objects where necessary. For an

overview of the possible changes, see SAP Note 577847 .

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Functions

Software component SAP_BASIS 702

SAP_ABA 702

SAP_APPL 605

Software component IS-OIL 605 Archiving in SAP for Oil & Gas

Software component IS-U 605 Archiving in SAP for Utilities

You have activated this business function in your back-end sy stem.

When you activate this business function, a switch BC set ensures that the new adjusted write programs for the standardized archiving objects are entered in

transaction AOBJ. The old write programs can then no longer be used. In the case of the archiving object LO_CHVW, the delete program is also replaced. The

preprocessing program was replaced in the archiving objects ISU_BILL and ISU_BILLZ only. When you activate the business function, the programs for all 

the archiving objects in the switch BC set are copied; individual archiving objects cannot be selected.

If you are implementing the standardized archiving objects as part of an ILM project with SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management, the following

prerequisite must also be met:

You have activated the Information Lifecyc le Management  (ILM) business function in your back-end system. For more information, see the Business Function

Documentation.

SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management is a licensed product. The standard functions for data archiving without the ILM enhancements are still

available as part of the standard system and do not have to be licensed separately.

Features

The standardized archiving objects are characterized by the following new or changed features compared to the non-standardized archiving objects:

Selection scr een of write program

On the selection screen for the write program under Processing Options, you can specify whether the program is started in test or production mode. For more

information, see Variant Maintenance for Archiving Jobs.

In the section for the log settings, you can define the type of log to be issued (complete detailed log or partial log) and the log output. You can also still enter a

short text for the archiving session. For more information, see Logs.

If you are implementing the archiving object as part of SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management and the prerequisites have been met (for example,

the corresponding business functions have been activated), the ILM Actions group box is also displayed. You can use these actions to archive data, for 

example. During archiving, the retention periods entered in the Information Retention Manager are evaluated. You can continue to create snapshots (copies) of 

data or destroy data that meets the prerequisites.

The following standardized archiving objects for the specified SAP applications (where used) are provided by this business function:

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 15 of 148

Page 16: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 16/148

Archiving Object Description New Write Program

SAP ERP

CO_ALLO_ST Completely cancelled documents CO_ALLO_ST_WRI

CO_CEL_RCL Reconciliation ledger: totals and line items CO_CEL_RCL_WRI

CO_KSTRG Controlling documents CO_KSTRG_WRI

CO_ORDER Master and transaction data for internal orders CO_ORDER_WRI

CO_PROCESS Data for activity-based costing CO_PROCESS_WRI

CV_DVS Document Management CV_DVS_WRI

FI_SCHECK FI check data FI_SCHECK_WRI

FT_VEIAV Intrastat documents FT_VEIAV_WRI

FT_VEXAV Extrastat documents FT_VEXAV_WRI

LO_CHVW Batch where-used data CHVW_WRI

MM_ASMD Service master MM_ASMD_WRI

MM_HDEL History records for inventory value tables MM_HDEL_WRI

PI_PLAN Master recipe PI_PLAN_WRI

PP_PLAN Routings PP_PLAN_WRI

PP_WKC Work centers PP_WKC_WRI

PP_BKFLUSH Document log PP_BKFLUSH_WRI

RL_LINKP System inventory records RL_LINKP_WRI

RL_LINV Inventory history RL_LINV_WRI

RL_LUBU Posting change notices RL_LUBU_WRI

RL_LSEG Stock movements RL_LSEG_WRI

SAP IS Utilities

ISU_BBP Budget billing plan REAR_ARCH_BBP_ILM

ISU_BCONT Business partner contacts (contract accounts

receivable and payable)

REARCH_BCONT_WRITE_ILM

ISU_BILL Billing document header REAARCH_READ_HEAD

ISU_EABL Meter reading results RELARCH_ARCH_EABL_ILM

ISU_INSPEC Campaigns for inspection list RE_INSP_ARCH_ARCHIVE_ILM

ISU_PRDOCH Print document header REPDAR_ARCH_HEAD_ILM

ISU_PRDOCL Print document line item REPDAR_ARCH_LINES_ILM

SAP IS Oil & Gas

OIH_LICENC Excise duty licenses OIH_LICENC_WRI

OIG_SHPMNT Bulk shipment OIG_SHPMNT_WRI

More Information

For more information on SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP   SAP ERP Central Component   SAP ERP 

Enhancement Packages  ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5   Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Cross-Application Components 

Information Lifecycle Management   .

Information Lifecycle Management 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ILM

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)

Application Component SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management (BC-ILM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation inAddition

Not relevant

Prerequisites

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 16 of 148

Page 17: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 17/148

You have purchased the license for SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecyc le Management .

You have installed the following components:

Type of Component Component (as of version) Note

Software Component SAP_BASIS 702

SAP_ABA 702

SAP NetWeaver BW SAP_BW 702 For queries about data in Retention Warehouse

(lifecycle management of data from

decommissioned sys tems)

Features

This business function enhances the SAP system with ILM-specific functions for data storage and data retention that complies with the law.

For more information, see Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System

ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Product Liability 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ILM_RWC_PRODUCT_LIABILITY

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)

Application Component Retention Warehouse (BC-ILM-RW)

Prerequisite Business Function Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Remarks

Software Component SAP_BASIS 702

SAP_ABA 702

SAP NetWeaver SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP

NetWeaver 7.0

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5

(BI_CONT 705)

SAP NetWeaver Portal Core SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Only For Calling BI Reports from the Portal

Portal Content Business Package for Retention Warehouse

Product Liability Audit 1.50

Only For Calling BI Reports from the Portal

If you run SAP NetWeaver ILM  and SAP NetWeaver BW  in separate sys tems, you have activated this business function for product liability in both systems.

You have made the Retention Warehouse system available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.

For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available

Features

This business function enables archiving (in the legacy system) in compliance with ILM and the querying of product liability-relevant data in the Retention

Warehouse system.

In a decommissioned ERP system, the activation of this business function results in the assignment of production-related archiving objects to the audit area

Product Liability . In the Retention Warehouse system, the activation of the business function enables you to convert the archive files transferred from a legacy

system that is to be decommissioned in an ILM-compliant manner. Only ILM-compliant data is available for evaluations in the audit area.

The Retention Warehouse content delivered for the product liability topic provides a basis that enables you to display data from a decommissioned SAP ERP

system in SAP NetWeaver BW  in case of a product liability issue. You can enhance this content as required.

When you activate the business function and the BW InfoAreas, you receive the following objects:

The Product Liability  (PRODLIABIL) audit area with entries for ILM objects and structures (set to active)

The Product Liability  (PRODLIAB_PAT_1) audit package template with entries for structures and views (set to active)

By activating the InfoAreas: InfoObjects, VirtualProviders, queries and report-report interfaces

To be able to display your data in SAP NetWeaver BW , you create an audit package for product liability to which you assign the audit package template we

provide. Based on the audit package, you then generate additional objects in SAP NetWeaver BW  that you need for displaying the data.

If you want to add to the content provided, then modify the provided audit area and audit package template as needed.

For more information, see Managing Information from Legacy Systems in Retention Warehouse

More Information

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 17 of 148

Page 18: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 18/148

Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System

ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ILM_RWC_TAX

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)

Application Component Retention Warehouse (BC-ILM-RW)

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Remarks

Software Component SAP_BASIS 702

SAP_ABA 702

SAP NetWeav er Busines s Warehouse SAP_BW 7 02

Business Intelligence Content SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 5

(BI_CONT 705)

SAP NetWeaver Portal Core SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Only For Calling BW Reports from the Portal

Portal Content Business Package for Retention Warehouse Tax

 Audit 1.50

Only For Calling BW Reports from the Portal

If you run SAP NetWeaver ILM  and SAP NetWeaver BW  in separate sys tems, you have activated this business function in both sys tems.

You have made Retention Warehouse available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.

For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available

Features

You can use this business function to establish the basis for displaying data in the ILM Retention Warehouse system that is relevant to tax auditing.

The Retention Warehouse content delivered for the tax auditing topic provides a basis that enables you to display tax auditing data from a decommissioned

SAP ERP system in SAP NetWeaver BW . You can enhance this content as required.

When you activate the business function and the BW InfoAreas, you receive the following objects:

The Tax Law  (TAX) audit area with entries for IRM object types and structures (set to active)

The Tax Audit  (TAX_PATTERN_1) audit package template with entries for structures and views (set to active)

By activating the InfoAreas: InfoObjects, VirtualProviders, queries and report-report interfaces

To display your data in SAP NetWeaver BW , after activating the business functions and the InfoAreas, c reate an audit package for tax auditing by assigning the

audit package templates we provide. Based on the audit package, you then generate additional objects in SAP NetWeaver BW  that you need for displaying the

data.

If you want to add to the content provided, then modify the provided audit area and audit package template as needed.

For more information, see Managing Information from Legacy Systems in Retention Warehouse

More Information

Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System

ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing in Oil andGas 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 18 of 148

Page 19: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 19/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ILM_RWC_TAX_IS_OIL

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Oil&Gas

Application Component BC-ILM-RW

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing (ILM_RWC_TAX)

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components:

Type of Component Component (as of version)

Software Component SAP_ABA 702

You have made Retention Warehouse available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.

For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available

Features

You can use this business function to enable SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecyc le Management (ILM) functions for archiving tax-relevant Oil and Gas data.

The archived data can be made available for reporting and analysis at a later date. This business function also activates predefined Retention Warehouse and

Business Warehouse content for tax audits of Oil and Gas data in SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management.

 Activating the business function has a different effect in the ERP application system to be decommissioned and in the Retention Warehouse (RW) system):

If you activate the business function in the Retention Warehouse System, you can convert the data that was transferred from a decommissioned legacy system

to a Retention Warehouse system in an ILM-compliant manner. Only the ILM-compliant data is available for the queries that are part of checks.

If you activate this Business Function in the ERP app lication system, the sys tem assigns the IS-OIL archiving objects listed below to the audit area TAX.

To archive data using the ILM-enabled archiving objects, you must first define the appropriate retention policies for the audit area TAX.

The following archiving objects are activated for the audit area TAX:

OIG_SHPMNT

OIH_LICENC

SN_ISOIH

The IS-OIL objects audit area OIH_LICENC, OIG_SHPMNT, and SN_ISOIH belong to the audit area TAX. For this audit area, you can use the delivered audit

package templateTAX_ISOIL to build your own audit packages.

More Information

Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System

ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing in IS-U 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ILM_RWC_TAX_IS_U

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage   IS-U

Application Component   BC-ILM-RW

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing (ILM_RWC_TAX)

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component

Software Component   SAP_ABA 702

You have made Retention Warehouse available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.

For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 19 of 148

Page 20: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 20/148

Features

You can use this business function to enable SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecyc le Management (ILM) functions for archiving tax-relevant Utilities data. The

archived data can be made available for reporting and analysis at a later date. This business function also activates predefined Retention Warehouse and

Business Warehouse content for tax audits of Utilities data in SAP NetWeaver ILM .

 Activating the business function has a different effect in the ERP application system to be decommissioned and in the Retention Warehouse (RW) system):

If you activate the business function in the Retention Warehouse System, you can convert the data that was transferred from a decommissioned system in an

ILM-compliant manner. Only the ILM-compliant data is available for the reporting and analysis purposes that are a part of checks.

If you activate this business function in the ERP app lication system, the sys tem assigns the Utilities archiving objects listed below to the audit area TAX.

To archive data using the ILM-enabled archiving objects, you must first define the appropriate retention policies for the audit area TAX.

The following archiving objects are activated for the audit area TAX:

ISU_BBP (Budget Billing Plans)

ISU_BILL (Billing Document Headers)

ISU_BILLZ (Billing Document Line Items)

ISU_PRDOCH (Print Document Headers)

ISU_PRDOCL (Print Document Line Items)

ISU_SETTLB (Settlement Documents)

ISU_SWTDOC (Switch Documents)

More InformationInformation Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System

Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   BC_SRV_STW_01

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP NetWeaver 7.02 Support Package Stack 11SAP NetWeaver 7.30 Support Package Stack 07

Technical Usage Not relevant

Application Component StreamWork ABAP Library (BC-SRV-STW)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

Prerequisites

SAP StreamWork ABAP integration requires the enterprise edition of SAP StreamWork. Learn more about SAP StreamWork enterprise edition and pricing at

http://www.sapstreamwork.com/enterprise.

You have installed the following components:

Type of Component Component (as of version) Note

Software Component SAP_BASIS 730 Support Package Stack 07

Features

By activating the business function you enable the SAP StreamWork ABAP integration. This activates additional IMG nodes under the path  Application

Services  Basis Services  Collaboration  StreamWork Integration  . Here you have to customize connectivi ty settings in order to enable applications to access

SAP StreamWork.

Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 2 

Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 20 of 148

Page 21: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 21/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   BC_SRV_STW_02

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP NetWeaver 7.02 Support Package Stack 13

SAP NetWeaver 7.30 Support Package Stack 09

Technical Usage Not relevant

Application Component Social Media ABAP Integration Library (BC-SRV-STW)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

BC_SRV_STW_01

By switching on the business function, you enable the activation of additional Customizing activities under  Application Services  Basis Services 

Collaboration .

You can make the system settings for sending SAP NetWeaver Gateway notifications to SAP StreamWork. Additional customer enhancements (Business Add-

Ins) are also available for user mapping and for the enhancement of the StreamWork Integration Library.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components:

You have activated the business function Enable the Integration of SAP StreamWork with ABAP (BC_SRV_STW_01).

You have installed the following components:

Type of Component Component (as of version) Note

Software Component SAP_BASIS 730 Support Package Stack 09

Features

The following additional functions of the Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) are available:

You can send SAP NetWeaver Gateway notifications to a collaboration platform that works as a feed aggregator at the same time. The additional Customizing

enables you do determine for which OData service notifications will be sent.

SAIL needs an e-mail address to link user names between the backend and SAP StreamWork. You can use the BAdI: E-Mail Addresses for Backend Users

to define the mapping between the backend user name and the e-mail address (and vice versa). The default implementation of the BAdI that has been

delivered uses a BAPI to read the e-mail address from the user profile in the backend.

The object factory creates SAP StreamWork objects. You use the BAdI: StreamWork Item Factory  to add the support connection for new object types that

SAIL does not yet recognize.

You use Customizing to differentiate between the application contexts. You use the application contexts to separate concurrent implementations. The entries

serve as the check table for the SCOPE filter value of the BAdI: StreamWork Item Factory . Therefore you may need a new entry as the prerequisite for your 

BAdI implementation.

Enable Social Media ABAP Integration 3 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   BC_SRV_STW_03

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP NetWeaver 7.02 Support Package Stack 13

Technical Usage  All

Application Component Social Media ABAP Integration Library (BC-SRV-STW)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to integrate SAP Jam in SAP ABAP applications. SAP Jam is the social collaboration platform from SAP. For integration, you

use the Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) delivered with this business function.

Integration

SAIL is an API library with several features providing the integration with SAP Jam. The features can be used by each SAP application in the ABAP

environment. The integration with SAIL is already available in some SAP applications, for example:

SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM)

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/crm702   Application Help  . In SAP CRM Library,

choose Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management   Basic Functions and Performance  Integration of SAP Jam with SAP CRM   .

SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management (SAP SLC)

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/slc113   Application

Help  . In SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management Library, choose Technical Concepts  Business Functions  SLC, Integration with SAP StreamWork   (to

use in compatibility mode with SAP Jam).

SAP ERP Human Capital Management (SAP ERP HCM)

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 21 of 148

Page 22: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 22/148

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com/erp-addons under SAP ERP Central Component  

Human Resources  Personnel Management (PA)  Personnel & Organization  Landing Page  Creating the Landing Page .

 As the SAP Jam integration is also available with the Collaboration CHIPs in s ide panels for SAP Business Suite, it can be added to each SAP Bus iness Suite

application.

For more information, see SAP Library of SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com/erp under SAP ERP Central Component   SAP ERP 

Cross-Application Functions  Cross-Application Components  Side Panel for Business Suite  .

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components with a minimum of one of the versions mentioned:

Type of Component Component (as of version) Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component SAP_BASIS 702 Support Package Stack 13

Software Component SAP NetWeaver Gateway 2.0 SP05 Send Gateway notifications

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

 After activating the business function Enable Social Media ABAP Integration 3 (this business function), we recommend deactivating the following business

functions (if active) as the new business function also contains all of their features:

Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 1 (BC_SRV_STW_01)

Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 2  (BC_SRV_STW_02)

You need access to SAP Jam as SAP Jam integrations with SAP applications require the SAP Jam Enterprise Edition. For more information, contact your 

account executive.

You have made the required settings in Customizing for the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the following release notes:

BC_SRV_STW_03: Business Function Enable Social Media ABAP Integration (New)

BC_SRV_STW_03: Social Media ABAP Integration - Compatibility Mode (New)

Features

ABAP Integration with SAP Jam

By switching on the business function, additional Customizing activities are available under  Application Services   Basis Services  Collaboration  . These

Customizing settings are the prerequisites for applications using the programming interface of the Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) for SAP Jam.

ABAP Integration with SAP StreamWork for SAP Jam (Compatibility Mode)

You can also use the ABAP integration with SAP StreamWork for SAP Jam in a compatibility mode. As SAP Jam is the successor platform to SAP StreamWork,

you can continue to use SAIL with the new SAP Jam platform. Those applications that already provide the Social Media ABAP Integration with SAP StreamWork

will also run with SAP Jam as the platform.

Gateway Notifications

You can send SAP NetWeaver Gateway notifications to a collaboration platform, as SAP Jam also works as a feed aggregator. The additional Customizing

enables you to determine for which OData service notifications will be sent.

User Mapping

SAIL needs an e-mail address to link user names between the back end and SAP Jam. You can use the BAdI: E-Mail Addresses for Back-End Users to define

the mapping between the back-end user name and the e-mail address (and vice versa).

More Information

For more information about Gateway notifications, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver Gateway on SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com/nwgateway   Application Help  . In SAP NetWeaver Gateway Library , choose SAP NetWeaver Gateway Developer Guide 

OData Channel   . Then choose the following paths:

  Advanced Features  Subscription and Notification Flow Subscription and Notification Flow for Push Oriented Scenarios 

 APIs and Coding   OData Channel APIs  OData Channel Push APIs 

For more information about SAP Jam, see http://www.successfactors.com/jam.

Business Functions in SAP Business Suite Foundation

General Business Functions for SAP Business Suite

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 22 of 148

Page 23: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 23/148

FND, Integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   FND_IDM_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation

(SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  All

Application Component User and Authorization Administration (BC-SEC-USR-ADM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

This business function contains information regarding the integration of SAP Business Suite 7.0 applications with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1.

Integration scenarios are available for automated user and authorization administration within a system landscape. The following applications of SAP Business

Suite 7.0 offer either new or enhanced integration scenarios:

Transfer of contact person data (for suppliers) from SAP Supply Network Collaboration to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing

identities.

Transfer of contact person data (for partners) from SAP Customer Relationship Management to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing

identities.Transfer of contact person data (for suppliers or bidders) from SAP Supplier Relationship Management to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or 

changing identities.

Transfer of student data from SAP Student Lifecycle Management to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities.

Features

Transfer of c ontact person data (for suppliers) fr om SAP Supply Network Collaboration

SAP Supply Network Collaboration (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration 7.0) can transfer contact person data (for 

suppliers) to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a continuous delta load.

From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation and change of users with corresponding authorizations in the target

systems. Similarly, users can be locked and unlocked, roles reassigned, and passwords reset. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP

NetWeaver Identity Management.

Transfer of contact person data (for partners) from SAP Customer Relationship Management

SAP Customer Relationship Management (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Customer Relationship Management 7.0) can transfer contact person

data (for partners) to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a continuous delta

load.

From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation, change, and deletion of users with corresponding authorizations in the

target systems. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.

Transfer of contact person data (for suppliers or bidd ers) from SAP Supplier Relationship Management

SAP Supplier Relationship Management (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 7.0) can transfer contact person data

(for suppliers or bidders) to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a

continuous delta load.

From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation, change, and deletion of users with corresponding authorizations in the

target systems. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.

Transfer of student data from SAP Student Lifecycle Management

SAP Student Lifecycle Management (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Student Lifecycle Management 7.0) can transfer student data to SAP

NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a continuous delta load.

From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation, change, and deletion of users with corresponding authorizations in the

target systems. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.

Integration

These new or enhanced integration scenarios supplement the existing scenarios for a standardized user and authorization management (with the option to

automate) within a system landscape from SAP systems.

Prerequisites

For the prerequisites for the individual integration scenarios, see the scenario documentation.

More Information

For additional information about all of the integration scenarios, see the SAP Libaray under Processes and Tools for Business Applications (CA-EPT)  User 

 Administration and Distribution with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management   .

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 23 of 148

Page 24: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 24/148

More information about SAP NetWeaver Identity Management can be found on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/netweaver  SAP 

NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1  .

FND, SAP Workflow & Alert Management (Mobile) 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FND_MOBILEINBOX_WF_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation

(SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND

Application Component   BS_FND

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Human Capital Management (EA-HR)

You can use this business function to react to workflow and alert messages by performing the required activities directly from your smartphones.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following software components as of the version mentioned:

SAP_BS_FND 702

SAP_ABA 702

SAP_BASIS 702

You have made the appropriate settings regarding roles and authorizations.

Features

SAP Workflow

 Approve or reject workflow items (for example, travel and leave requests)

Receive notifications of missed workflow-related deadlines

Alert Management

Display alert messages

Set alert messages to status complete

FND, SAP Document Builder  

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for BS Foundation

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND

Application Component SAP Business Foundation (SAP_BS_FND)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to create legally compliant documents using a customer-defined, standardized process, reducing the risk and cost of legal

actions resulting from inconsistent or nonstandardized processes and documents. Using cockpits, reviews, reports, and workflows, SAP Document Builder 

streamlines procurement processes and makes them transparent throughout the document generation process. The standardization and streamlining of processes

increases compliance with internal and external standards, rules, and regulations while cutting the cost of producing complex documents. SAP Document Builder 

also eliminates the need for a third-party document authoring solution and associated integration maintenance costs. SAP Document Builder offers both automatic

and manual document generation, as well as both single and mass document generation.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following software components as of the version mentioned: SAP_BS_ FND 702, SAP_ABA 702, and SAP_BASIS 702.

Depending on what forms you want to integrate, you must install the following:

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 24 of 148

Page 25: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 25/148

If you want to integrate Microsoft Word 2003 forms, you must install Microsoft Word 2003. If you want to edit clauses using Microsoft Word, you must also install

the Microsoft DSO Framer ActiveX Control.

If you want to integrate Adobe forms, you must install the SAP NetWeaver-based Adobe LiveCycle Designer.

If you want to combine PDF forms with text-based clauses to form an assembled legal document, you must use Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator or a similar 

third-party product.

You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for SAP Document Builder under the following structure nodes:

 SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Cross-Application Components  Document Builder   Basic Functions 

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Cross-Application Components  Document Builder   Regulation Sets and Elements 

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Cross-Application Components  Document Builder   Document Management

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Cross-Application Components  Document Builder   Business Add-Ins 

Features

Document Generation

You can create simp le and complex documents using customer-defined formats, templates, and c lause content. SAP Document Builder dynamically creates

legally compliant documents based on templates or business rules, enabling standardized content, formats, and process flows. Centralized templates and content

allow more visibility into processes from start to finish thanks to the traceability of actions and versions. Processes are streamlined and legal review time is saved.

Document accessib ility is controlled using roles, tailoring the user exp erience to your needs.

FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FND_SOA_REUSE_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation

(SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any stack including BS_FND

Application Component Enterprise SOA (CA-SOA)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to take advantage of cross-application tool improvements that facilitate the deployment of enterprise services. These include

enhancements to existing tools (Service Mapping Tool, Error and Conflict Handler), as well as new functions for categorizing error messages and asynchronous

point-to-point communication.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702

SAP_ABA 702

SAP_BASIS 702

Features

Service Mapping Tool

The Service Mapping Tool (SMT) enables you to fill target structures by using sets of source structures. For example, you can use it to convert enterprise service

data into an SAP-internal format, and vice versa. This business function adds the following features to the configuration component:

On the configuration user interface, you can toggle between the internal ABAP structure view (generated proxy structure) and the external representation

originating from a service interface (element names).

You can sort the tree display of a source or target structure alphabetically by field name.

You can assign the source field to the corresponding target field by dragging and dropping within the configuration user interface.

You can generate a where-used list of the relevant configuration entities (such as condition, transformation, conversion, and field check class) for a given

package group.

 A where-used list is available for mapping s teps that are used by enterprise services. You can see all the service interfaces and operations that use a

specific mapping step.

You make the Customizing settings for this function under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Enterprise

Services  Develop Enterprise Services  Create and Edit Mappings. 

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp  SAP ERP Enhancement Packages   ERP 

Central Component Enhancement Package 5   Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Mappings for Enterprise Services. 

Error and Conflict Handler (Forward Error Handling)

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 25 of 148

Page 26: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 26/148

You can use the Error and Conflict Handler (ECH) to process errors that are detected during the execution of asynchronous enterprise services. It enables you to

resolve errors and conflicts on the provider side, either automatically, or with the involvement of a business user. This business function adds the following features

to the Error and Conflict Handler:

You can use your own settings to overwrite the settings for the standard business processes for forward error handling.

You can define your own business processes for forward error handling in the Postprocessing Office.

You can register for enterprise services that support forward error handling.

Usability and user interface improvements are available for the Payload Editor.

You make the Customizing settings for these features under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Enterprise

Services  Error and Conflict Handler. 

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp  SAP ERP Enhancement Packages   ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5   Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Error and Conflict Handler (CA-FS-ECH).  

Error Categorizer 

You can use the Error Categorizer to classify error messages that are displayed when service operations are processed. This enables you to override the fixed

assignment of error categories to error messages.

You make the Customizing settings for this component under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Enterprise

Services  Error Categorizer. 

In the enhancement spot ES_BS_SOA_ERR_CAT, the Business Add-In (BAdI) BSSOA_ERR_CAT_BADI is available. You can use this to change the results

determined by the Error Categorizer.

Asynchronous Point-to-Point Communication

This business function includes additional features that enable you to trigger asynchronous enterprise services through the Web service protocol, without using a

mediator (such as SAP NetWeaver Process Integration):

The Response Receiver Correlation Manager enables you to register an incoming request or query. This registration can be picked up in the correspondingconfirmation or response message to control how the response message is routed.

In-app lication sequencing ensures that incoming messages are p rocessed in the correct order at application level. If a new message arrives, but a p receding

message is missing, it places the new message in a queue until the missing message arrives.

You can assign the point-to-point enabled services to service groups, and use this group definition to configure the services in the SOA Manager component. A

new wrapper class for outgoing service calls bundles the logical ports generated through this group configuration.

You make the Customizing settings for these features under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Enterprise

Services  Point-to-Point Enablement for Asynchronous Enterprise Services. 

In addition, you need to set up endpoints for your point-to-point enabled enterprise services, and configure the corresponding logical port in another client of your 

 ABAP system. You make these settings using transaction SOAMANAGER. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com/netweaver  SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (2004s)  SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2   and search for Working with

the SOA Manager.

FND, Visual Business 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FND_VISUAL_BUSINESS

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding SAP_BS_FND 702

Application Component CA-GTF-VBZ

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to take advantage of SAP Visual Business applications that visualize data from SAP and external data sources on a single

screen. Visual Business applic ations not only combine different types of content, but also include interactive graphics that visualize and combine enterprise data

with geographical or three-dimensional real-world scenes. SAP app lications integrate Visual Business applications to depict their business processes visually.

You can use the business function to configure Visual Business applications. Once the applications are configured, they can be executed within the integrating

applications.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702

3rd Party Framework Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1

Front-End Component SAP Visual Business 1.1

To use this business function, you have to activate it.

Features

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 26 of 148

Page 27: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 27/148

 After you activated the business function, Customizing for configuring Visual Business app lications becomes available. Make the corresponding settings in

Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications → Visual Business :

Maintain Default Proxy Settings

 Assign Map Products to Visual Business Applications

Note that the Visual Business applications can be executed within the integrating applications only if they are configured.

More Information

For general information about SAP Visual Business see:

SAP Library at http://help.sap.com → SAP Business Suite → Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) → SAP Visual Business

For information about the features realized in a particular integrating application, see the corresponding documentation in SAP Library.

Master Data Governance, Generic Functions 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   MDG_FOUNDATION

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Foundation 7.0

Technical Usage None

Application Component Master Data Governance (CA-MDG)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

None

This business function enables you to use basic functions, including the following:

Enterprise-wide centralized managing of master data using SAP Business Workflow

Safeguarding of data quality

Replicating of master data in target systems

Documenting of master data changes

This provides your enterprise with the following benefits, which reduce your total cost of ownership (TCO):

More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance

 Automated, secure, and documented replication of master dataThis business function is a prerequisite for using the following business functions with their preconfigured data models:

Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG)

Master Data Governance for Material (MDG_MATERIAL)

Master Data Governance for Supplier (ERP) (MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER)

This business function enables you to customize the preconfigured data models to meet your requirements and create your own data models without a template.

Integration

Once the business function is activated, you can make the following settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for 

Enterprise Applications  Master Data Governance  General Settings  .

In the target systems, you activate the business functions that are relevant to your applications. For example, if you use the business function

MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER in the central system, you can activate the bus iness functionCA_SUPPLIER_SOA in the target system.

Prerequisites

You have installed the software component SAP Business Suite Foundation (SAP_BS_FND), version 702 or later.

If you have activated the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), you need to make some changeovers (for 

example, from UI models to UI configurations) before you can activate the given business function. For more information about the changeovers, see the Release

Note MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Governance, Generic Functions.

Features

When you activate this business function, the following functions from the Master Data Governance (CA-MDG) component become available:

Generic Basic Functions

Enhance Existing Master Data Models or Create Your O wn

You can enhance the data models delivered by SAP (for example, by adding custom fields) and you can create your own data models and use them in the

change processes.

Change Request

You use change requests to change master data using workflow-based change processes. Q uality assurance reports on the change process are available.

You also can process change requests using SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe.

Data Replication Framework ( DRF)

The DRF is the technical platform for replicating the master data processed in a change request. You can use filters to make unrestricted and very granular 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 27 of 148

Page 28: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 28/148

data selections, for example, to replicate the data of certain company codes in very specific systems.

Key Mapping

Function for mapping values determined at runtime (for example, business partner IDs or material numbers) in the central system and target system.

Value Mapping

Function for mapping values determined at the time of design. While configuring the central system (in Customizing), you define, for example, country codes

and map these to their counterparts located in the target system. The application-spec ific enterprise services use value mapping.

Changing and Replicating of Master Data

Master Data Governance enables you to change master data in workflow processes. You can assign authorizations to these workflow processes. The workflow

processes are documented for reviewing purposes.

The system manages and documents all change steps in a change request.

You can access and edit the change requests from within a worklist in the portal.

You can replicate master data changes from the central system, in which you make and manage the changes, to the target systems. The DRF enables the

automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand. When doing so, you can use filters to determine which

objects are to be replicated in which systems. In addition to IDocs and enterprise services, you also can use upload and download functions to replicate the

master data changes to the target systems.

Business Foundation for Services for Supplier  

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function CA_SUPPLIER_SOA

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND

Application Component CA-MDG-BP

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this b usiness function to activate the BAdIs for customer specific mapping of the supp lier replication services.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_BS_FND

Features

With this business function BAdIs are offered to implement a customer specific mapping to override the standard mapping of the listed services

Enhancements for Business Suite Analytics 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND

Application Component BTD0000132 (CA-EPT-ANL-ACT)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

With this business function you can use new tools for working with BI Content:

The BI Content activation workbench enables you to activate BI Content bundles according to business criteria.The scalability level configuration allows you to define the method used by the system to access data during the execution of a BW query.

You can use the Analytics List Component  generic user interface building b lock (GUIBB) in Floorplan Manager (FPM) to embed analytical and p lanning

content into transactional applications without development effort, thereby reducing total cost of deployment (TCD).

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 28 of 148

Page 29: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 29/148

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version specified:

Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702

Features

BI Content activation workbench

You can use the BI Content activation workbench to activate and search the BI Content that is provided by SAP and grouped according to various business

categories. The BI Content bundles provided contain all BI objects that are needed to analyze a particular business area.

For more information, see BI Content Activation Workbench

Scalability level configuration

The scalability level configuration helps you to determine the method used by MultiProviders to access data during the execution of a BW query. You can define

the default access type at MultiProvider or query level and can also define the access type assigned to certain InfoProviders.

Make these settings before you use configured queries in the Query Monitor  (transaction RSRT), for example.

For more information, see Scalability Level Configuration

Analytics List Component

You can use the Analytics List Component generic user interface building block (GUIBB) in Floorplan Manager (FPM) to embed analytical and planning content

into transactional applications without development effort, thereby reducing total cost of deployment (TCD).

 An application based on the Analytics Lis t Component is availab le for simple lis t reporting. The report displays data based on a BI query selection in SAP List

Viewer (ALV) format. You can enter the BI query as an application parameter or at runtime. In addition to the SAP List Viewer (ALV) basic functions, for example,

data display in Crystal Reports format or export to Microsoft Excel, the simple list report supports navigation to other targets using the report-report interface (RRI).

You can change the application configuration to meet your requirements. Such changes are modification-free.

You can also build your own applications using the Analytics List Component in any Floorplan Manager application. For example:

 Advances analytical app lications with multiple simple list components and using the search component for variable input

 Advanced planning applications, including planning functions (for planning-enabled BI queries in BI-integrated planning, the analytics lis t component becomes

input-enabled)

 Analytics and planning appl ications embedded into transactional app lications

For more information, see Analytics List Component for Floorplan Manager .

FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   /BCV/MAIN

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND 70 2

Application Component Business Context Viewer  (CA-EPT-BCV)

Required Business Function Not relevant

Incompatible Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to activate Business Context Viewer (BCV) in your system. Business Context Viewer (BCV) is a framework that allows all

SAP Business Suite applications to integrate different kinds of additional information into the context of their applications. This information can be then analyzed

according to the user's business needs. You can display the analytic information in the form of charts, forms, pictures, and tables. You can integrate Xcelsius

dashboards into BCV.

Business Context Viewer (BCV) offers a configuration center where you can configure the way the system retrieves and displays the business data that you want

to perform analyses on. The configuration center is a single point of entry for all of the activities that a regular user and administrator of BCV might need. In addition,

you can use the configuration center to perform and display analyses of your business data for testing purposes.

BCV offers the side panel which is embedded into the application that you use BCV from. By opening the side panel you can access your query views, elements

on the Overview  accordion item, query view hierarchies, dashboards, and favorites directly from the app lication using BCV.

Integration

Being a successor application to Product-Centric View (PCV) that was part of enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0, Business Context Viewer is integrated

with SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) 7 .01.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 29 of 148

Page 30: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 30/148

Since BCV is part of the Business Suite Foundation (BS_FND) software layer, it can b e integrated into any application using Web Dynpro ABAP.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   BS_FND 702

Portal Content Business Package for Common Parts 1.5

Features

Configuration Center 

You use the configuration center to set up search connectors, BCV queries, and query views, and execute these objects for testing purposes. Furthermore, you

can perform administrative activities, such as checking the consistency of BCV objects, testing BCV queries and search connectors, grant authorizations, and so

on. For more information, see Configuration Center .

Side Panel

The side panel provides access to BCV directly from the application that uses it. For more information, see Side Panel.

Authorization Concept

BCV has a flexible authorization concept that allows authorizations to be granted and taken away at different levels. For more information, see  AuthorizationConcept in Business Context Viewer (BCV).

Business Content

The applications using BCV deliver predefined business content that you can use as it is, or change according to your business needs. For more information, see

Business Content for Business Context Viewer .

FND, Multiple Back-End Capabilities for Inbox 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   FND_IBO_MULTIBE_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND

Application Component Suite Inbox  (CA-EPT-IBO)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this b usiness function to process work items from multiple back -end systems, for example, SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM)

and SAP ERP, in a single POWL-based inbox. With a single inbox, you have a better overview of all the work items you need to process.

If you deactivate this business function, the data stored in Customizing is not deleted and you can reuse it if you decide to activate the business function again.

When you activate/deactivate the business function, you must do the following:

1. Log off from the sys tem and log on again.

2. Restart the inbox.

Only then the activation/deactivation of the business function will be taken into account.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version specified:

Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions:

Software Component   SAP_BS_FND 702

You have performed the following activities in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Inbox  

:

Define Exceptions

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 30 of 148

Page 31: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 31/148

 Assign Connected Back-End Sys tems to Inbox 

You have assigned the following roles to your users:

Workflow Inbox APIs: End User for Workflow Functionality  (SAP_BC_BMT_WFM_INB_API_END_USR)

This enables users to receive work items from a remote system via the workflow Application Programming Interface (API).

Workflow Inbox APIs: Service User for Remote Accesses  (SAP_BC_BMT_WFM_INB_API_SRV_USR)

This enables the workflow Application Programming Interface (API) to handle work items of users to which this role has been assigned via remote function

calls.

You must assign the above roles to the users if you want them to receive work items from the back-end systems. If you omit this step, the users will not receive

any work items from the back-end sys tems.

Features

You use a single inbox for multiple back-end sys tems.

You can deploy the inbox with or without SAP NetWeaver Portal.

For more information, see Inbox (CA-EPT-IBO).

Specific Business Functions for SAP ERP

PSM, Budget Period 

Technical Data

Technical name of the business function   PSM_GEN_BUDPER_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Public Sector Accounting

Application Component Funds Management Government (PSM-FM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation In

Addition

EA-PS

You can implement this business function to take advantage of a new master data entity called the budget period, which supplies modules in public sector 

accounting.

The new entity allows recording the time of budget and its execution, independent of fiscal year considerations.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-PS 604

FI-CA 604

IS-PS-CA 604

SAP_APPL 604

Business Intelligence Content From SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 4

Features

The business function offers the following features:

Budget period as separate master data entity in Public Sector Management (PSM)

This new master data object is made available in the Budget Control System (BCS) and in many budget execution processes. It is recorded in budget and

commitment/actuals figures in Funds Management (FM) and can serve as a balancing entity in the new General Ledger (G/L). Expiry and cancellation date

functions have been moved from the fund to the budget period.

Enhanced budgeting and active availability control if you are using BCS

 A field for the new entity has been added to all relevant user interfaces in BCS. This includes, but is not limited to, the central budget document transaction

FMBB. Budgets can be distinguished by means of the budget period, enabling you to have a budget from the same account assignment cycle, valid for more

than one fiscal year.

Enhanced financial and budgetary accounting

Existing user interfaces that display the FM account assignments (such as fund and funds center) have been enhanced to include the new assignment budget

period in the area of MM, SD, RE, FI, AM, CO, HR, FM. This includes all places where the coding block is used.

Enhancements to the US Federal Government solution

 All Federal-specific functions that display the FM account assignments have been enhanced to include the new budget period account assignment element.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 31 of 148

Page 32: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 32/148

More Information

Read the budget period documentation to obtain detailed information on where and how the budget period is used.

PSM, Budget Period 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation 702

(SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any stack including BS_FND

Application Component Funds Management (PSM-FM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

PSM, Budget Period (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_1)

With this business function you can use the master data entity of the budget period that populates the modules in Public Sector Accounting. With the budgetperiod introduced with business function PSM, Budget Period  (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_1), you can move the date controls from the fund to the budget period. This

makes master data maintenance and reporting much easier. With this business function, the budget period is also now available in Travel Management (FI-TM),

Controlling (CO), Grantor Management (PSM-GM-GTR) integrated with accounts receivable or accounts payable management, and in Enterprise Services for 

Human Capital Management (HCM).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702

You activated the PSM, Budget Period 2  bus iness function.

You activated the PSM, Budget Period  bus iness function.

Features

Budget period in Controlling (CO)

The budget period was added to the transactions of Overhead Cost Controlling (CO-OM) where account assignments of Funds Management (fund, functional area,

grant) are displayed. This includes the activity allocation, overhead costs and planning transactions.

You can now enter the corresponding budget period as the account assignment directly in a document in these transactions instead of just deriving it. The

complete account assignment is then updated in Financial Accounting (FI) and in Funds Management (FM).

The following transactions and functions were enhanced accordingly:

CO commitment: The budget period is now also contained in the commitment data in CO.

 Activity allocation: The budget period is now available in the following transactions:

Direct activity allocation (see Cost Center Accounting/internal orders/project system  Controlling: Actual postings  activity allocation  ), CATS and

confirmations

Indirect activity allocation posting (see Cost Center Accounting/internal orders/project system  Controlling: Actual postings  activity allocation posting  

)

 Actual clearings: In the wake of the enhancement of activity allocation with the budget period, the following actual clearings were also adjusted accordingly (see

 Cost Center Accounting/internal orders/ project system  Controlling: Period-end c losing   Individual functions  )

Indirect activity allocation in actual

Target=actual-activity allocation

Template clearing in actual

Price calculation including revaluation

Overhead rates in actual (periodic and real-time) were also enhanced with the new budget period dimension. These are the following transactions (see Cost 

Center Accounting/internal orders/project system  Controlling: Period-end c losing   Individual functions  ):

 Actual overhead calculation:cost centers/activity types

Commitment-overhead calculation:cost centers/activity types

 Actual-overhead calculation: Order 

 Actual-overhead calculation: Business processes

Commitment-overhead calculation: Project, WBS element, network

 Actual-overhead calculation: Project, WBS element, network

CO manual planning:

You can now also use the budget period in the following CO planning transactions (see Cost Center Accounting/Internal Orders/Project System 

Controlling: Planning   )

Planning cost elements/activity input

Statistical k ey figures

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 32 of 148

Page 33: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 33/148

To be able to use the budget period in CO planning, use the new planning profile SAPFFB CO planning with budget period . We recommend that you import

these layouts using transaction OKBF ( Controlling   General Controlling   Production Start-Up Preparation  Transport System Settings  Transport 

Settings for Planning   Import Standard Planning Layouts  ) from client 000 into the current clients. This refers to the following layouts: 1-101FFB, 1-

102FFB, 1-301FFB, 1-302FFB, 1-401FFB, 1-401FFB-T, 1-402FFB, 1-402FFB-T, 1-403FFB, 1-403FFB-T, 1-601FFB, 1-701FFB, 1-701FFB-T, 1-

702FFB, 1-702FFB-T, 1-703FFB, 1-703FFB-T, 1-901FFB.

The above-mentioned planning profile is designed for dimensions fund, budget period, and functional area; it does not include grant. If you want to use the

grant, we recommend copying the required layouts and adding the grant as a selection criterion.

Periodic p lan clearings, planning aid:

The following plan clearings and planning aids were enhanced with the new account assignment dimension budget period (see activity allocation/internal 

orders/Project System  Controlling: Planning   ):

Planning distribution, p lanning assessment, periodic transfer posting in plan

Indirect activity allocation in plan

Overhead rates in p lan (see above also: Overhead rates in actual)

Plan-settlement

Copy Planning

Plan-revaluation

Template clearing in p lan

CO general:

Both the plan BAPIs and the corresponding ALE methods now contain the budget period.

The CATS transfer was also enhanced with the budget period.

You can now also use the budget period in the actual settlement order (transaction KO88).

Budget Period in Grantor Management (PSM-GM-G TR)

The budget period is applied during invoicing to accounts receivable/accounts payable accounting. For this, the following integration scenarios are available:

Integration with PSM Earmarked Funds:

When an earmarked fund is created, PSM account assignment derivation is used to determine the budget period from the CRM approval. When this business

function has been activated, invoicing to accounts receivable/accounts payable accounting app lies the budget period from the earmarked funds and c reates

the FI document.

No Integration with PSM Earmarked Funds:

When this business function has b een activated, invoicing to accounts receivable/accounts payab le accounting derives the budget period using PSM account

assignment derivation and enters the budget period in the FI document created.

The budget period is available immediately for grantor management, including in cases using rule-based account assignment distribution:

You can use the budget period as a condition field in the definition of the program profile.

You can use the budget period as a field in the definition of rule-based account assignment distribution.

Budget period in SOA Services of Human Capital Managements (HCM)

The budget period is now available in several HCM SOA services, including services for business objects Employee Time Sheet  and Work Agreement .

Human Capital Master Data Management

Cancel Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule

Find Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule By Employee

Create Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule

Update Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule

Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Sheet)

Change Time Sheet

Complete Employee Time Sheet

Find Employee Time Sheet By Employee

Check Change Time Sheet

Time & Labor Management (Employee Time)

Find Times For Employee Time Sheet By Elements

Read Employee Time By Employee

Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Agreement)

Create Time Recording Completion Rule

Read Time Recording Completion Rule

Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Sheet Configuration)

Read Employee Time Sheet Configuration

Budget period in Travel Management

You can now enter the corresponding budget period as the account assignment directly in a document instead of just deriving it.

The budget period was added to transactions in Travel Management in which Funds Management account assignments (fund, functional area, funds center, and

so on) are disp layed. This includes infotype 0017 (travel p rivileges), distribution in travel request, the travel plan and the travel expenses sheet. You can hereby

enter the corresponding budget period as the account assignment directly in a document instead of just deriving it. The complete account assignment is then

updated in Financial Accounting (FI) and in Funds Management (FM).

More Information

For more information, see the documentation on Budget Period and Budget Period in Human Capital Management.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 33 of 148

Page 34: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 34/148

Embedded Search in SAP ERP 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   ERP_ENTERPRISESEARCH

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.01

Technical Usage Central applications

Application Component Processes and Tools for Business Applications  (CA-EPT)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to implement a faster and safer search function for business objects in SAP ERP (for example, materials or orders). This

search function supports both a full text search and a fuzzy search, and, by means of the authorization concept, ensures that only authorized persons have

access to your data.

For more information about Embedded Search, see Search.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components from the version specified:

Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 701 Technical requirement for the Embedded Search

function; installation of this software component is

mandatory

SAP_APPL 604 Use of these software components depends on the

business process; installation of the software

components is optionalEA-APPL 604

EA-HRGXX 604

PLMWUI 700

IS-MEDIA 604

In the Enterprise Search Cockpit  (transaction ESH_COCKPIT), you have activated the search using Embedded Search for the required business objects. To do

this, on the SAP Easy Access sc reen, choose Tools   Administration  Monitor   Search Engine  Enterprise Search Cockpit   .

See SAP Note 965097 if you want to use the Embedded Search function.

ERP, PDF-Based Forms 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   ERP_ALL_PDF_FORMS

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Dependent on required business area

Business function requir ing activation in addition Not relevant

With this business function you can provide your SAP ERP users with forms in output format PDF. With the new technology you can optimize and standardize

your internal and external communication and your business processes, based on the output format PDF, which is available internationally.

You can use PDF-based forms for display in the application, as well as for printing. You receive additional options for layout, the forms have a contemporary

appearance, and make handling simpler for the users.

This business function is different to other business functions as follows:

The PDF-based forms are provided via Customizing, and not via this business function. Therefore you cannot activate this business function.

There is no test catalog available for this business function.

Integration

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 34 of 148

Page 35: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 35/148

The PDF-based forms are available for most applications of SAP ERP. Some country versions are an execption.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components from the version specified:

Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions

Software Component Dependent on required business area

SAP NetWeaver Adobe Document Services

SAP NetWeaver Adobe Lifecycle Designer 7.1*

SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.0: JDK 1.4.2

SAP NetWeaver 7.1: JVM based on 5.0 Standard

Third-Party Product Adobe Reader®**

* Adobe Livecycle Designer must be installed on all computers on which reports are c reated at design time.

** Adobe Reader ® must be installed on all computers on which the forms are to be displayed. You can download it from the Adobe™ Homepage.

Features

You can introduce the PDF-based forms in your company dependent on your requirements. This means that you can activate the PDF-based forms dependent

on the business process or department that you want to support. You do this by importing the relevant ECC software component versions, and by activating the

forms for each application component in Customizing. The system changes the user interfaces over when you activate an application component. For more

information see the Implementation Guide under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications  PDF-Based Forms for 

SAP ERP    Activate PDF-Based Forms. 

For an overview of all forms provided from SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0, use the report RERP_EHP_SHOW_FORM_LIST. If you have to

postprocess the forms before implementing them, from the output list of the report you can navigate to the related activity of the Implementation Guide or the

corresponding transaction. The prerequisite is that you have imported the corresponding ECC software component version (for example, EA-HR 604) for the

business area.

The PDF-based forms offer the following advantages:

With PDF, you can run you internal and external company communication with forms in a recognized industry standard. In addition, they offer a uniform

appearance across all areas of your company.

You have extended options for the layout of a form. This means that, with the PDF-based forms, you can map existing templates pixel for pixel or integrate

digital signatures. Setting the layout of a PDF-based form is also usually simpler and more cost-effective and you only need one technology to design your 

forms.

You receive enhanced, uniform print functions that meet the requirements of different business areas.

You can archive PDF-based forms easily and uniformly.

You can send the form as an e-mail.

You can convert a display/print form into an interactive form.

ERP, New Interface for ABAP Lists 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   ERP_ALL_LISTS

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central applications

Application Component Cross-application Components (CA)

Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition Not relevant

You can use this b usiness function to standardize and harmonize the user interaction with ABAP l ists. Many lis ts already delivered will be replaced b y (mainly

 ALV) lists that improve the user-friendliness and usability. This enables you to reduce training costs.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version specified:

Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 701

To use this business function, you have to activate it. The switch used is a simple soft switch. The switch can be reversed; no coding is changed.

FeaturesVarious ABAP lists already delivered have received a new interface. Many of the lists delivered by SAP have very individual graphic disp lay and interaction

options. With the new interface, these display options are harmonized and standardized so that the user can take advantage of the capabilities of the list without

knowing the individual functions of each list.

When you activate the business function, the new interface will be used as standard for ABAP lists. For some of these lists, you can subsequently define (mostly

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 35 of 148

Page 36: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 36/148

at report level), whether you want to use the new interface or one of the ABAP lists previously delivered.

This might make sense for the following reasons:

The users may know the appearance of a list well and not want a new interface.

In some cases, the standardization of specialized user interfaces means you then have to do without individual functions. Users may prefer to retain individual

functions and accept that interfaces are not standardized.

For more information, see SAP Note 1180432.

There is no test catalog available for this business function.

There is no object list available for this business function. However, a list of groups of functions in question is available. The attributes of these groups depend

on the respective application area. You can display the list in the VERPSOFTSWITCHES view (Group ID  ALLISTS). In this view, you can activate or 

deactivate the switch for each individual group.

Example

ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ERP_ALL_LISTS_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central applications

Application Component Cross-application Components (CA)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this b usiness function to standardize and harmonize the user interaction with ABAP l ists. Several lists already delivered will be replaced by (mainly

 ALV) lists that improve the user-friendliness and usability. This enables you to reduce training costs.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702

To use this business function, you have to activate it.

Features

New User Interface for ABAP Lists

Various ABAP lists already delivered have received a new interface. Many of the lists delivered by SAP have very individual graphic disp lay and interaction

options. With the new interface, these display options are harmonized and standardized so that the user can take advantage of the capabilities of the list without

knowing the individual functions of each list.

When you activate the business function, the new interface will be used as standard for ABAP lists. For some of these lists, you can subsequently define (mostly

at report level), whether you want to use the new interface or one of the ABAP lists previously delivered.

This might make sense for the following reasons:

The users may know the appearance of a list well and not want a new interface.

In some cases, the standardization of specialized user interfaces means you then have to do without individual functions. Users may prefer to retain individual

functions and accept that interfaces are not standardized.

For more information, see SAP Note 1302424.

The former business function ERP_ALL_LISTS is still valid. For more information on ERP_ALL_LISTS, see SAP Note 1180432.

There is no test catalog available for this business function.

 Note

 Note

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 36 of 148

Page 37: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 37/148

ERP, Roles for SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Technical Data

Technical Name of the Business Function   ERP_NWBC_ROLES

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.0

Technical Usage Dependent on required business area

Application Component See documentation for the individual roles

Required Business Function See documentation for the individual roles

This business function does not activate any functions. It is for information purposes only.

 As of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can use the following roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC):

Expenditure Certification

 Automotive Dealer Portal for Spare Parts

 Automotive Dealer 

Portal for Vehicle Management

 Automotive Dealer Portal for Warranty

Business Consolidation

Business Unit Analyst

Buyer 

Cash Manager 

Closing Cockp it

Course Administrator 

Credentials Manager (Insurance)

Credit Manager 

Defense Forces & Public Security

Dispute Manager 

In-Store Merchandise and Inventory Management

Financial MDM

Generic EAM Functions

Instructor/Tutor 

Internal Sales Representative

Maintenance Technician

Maintenance Worker 

Manager Self-Service

Master Data Governance for Supplier 

Material Governance

Perishables Procurement

PLM Web User Interface

Production Supervisor 

Quality Inspector 

Recycling Administration

Reorganization Management

Retail - Power Lists

Retention Warehouse Adminis tration

Retention Warehouse Product Liability Audit

Retention Warehouse Tax Audit

Sales Compensation Analyst (Insurance)

Sales Representative (Insurance)

Simplified Reporting

Student Lifecycle Management

Supplier-Managed Inventory

Tax Officer (Public Sector)

Transportation Planner 

Takeover/Handover of Technical Objects

Warehouse Operations

Warehouse Operation Manager 

These roles only contain applications and services that are also contained in the corresponding roles delivered for the SAP NetWeaver Portal. However, note that

some of the roles offer fewer functions than the corresponding Portal roles.

For more information about the features offered by these roles and their technical prerequisites, see the application documentation for the corresponding role (see

links under “Features”).

The new roles are only available if you use SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 37 of 148

Page 38: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 38/148

Features

For documentation on the individual roles for SAP NetWeaver Business Client, see SAP Library for SAP ERP under SAP ERP Cross-Application Functions 

Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts 

This business function is obsolete (and can no longer be activated). Activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational

Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management

Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to centrally manage and make changes to the financial master data of your enterprise. The approval process is guided via a

workflow and you have the option of distributing the master data changes to your transactional systems via enterprise services.

Integration

This business function enables you to distribute the master data for the application components General Ledger ( FI-GL) and Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-

BCS).

PrerequisitesYou have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   SAP_BS_FND 701

Software Component   FINBASIS 604 Complete List of Features

Software Component   SAP_APPL 604 Import of master data into General Ledger (FI-GL)

Software Component   SEM-BW 604 Import of master data into Business Consolidation

(FIN-SEM-BCS)

Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.40 Complete List of Features

SAP Enterprise Services   FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and

SEM-BW 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2 or 

SAP APPL 6.04, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2

Distribution of Master Data Using Enterprise

Services

Business Intelligence content SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 4 Reports Ab out Master Data Changes

To be able to distribute the master data of the chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary Customizing settings for General Ledger.

To be able to distribute the master data of the group chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary settings for Business Consolidation. For more

information, see Workbench for Customizing.

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Financial 

Master Data Management .

Features

The following functions become available when you activate this business function:

Approval Process for Master Data Changes

You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. The process

begins with a request for a change, which can b e evaluated and commented by various p ersons. Once the request has been evaluated, considered and

approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests document and

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 38 of 148

Page 39: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 39/148

manage all steps in the approval process.

Master Data Change

You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see the documentation of the business package.

Versioning of Master Data

The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document

when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the

changes.

Replication of Master Data

You can distribute the master data changes from the system in which you centrally made the changes to the transactional systems: You can use enterprise

services to distribute new and changed chart of accounts master data. You also can download the master data as files for upload into the transactional systems.

Data Modeling

In the standard delivery, the business function contains a data model for changing charts of accounts. You can adjust the data model to suit your master data.

Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management 

Technical Data

Technical name of business function   FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE

Type of business function Enterprise business function

Available as of  SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.01 (SAP_BS_FND 701)

Technical Usage Utilities/Waste&Recycl./Telco

Application Components Financials Basis (FIN-FB)

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA)

Directly dependent business function requiring activation in addition FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)

With this b usiness function, you can use the functions that are available in SAP D ispute Management with Release SAP ERP 6.0, Enhancement Package 4.

You can thereby integrate your exis ting processes in the process flows of SAP Disp ute Management.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is only required for the following functions

Software Components SAP_BS_FND 7.01

EA-APPL 6.04

SAP_APPL 6.04

FI-CA 6.04

IS-UT 6.04

If you want to manage dispute cases in an external component, such as Customer Relationship Management (CRM), activate the business function Integration FI-

CA/CRM Disp ute Management (FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE). You can either create dispute cases in this external component, or you can create them in

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA) or in SAP Biller Direct, and then send them to this external component.

The prerequisite for using the business function Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management (FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE) is the business function FSCM

Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD). This business function in turn requires the business function FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION). However, to be

able to use the functions of the business function FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management (FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE) you are not required to activate the

business function FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION).

Features

Using the bus iness function Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management , you can:

Transfer dispute cases of SAP Dispute Management from Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable to external applications for further processing

Transfer dispute cases, which you created in an external application, to Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable, thereby providing process integration with

the functions of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (payments, dunning)

One possible implementation of this integration is the integration of dispute cases of SAP Dispute Management in FI-CA with dispute management in SAP

Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) (see Dispute Case).

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 39 of 148

Page 40: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 40/148

HCM, Roles for SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   HCM_NWBC_ROLES

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component E-Recruiting  (PA-ER)

HR Administrative Services (PA-AS)

Talent Management  (PA-TM)

SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO)

Business Package for Manager Self-Service (HR) (EP-PCT-MGR-HR)

Enterprise Compensation Management  (PA-EC)

Objective Setting and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM)

Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (PA-CP)

Travel Management  (FI-TV)

Required Business Function Not relevant

This business function does not activate any functions; it is for information purposes only. However, the roles Course Administrator  and Instructor/Tutor  are an

exception since you use this bus iness function to activate them.

 As of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can use the following roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC):

Recruiter 

Recruiting Administrator 

HR Administrator 

Talent Management Specialist

Course Administrator 

Instructor/Tutor 

Manager Self-Service

These roles contain only applications and services that are also contained in the corresponding roles provided for SAP NetWeaver Portal. Note, however, that the

following roles provide less features than the corresponding portal role:

Manager Self-Service

Instructor/Tutor 

For more information about the features of these roles, see the application documentation for the relevant role (see references under “Features”).

You only have the new roles available if you implement SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.

Integration

You can use the bus iness function HCM, ESS on Web Dynpro ABAP  (HCM_ESS_WDA_1) to additionally use the Employee Self-Service role in SAP

NetWeaver Business Client for HTML. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Business Functions  Business Functions in SAP 

ERP   Enterprise Business Functions  Human Capital Management   HCM, ESS on Web Dynpro ABAP   .

The following roles use the inbox for work items, alerts, and notifications based on Web Dynpro for ABAP, which is available as of SAP Business Suite

Foundation 7.01 SP06:

Recruiter 

HR Administrator 

Manager Self-Service

For more information, see the release note Inbox (New) and Inbox (CA-EPT-IBO).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component   SAP_BS_FND 702

Software component   ERECRUIT 605 Recruiter 

Recruiting Administrator 

Software component   SAP_HRGXX 604, EA-HRGXX 605 HR Administrator 

Talent Management Specialist

Course Administrator 

Instructor/Tutor 

Manager Self-Service

SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Business Client v3.0 for Desktop

or SAP NetWeaver Business Client v3.0 for 

HTML1

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 40 of 148

Page 41: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 41/148

1 For more information about this NWBC version, see SAP NetWeaver Library and choose Business Client Versions. For more information about the required

installation and configuration steps, see SAP NetWeaver Library and choose Installation and Client Configuration.

To use all of the features of the roles, depending on the required role, you must also activate the following business functions:

Recruiter : HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)

Recruiting Administrator : HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)

HR Administrator : HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)

Talent Management Specialist: HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management  (HCM_TMC_CI_1)

If in the Talent Management Specialist  role, you want to use the enhancements that are available with the business function HCM, Core Processes in

Talent Management 02  (HCM_TMC_CI_2) (for example, launchpad with access to BI Content and other reports, enhancements, and usability

improvements for the talent assessment and calibration grid), you also need to activate this business function.

Course Administrator : HCM, Learning Solution 02  (HCM_LSO_CI_2)

If you want to use the BI Content available in the launchpad in the Course Administrator  role, you also need to activate the business function HCM,

Learning Solution 03 (HCM_LSO_CI_3).

Instructor/Tutor : HCM, Learning Solution 02  (HCM_LSO_CI_2)

Manager Self-Service:

For services from E-Recruiting  (PA-ER): HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)

For services from HR Administrative Services (PA-AS): HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)

For services from Talent Management  (PA-TM): HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management  (HCM_TMC_CI_1)

For services from SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO): HCM, Learning Solution 02  (HCM_LSO_CI_2)

For services from Enterprise Compensation Management  (PA-EC): HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 02  (HCM_ECM_CI_2)

For services from Objective Setting and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM):

CA, Appraisals, Evaluations, and Surveys 01 (CA_HAP_CI_1)

HCM, Performance Management 01 (HCM_OSA_CI_1)

HCM, Performance Management 02  (HCM_OSA_CI_2)

For services from Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (PA-CP): HCM, Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (HCM_HCP_CI_1)

For services for managing time and labor data: HCM, ESS with Web Dynpro ABAP  (HCM_ESS_WDA_1)

For visual representation in services with organizational charts: HCM, PD UI Visualization 01 (HCM_PD_UI_1)

For services from Travel Management  (FI-TV): Travel Management  (FIN_TRAVEL_1)

For more information about these business functions, see the relevant business function description and release note.

You have made the Customizing settings for the relevant application.

For more information, see the release note for this business function and the application documentation for the relevant role (see references under “Features”).

Features

The following roles are available for SAP NetWeaver Business Client.

Recruiter 

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Recruiter in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

Recruiting Administr ator 

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Recruiting Administrator in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

HR Administrator For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

HR Administrator in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

Talent Management Specialist

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Talent Management Specialist in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

Course Administrator 

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Course Administrator in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

Instructor/Tutor 

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

Instructor/Tutor in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

Manager Self-Service

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP   Roles  Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client 

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 41 of 148

Page 42: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 42/148

Manager Self-Service in SAP NetWeaver Business Client   .

HCM, Cross Analytics 1 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   HCM_ANALYTICS_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central applications

Application Component Personnel Administration (PA-PA)

Talent Management (PA-TM)

Enterprise Compensation Management (PA-EC)

SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this bus iness function to perform comprehensive, cross analyses and benchmarking of various HCM processes for Personnel Administration and

Talent Management, for Compensation, and for all of your employees training activities.

This business function does not activate any functions; it is for information purposes only. The full range of BI Content features on which this business function

is b ased is only available to you if you have implemented SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 as well as SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-

On 5 and Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On. You must also have activated the business functions mentioned in the Prerequisites

section.

Integration

 All queries and dashboards that are provided with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 (queries) and Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On

(dashboards) for HCM are available for the portal role Talent Management Specialis t  in the Business Package for Talent Management Specialist 1.51 in the

workset Reports in a reporting launchpad (iView Reports). See also Reports in Talent Management.

Furthermore, the query and the dashboards of SAP Learning Solution are available for the portal role Course Administrator  in the Business Package for Course

 Administrator 1.51.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse

Software component   SAP_BS_FND 702

Software component   EA-HRGXX 605

Portal content Business Package for Talent Management

Specialis t 1.51

For calling HCM queries and dashboards in the

portal role Talent Management Specialist

Portal content Business Package for Course Administrator 1.51 For calling the LSO query and dashboards in the

portal role Course Administrator 

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 BI Content

BI Content Add-on Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content

 Add-On

Xcelsius Dashboards

To use the full range of BI Content features and of Xcelsius dashboards, you must also activate the following business functions:

HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management 02 (HCM_TMC_CI_2)

HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 02 (HCM_ECM_CI_2)

HCM, Learning Solution 03 (HCM_LSO_CI_3)

Since cross-HCM-component BI Content is the basis for the new analyses on which this business function is based, you should activate all business

functions mentioned above for this BI Content. In any case, you should at least activate the business function HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management 

02  (HCM_ECM_CI_2). This business function provides basic key figures that are used for the analyses of the learning activities and of the compensation of 

your employees. If required, you can also activate one of the other two business functions.

The following prerequisites also apply:

To display the provided Xcelsius Dashboards, you require Adobe Flash Player Version 9. Note also the license terms for SAP Bus inessObjects.

To create your own dashboards, you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03, FP1). Take note of the corresponding license terms.

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 42 of 148

Page 43: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 43/148

For Xcelsius dashboards, the following system requirements also apply :

SAP NetWeaver 7.0, enhancement package 2 (SP04)

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5

Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On 5

Features

For analyzing cross-HCM processes, you have the tools of SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse as well as dashboards of SAP Bus inessObjects Xcelsius

Enterprise available:

SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse provides you with flexible tools for reporting, analyzing, and planning to evaluate and interpret data.Xcelsius dashboards also enable you to display interactive analyses attractively and clearly.

 Activating the aforementioned business functions provides you with numerous and cross analysis options for the topics Succession Planning, Talent Management

and Talent Development, employee compensation, and employee training:

Queries (SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse)

Succession Planning Monitor  (0TMC_MP01_Q0001)

Quality of Succession Planning  (0TMC_MP01_Q0002)

Talent Ratio (0TMC_MP02_Q0001)

Personnel Actions per Talent Group (0TMC_MP02_Q0002)

Leavers per Talent Group (0TMC_MP02_Q0003)

Performance and Potential  (0TMC_MP02_Q0004)

Employees' Qualifications (0TMC_MP03_Q0001)

Qualification Requirements of Positions (0TMC_MP04_Q0001)

Talent Assessments (0TMC_MP05_Q0001)

Movements in Talent Groups (0TMC_MP06_Q0001)

Results of Compensation Review for Talents (0ECM_MP02_Q0001)

Overall Compensation for Talents  (0ECM_MP03_Q0001)

Learning Activities of Talents (0LSO_MP03_Q0001)

For the detailed range of features of the new BI Content of the HCM components for SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01, see the

aforementioned business functions and the release note for BI Content. See SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com 

SAP NetWeaver   SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability   Information Integration by Key Capability   BI Content   BI Content 705   Release Notes SAP 

NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5   .

Dashboards (SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius)

Succession Planning Monitor  (0XC_TMC_MP01_D01)

Talent Supply  (0XC_TMC_MP02_D01)

Utilization of Talents (0XC_TMC_MP01_D02)

Human Capital Management Dashboard  (0XC_PA_C01_D01)

Potential and Performance Analyses (0XC_TMC_MP02_D02)

Strengths and Risks in the Organization (0XC_STRENGTHS_RISKS)

Skills and Competencies (0XC_SKILLS_COMPETENCIES)

Learning Activities of Talents (0XC_LSO_MP03_D01)

Learning Activities of the Organization (0XC_LSO_MP03_D02)

Compensation Monitor  (0XC_COMPENSATION_MONITOR)

For more information on the Xcelsius dashboards for SAP HCM, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com  SAP NetWeaver   BI Content   BI 

Content 705   Extension BI Content 705   and choose the Human Resources area.

More InformationEmbedded Analytics

Prerequisites: Disp laying Data from Queries in Xcelsius Dashboards

FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application 

Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 43 of 148

Page 44: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 44/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   /BCV/MAIN

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND 70 2

Application Component Business Context Viewer  (CA-EPT-BCV)

Required Business Function Not relevant

Incompatible Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to activate Business Context Viewer (BCV) in your system. Business Context Viewer (BCV) is a framework that allows all

SAP Business Suite applications to integrate different kinds of additional information into the context of their applications. This information can be then analyzed

according to the user's business needs. You can display the analytic information in the form of charts, forms, pictures, and tables. You can integrate Xcelsius

dashboards into BCV.

Business Context Viewer (BCV) offers a configuration center where you can configure the way the system retrieves and displays the business data that you want

to perform analyses on. The configuration center is a single point of entry for all of the activities that a regular user and administrator of BCV might need. In addition,

you can use the configuration center to perform and display analyses of your business data for testing purposes.

BCV offers the side panel which is embedded into the application that you use BCV from. By opening the side panel you can access your query views, elements

on the Overview  accordion item, query view hierarchies, dashboards, and favorites directly from the app lication using BCV.

Integration

Being a successor application to Product-Centric View (PCV) that was part of enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0, Business Context Viewer is integrated

with SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) 7 .01.

Since BCV is part of the Business Suite Foundation (BS_FND) software layer, it can b e integrated into any application using Web Dynpro ABAP.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   BS_FND 702

Portal Content Business Package for Common Parts 1.5

Features

Configuration Center 

You use the configuration center to set up search connectors, BCV queries, and query views, and execute these objects for testing purposes. Furthermore, you

can perform administrative activities, such as checking the consistency of BCV objects, testing BCV queries and search connectors, grant authorizations, and so

on. For more information, see Configuration Center .

Side Panel

The side panel provides access to BCV directly from the application that uses it. For more information, see Side Panel.

Authorization Concept

BCV has a flexible authorization concept that allows authorizations to be granted and taken away at different levels. For more information, see  Authorization

Concept in Business Context Viewer (BCV).

Business Content

The applications using BCV deliver predefined business content that you can use as it is, or change according to your business needs. For more information, see

Business Content for Business Context Viewer .

 Business Functions in SAP ERP

Enterprise Business Functions

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 44 of 148

Page 45: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 45/148

 

Cross-Application Enterprise Business Functions

SAP All-in-One Roles 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function /KYK/GEN_AIO_SIMPLIFICATION

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Components Controlling (CO), Financial Accounting (FI), Materials Management (MM),Production Planning and Control (PP), Sales and Distribution (SD)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

This business function provides you with roles that have been c reated specifically to meet the needs of small businesses and midsize companies. These roles

cover transactions, object lists, and reports and enable efficient access to the processes of Financial Accounting, Controlling, Materials Management, Production

Planning and Control, and Sales and Distribution.

By using SAP NetWeaver Business Client  and the functions of the POWER lists for the object lists and the reports, the user has access to a modern, uniform

interface for processing the processes.

Integration

The objects delivered with this business function offer only additional functions for the transactions of the existing components; existing functions are not

changed if you activate the business function. Above all, the additional functions provide easier access to existing functions. To some extent, new POWER lists

delivered can also be used as a replacement for existing transactions or reports.This business function covers the objects that were part of SAP All-in-One Enablement Kit 1.2 . If you have already used this, but now want to changeover to SAP

ERP, all you have to do is activate this business function. No other migration steps are necessary.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components from the version specified:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_APPL 603 and EA-APPL 603

SAP NetWeaver SAP GUI 7.10 and SAP NetWeaver Business

Client 1.1

In order for the role menus to be displayed

correctly, the end users must use SAP NetWeaver 

Business Client.

You must have performed the Customizing activities for the transactions contained in the roles you want to use.

You should also not use the roles delivered directly. Instead, you should copy them and, for example, adjust the authorizations.

Features

The business function covers the following objects that simplify the access to existing ERP functions.

Roles that are defined in the SAP Profile Generator (transaction PFCG)

The roles provide access to functions and processes of Financial Accounting, Controlling, Materials Management, Production Planning and Control, and Sales

 And Distribution. From a technical view, an area can have several roles with different scopes of authorizations (for experts, specialis ts, and managers).

Object lists in the form of POWER lists in the ERP system

POWER lists based on the Web Dynpro ABAP technology. POWER stands for Personal Object Work Entity Repository. A POWER list provides a list of 

objects with which the end user assigned to a role has to work with frequently. For one object in the list, the end user can start various transactions from the list.

Reports that also use the POWER list technology

In contrast to the worklists, the reports offer very few opportunities to navigate to further transactions.

For more information about the functions of this business function, see SAP All-in-One Roles.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 45 of 148

Page 46: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 46/148

Shared Services Framework 

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_SSC_AIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage   Central Applications

Application Component Controlling (CO)

Financial Accounting (FI)

SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Required Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

You can use the this business function to enable use of the Shared Services Framework functions, that are available cross-component in multiple SAP

applications.

In connection with SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function in particular optimizes the setting up and operation of an Accounting

Interaction Center (AIC) that runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It is therefore closely linked to the Multifunctional Shared Service

Interaction Center  business function in the SAP CRM system.

Using this business function offers the following business advantages:

Reduced processing times for service requests and the resultant potential for savings

Integration of Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) in the Shared Services Framework

 AIC agents can process large numbers of service requests in the AIC user interface, due to direct access to business objects in ERP systems.

Reduction in the number of errors when processing service requests

Enhanced quality of service

With this business function, you can use the following functions in the Shared Services Framework:

Manual creation of service requests from an ERP system

Search for service requests from an ERP system

Start ERP transactions from the Interaction Center 

Link ERP objects with service requests

Integration of SAP Collections Management with the Accounting Interaction Center 

Integration of SAP Dispute Management with the Accounting Interaction Center 

Irrespective of whether you use the Share Services Framework, this business function provides you with the option of connecting non-SAP systems and various

SAP systems to SAP Collections Management.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   EA-APPL 605

SAP_APPL 605

Software Component   BBPCRM 701 Integration with the AIC

Software Component   FINBASIS 605 * Integration of SAP Collections Management and

SAP Dispute Management with the AIC

Software Component   FINBASIS 604 * Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP

systems to SAP Collections Management

* Software component, in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management run

You have set up the application components that you are using.

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FI , Enablement for FSS (New) (FIN_605_AIC_1_M).

You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:

FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) in the system in which CRM runs.

You need this business function to integrate with the AIC. For additional information on this business function , see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP

Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm   SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business Functions (SAP 

Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)  Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management   Multifunctional Shared Service

Interaction Center   .

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1) in the system in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 46 of 148

Page 47: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 47/148

Management run.

You require this business function if you use the integration of these two applications with the AIC.

The following prerequisites must be met for the users:

So that ERP users can create and find service requests from the ERP system, they must have a user with the same name in the CRM system, to which the

business role Occasional User  (SSF_OCCUSER) is assigned.

So that AIC agents can call ERP transactions from the AIC and link ERP objects with service requests, they must have a user with the same name in the

ERP systems, to which the roles are assigned that authorize then to execute ERP transactions (transaction PFCG).

Features

Manual cr eation of service req uests from an ERP system

Service requests are used for quick reporting and resolution of problems and errors. Consequently, you can create a service request in the transactions for 

Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) direct, for example in the Change Vendor  (FK02) or Display General Ledger Documents (FV53) transactions.

When you create a service request, the system opens it in the SAP CRM Interaction Center direct. It transfers contextual data, and gives you the option of 

enclosing a screenshot. Moreover, you can link various ERP objects, for example, the vendor master record or the document.

The AIC agent in turn can later call up the linked objects by navigating direct from the service request to the ERP system.

Search for service r equests from an ERP system

In addition to the option of creating service requests direct from an ERP system, you can search for services requests. You can check their status and update the

service requests, without an AIC employee having to be active. You can choose whether you want to see only those service requests that have been created in

the ERP system in the UI of SAP CRM, or whether you want to see all of the service requests irrespective of where they were created.

Support for launching ERP transactions from the AIC

When you start an FI or CO transaction from the AIC, the ERP system calls a search screen, making it easier for the AIC agents to access the required data

records. The search screen already contains the data that is known from the account identification in the AIC (customer/vendor and company code).

Enhanced Generic O bject Services for linking ERP objects with service requests.

In many FI and CO transactions in the ERP system you can link individual business objects with a service request in the AIC, for example, the master data of a

customer or vendor, using Generic Object Services (GOS). AIC agents can use this link to start the transaction with the ERP object in the ERP system from a

service request.

Generic Object Services for linking ERP objects with service requests in the AIC are only available if an AIC agent has started the ERP transaction from the AIC,

and the account in the AIC has been identified and confirmed. If at the point when the ERP transaction was started from the AIC a service request had been

opened in the AIC, the system inserts the link in the business context of the service request. If no service request had been opened in the AIC, the system

inserts the link in the interaction records of the accounts currently confirmed in the AIC.

Fact Sheet for Customer and Vendor 

The Accounting Interaction Center contains the account fact sheet that is used in financial scenarios as a support tool for communication with partners. It provides

context-related information about the communication partner, where the partner can be a customer or a vendor.

The fact sheet for the customer contains information about the special business context that ranges from purchasing volumes to the latest dispute cases for the

customer. The AIC agent is therefore able to access a complete picture of the current and past relationship with the communication partner in his daily work.

The fact sheet for the vendor contains data such as open invoices, payments, and master data. It assists the AIC agent in giving informed replies to inquiries from

the vendor.

Search for External Documents

The Accounting Interaction Center employee must be in a position to access information about the communication with the customer to date that is as complete as

possible. This includes documents that are stored in the optical archive.

The Find Document  function of the CRM user interface gives the AIC agent the option of searching from one place for documents relevant to a business partner in

a series of back-end systems, and of displaying them if necessary.

Roles

Both accounting clerks from various SAP ERP applications and agents from the SAP CRM Interaction Center are involved in the Shared Services Framework

processes. All of those involved have to navigate between various SAP systems. Such navigation is supported by the following new roles:

Occasional User  (SSF_OCCUSER)

This business role allows ERP users to create service requests from ERP systems, and to search for service requests.

 Accounting IC Agent  (IC_AIC_AGENT)

With this business role, agents in the AIC can process service requests from Financial Accounting and Controlling, execute the appropriate ERP transactions,

and link ERP objects with service requests.

 AIC Manager  (AIC_MANAGER)

 AIC managers are IC managers who have the additional option of linking particular categories of service requests with particular categories of dispute cases.

Based on this, AIC managers can have particular dispute cases created automatically.

For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  – see the SAP Library on

SAP Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Interaction Center   Interaction

Center WebClient   Shared Services Framework   Integration with SAP ERP   .

Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP systems to SAP Collections Management

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 47 of 148

Page 48: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 48/148

This function increases the range of accounting systems the data of which you can access with SAP Collections Management. You set up the connection with the

help of a substitute system that you connect to SAP Collections Management, and to which you transfer the required master and transaction data. In this way you

can centralize and standardize the processes for collecting open receivables, irrespective of the system architecture used in your company. In the standard

system, the sample loading procedureSAP_46C is available for an SAP system with Release SAP R/3 4.6C.

Without this business function you can only connect SAP systems where Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) has at least the status SAP R/3 Enterprise

4.70.

For more information, see:

Connection of Non-SAP Systems and Various SAP Systems

Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm 

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 

Technical Usage   Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component SAP Collections Management  (FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP Dispute Management  (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Required Business Function FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_SSC_AIC_1)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC)

You can use this business function to use new functions for the integration of SAP Collections Management , SAP Dispute Management  and Accounting 

Interaction Center  that run in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). This business function is, therefore, closely connected to the Multifunctional 

Shared Service Interaction Center  business function in the CRM system. In the  Accounting Interaction Center , the following work centers are available that you

can use for processing Financial Shared Services in your company:

My worklist  (Integration with SAP Collections Management )

 All worklists  (Integration with SAP Collections Management )

Receivables processing  (Integration with SAP Collections Management )

Dispute case processing  (Integration with SAP Dispute Management )

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   FINBASIS 605

SEM_BW 605

SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP 

NetWeaver 7.0 , software component version

FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2

Web application of SAP Dispute Management 

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

You are using the Accounting Interaction Center  of SAP CRM  in your company to implement Financial Shared Services. You are using at least SAP 

Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0  for this.

In addition to both SAP Collections Management  and SAP Dispute Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) in SAP ERP .

Software component FINBASIS is either in the same system as software component SAP_APPL or software component BBPCRM.

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FSCM, Enablement for FSS (New).

You have activated the following business functions:

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (this business function)

FSCM Functions 3

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (in the FI-AR sys tem)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (in the CRM system)

For additional information on this business function, see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP 

CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)   Business Functions for 

SAP Customer Relationship Management   Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center   .

Features

 A user-friendly Web interface with integrated telephone is available to the AIC agent in the Accounting Interaction Center  that supports him in the collection of 

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 48 of 148

Page 49: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 49/148

outstanding receivables and the resolution of dispute cases. He can easily navigate to the connected ERP systems, and access the required data.

For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  – see the SAP Library on SAP 

Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Interaction Center   Interaction Center 

WebClient   Shared Services Framework   Integration with SAP ERP   .

Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_SSC_TIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)

Required Business Function Travel Management 3(FIN_TRAVEL_3)

With this business function you can integrate selected applications of SAP Travel Management in your SAP Shared Services environment. Users can create

service requests in these Travel Management applications.

In connection with SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function supports the operation of a Travel Interaction Center (TIC) that runs in

SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) For this, you must have activated business function Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center 

(CRM_SHSVC) in the CRM system.

This business function provides the following business advantages in connection with the Travel Interaction Center:

Optimizes your business processes for trips and expenses

Improves service quality and the efficient resolution of problems

You can perform conventional functions, such as approving trips and further processing by travel administrators, in your shared services environment.

Integration

The service request is available in the following Travel Management applications:

Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications

Expense report

Express expense report

Work center for travelers

Work center for travel assistants

Work center for approving managers

These applications and their dialog windows contain the Service Request  or Create Service Request  pushbuttons, which ERP users can use to create or 

search for service requests.

Transactions in SAP G UI

Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05)

Travel Manager (transaction TRIP)

ERP users can create or find service requests using the menu bar of these transactions under Help  Service Request   .

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software Component   EA-HR 605 and SAP_HR 604

Software Component   BBPCRM 701 Integration with the Travel Interaction Center 

Portal Content Business Package for Employee Self-Service

1.41

If you use SAP NetWeaver Portal.

You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.

You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.

You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_2) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management 3 (FIN_TRAVEL_3) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services (FIN_SSC_TIC_1) business function (this business function) in your back-end

system.

You have activated business function Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) in the CRM system.

You require this business function for the integration with the Travel Interaction Center. For additional information about this business function, see the SAP

Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm   SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business

Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)  Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management   Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center   .

To create service requests in an ERP system and to search for their own service requests, ERP users require a user in the CRM system with the same name,

that is assigned to the occasional user  (SSF_OCCUSER) business role.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 49 of 148

Page 50: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 50/148

Features

Manual creation of service requests

In the shared services environment, service requests are used to communicate between different SAP applications and the Shared Services Center in SAP

CRM. The Travel Interaction Center is a Shared Services Center in SAP CRM that focuses on processing expense reports and service requests for expense

reports.

ERP users can create service requests from within certain applications and transactions in SAP Travel Management that are specifically directed towards the

Travel Interaction Center. The ERP system automatically provides the service request with context information for the application. This includes the linked object

that allows the service agents in the Travel Interaction Center to call the application with the relevant trip number, the personnel number, and user name from the

service request.

In Customizing of the ERP system, you can define which fields of a service request are predefined. For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management 

under Integration with the Shared Services Framework   .

Search for service requests

When you create a service request, the system calls the service request interface from SAP CRM in a separate window. In addition to the service request, this

also contains a search function for service requests that ERP users can use to search for their own service requests.

Role for supporting service agents in the Travel Interaction Center 

In the Travel Interaction Center, service agents can process expense reports and related service requests. To access the applications of Travel Management,

service agents must use the same user names in the Travel Management system and have the necessary authorizations. This PFCG role Travel Interaction

Center Agent  (SAP_FI_TV_TIC_AGENT) is tailored to the requirements of service agents. It authorizes service agents to run the transactions and Web Dynpro

 ABAP-based applications they require from within the Travel Interaction Center; for example, to display or change an expense report in the Travel Interaction

Center.

More Information

For additional information about the Travel Interaction Center, see SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm   SAP 

CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  SAP Customer Relationship Management   Interaction Center   Interaction Center WebClient   Shared 

Services Framework   Integration with SAP ERP   Travel Interaction Center   .

HCM, Integration with Shared Services Interaction Center  

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   HCM_SSC_EIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Employee Interaction Center (PA-EIC)

Other Business Functions You Need to Activate HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)

You can use this business function to make the functions of SAP ERP Human Capital Management (SAP ERP HCM) available in the Shared Services Center 

(SSC), which runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). This business function is therefore closely related to the Multifunctional Shared 

Services Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) business function in the CRM system.

The integration with HCM Processes and Forms enables agents using the Shared Services Center in the CRM system to access HCM processes in the

connected HR system via a service request. The data for the processes is stored in the connected HR system.The integration with the authentication functions of HCM Employee Interaction Center  (EIC) enables agents to use an employee's authentication data that is stored

in an HR system to identify an account. With this additional security check, the agent can identify the account without ambiguity.

Integration

The Multifunctional Shared Services Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) business function supp lements the HCM, Integration with Shared Services Interaction

Center (HCM_SSC_EIC_1) business function and makes the corresponding functions availab le in SAP CRM.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component EA-HRGXX 605

 App lication Components Employee Interaction Center (PA-EIC)HR Administrative Services (PA-AS)

Employee Self-Services (PA-ESS)

You have activated the Multifunctional Shared Services Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) bus iness function in the connected CRM system. Activating this

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 50 of 148

Page 51: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 51/148

business function is a prerequisite for integrating the HCM functions with the Shared Services Center in CRM.

Features

Execute Authentication Information from HCM in the CRM Interaction Center 

This function enables agents in the Shared Services Center of the CRM system to check and confirm the identity of an employee on the telephone using

authentication information. The authentication information is stored by employees via the Employee Self-Service  Authentication in the HR system. The employee

does this by saving answers to predefined questions. The agent can ask the employee one or more of these questions in Account Identification and compare the

answers given by the employee on the telephone with the ones stored.

Execute HCM Processes in the CRM Interaction Center 

This function enables agents in the Shared Services Center in the CRM system to link processes to a service request.

The agent can start a new HCM process. To do this, the agent selects a process in the process browser and the system opens the interactive form of the

process. After the agent enters the required data, the system links the process to the service request.

The agent can link an existing process to the service request. The system shows the agent a list of all processes that exist for this employee.

The agent can display a linked process. To do this, the system opens the PDF form for the process in display mode.

Execute Employee Self-Service, On Behalf of the Employee, in the CRM Interaction Center 

This function enables agents, on behalf of an employee, to launch Employee Self-Service (ESS) app lications in the Shared Services Center in the CRM system.

The agent can work with the activities and link them to a service request as described here:

The agent can start the Employee Self-Service application. From a the business context of a Service Request , after confirming the business partner of the

employee, the agent selects an ESS area page; either Personal Information or Working Time. The area page lists all the available applications within the ESS

area.

The agent launches ESS applications from the area pages as configured in the ESS launchpad role and ESS_ONBEHALF instance. If the ESS application is

activated for data tracking of self-services, the application is automatically linked with the service request for any future tracking purposes.

Internal Self-Services, Enablement for Financial Shared Services 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_ISS_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component Internal Self-Services (FIN-FB-ISS)

Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions(MDG_FOUNDATION)

You can use this business function to enable internal self-services that allow both financial shared services center agents and service requestors to work more

efficiently. Business users access the self-services through a self-service home page that has been assigned to their user role (both SAP NetWeaver Portal and

SAP NetWeaver Business Client roles are supported). The self-services can also be accessed by a shared service center agent working in the Account

Interaction Center (AIC) (who is assigned a user role from the service request work center).

The daily duties of an a financial shared services center agent often consist of relatively simple and repetitive requests. This can be time consuming and

inefficient. In many cases, requestors can use self-services to complete these tasks themselves, allowing them to retrieve or update information as required. Self-

service integration leverages existing and new technology to achieve a homogenous architecture in a heterogeneous landscape. This allows you to reduce your 

service center agents' workload while improving the processing time for requests and consequently the efficiency of the service for requestors.

Internal Self-Services for Financial Shared Services are part of SAP’s Shared Services Framework, a software solution that enhances selec ted SAP businessapplications with capabilities relevant to shared services delivery. The SAP Shared Services Framework enables the operation and management of 

multifunctional shared services centers. This has the following advantages:

Reduces the time and effort spent on communication between the shared service center and its clients

Optimizes the service experience

Enables the delivery of shared service center services across a heterogeneous system landscape comprising multiple back-end sys tems

The shared service center is also enabled to operate with key performance indicators (KPIs) and service level agreements (SLAs).

Integration

You can use this business function to enhance both the Accounting Interaction Center (AIC) and the CRM Interaction Center (IC). The business function

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  CRM_SHVC, (CRM_SHVC ) , valid as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM, can be used to enable

self-services in the Accounting Interaction Center (AIC).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 51 of 148

Page 52: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 52/148

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   FIN BASIS 605

SAP_BS_FND 702

Features

The main features of this business function are:

Shared Services Fr amework

The shared services framework introduces a homogenous solution to heterogeneous landscapes by providing a central system hub to administrate all self-

services across multiple back-end sys tems. The hub is a self-service integration repository that acts as a self-service integration hub. This hub can be built in an

existing sys tem, such as your ERP or CRM system.

Self-Services Home Page

The Configurable Launchpad UIBB (UIBBFPM_LAUNCHPAD_UIBB) Web Dynpro application component is delivered with this business function to allow you to

create and maintain a self-services home page. The home page can b e used by business users (who have been assigned the required roles) to access self-

services. For example, a sales representative may need to display a customer’s fact sheet. He or she can access the customer fact sheet request on the home

page. This allows him or her to access the information that he or she requires quickly and efficiently. Power users can use the provided configuration options to

adapt the home page to specific business needs.

Internal Self-Services Role

 A new PFCG role, Internal Self-Services (SAP_FIN_INT_SELF_SERVICE), is delivered. This role is a template user role which can be used to embed the self–service user role in any other PFCG role used for the NetWeaver Business Client.

Self–Services

This business function allows you to implement two kinds of self-services:

Self-service requests based on Master Data Governance (MDG )

You can enable Master Data Governance (MDG ) related self-services such as Change a Cost Center . This allows you to execute self-services that operate

across multiple back-end systems. You can also use the same technology to enable self-services related to account posting, for example, posting to financial

accounting or controlling.

Self-service requests for information

You can enable information related self-services such as a customer or vendor factsheet. SAP Biller Direct and vendor information service requests can also

be integrated as self-services.

Integration of MDG and SSF for Financials 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_SSC_MDGINT

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage None

Application Component FINBASIS

Required Business Function MDG, Financials, Org. Units (FIN_MDM_ORG)

MDG, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)

You can use this business function to integrate the Shared Services Framework (SSF) for Financials and Master Data Governance for Financials. This integration

is achieved through the integration of the service request (part of the SSF) and the change request (part of MDG). Once this integration is complete, users can

create a change request directly from the service request user interface (UI). The change requests processing logs are also integrated into the service request so

that users can track the status of an open request.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   FINBASIS 605

You have activated the following business functions: MDG, Financials, Org. Units (FIN_MDM_ORG) and MDG, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)

You have completed the Customizing activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications  

Master Data Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials  Integration  :

You have configured the other settings required for this integration. For more information, see Configuration of SSF and MDG Integration

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 52 of 148

Page 53: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 53/148

Features

Once this integration is complete, users can create change requests directly from the service request UI. The change request's p rocess ing status is also

displayed in the service request to allow shared service center users to track the progress of the change request. In the standard delivery, if the change request

status i s In Process, the service request is automatically set to In Process as well. You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) delivered with this b usiness function

to change this setting.

Integration of CRM and ERP 

ERP, Integration with Claims and Funds Management 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ERP_CF_INTEGRATION_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 

Technical Usage   Financial Supply Chain Mgmt

Application Component Invoicing  (SD-BIL)

 Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)

SAP Dispute Management  (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Prerequisite Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)

Claims and Funds Management  (CRM_CF_1)

With this business function you can use the following functions with integrated procedures between Claims and Funds Management (SAP CRM), Invoicing (SAP 

ERP), Accounts Receivable (SAP ERP) and SAP Dispute Management (SAP ERP):

Claim SettlementClaim Chargeback Recovery Process

Claims Management  (Trade Claims Management, TCM) and Funds Management   (Trade Funds Management, TFM) relate to Trade Promotion Management 

(TPM), a component of CRM marketing.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   FINBASIS 605

SAP_APPL 605

SEM_BW 605

Software Component SAP ECC 6.0 Enterprise Extension PLM, SCM,

SAP enhancement package 5 (EA-APPL 605)

Enhanced rebate p rocess ing

For you to be able to use the business function, the following prerequisites must be met:

You are using Claims and Funds Management  of SAP CRM  as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0 .

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing of all application components that you use. For additional information on the specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note ERP_CF_INTEGRATION_1: Business Function ERP, Integration CLA & FM (New).

You have activated the following business functions:

ERP, Integration with Claims and Funds Management  (this business function)

FSCM Integration 3

FSCM Functions 3 in the SAP Dispute Management  system

You need this business function for the claim chargeback recovery p rocess.

Claims and Funds Management  in the CRM system

For additional information about this business function, see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on the SAP Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm 

SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)   Business

Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management   Claims and Funds Management   .

Features

Claims Settlement

Instead of CRM billing, you can now also use Sales and Distribution (SD) billing that is in the ERP system for the settlement. This does not change the processes

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 53 of 148

Page 54: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 54/148

for the end user in either the FI or SAP Dispute Management  sys tems.

You can convert a claims settlement from the CRM system to a billing document or credit memo of the ERP system. If a corresponding rebate agr eement has

been made, you can settle this within Claims Management and in doing so create a credit memo document for the payment.

Rebate agreements that are paid using Claims and Funds Management  are excluded from processing using the standard settlement programs. Their final

settlement is made exclusively using a special finalizing process . In this p rocess, you can make the final settlement for rebate agreements so that there is

always a payment with the value zero in the result of the finalizing process.

For more information, see Finalizing Rebate Agreements.

Claim Chargeback Recovery Process

This process facilitates the cross-application processing of claim chargeback recoveries that you manage in Claims Management  of the CRM system. In this

respect this b usiness function is closely connected to the FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3) business function that is in the SAP Dispute Management 

system.

Showing the Tax Amount

You can calculate and post the tax amount that is needed for the processes in claims management.

CRM, Time Recording Using Multiple CATS Data Entry Profiles 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   HCM_CRM_CATS_PROFILE

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Time Sheet (CA-TS)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

In this business function, there are multiple data entry profiles available for the working times that are entered in SAP CRM service confirmation items.

There is no test catalog available for this business function.

Integration

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Functions

Software Component   SAP_APPL 605

Software Component   SAP CRM

To use this business function, the following prerequisites must also be met:

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing. For more information about specific Customizing settings for this business function, see the correspondingrelease note: HCM_CRM_CATS_PROFILE: Business Function CRM Time Recording - CATS Profiles (Enhanced).

Features

Multiple Data Entry Profiles for the CRM Service Confirmation

The working times that are entered in SAP CRM service confirmation items are transferred into a time sheet in SAP ERP. This transfer is controlled by the data

entry profile. Previously, only one data entry profile could be defined in SAP ERP, which was used for all service confirmations. This enhancement makes it

possible to define multiple data entry profiles for the following key fields of CRM service confirmations:

Leading transaction type (transaction type of the first transaction in a string of transactions)

Transaction type

Service organization

Responsible organizational unit

You cannot control selection of a data entry profile at item level. In other words, you can only use one data entry profile per SAP CRM service confirmation.

 Caution

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 54 of 148

Page 55: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 55/148

Integration of SCM and ERP

Integration of SCM and ERP 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function SCM_GEN_01

 Available as of SAP ECC Enhancement Package 2

ECC Software Component SAP_APPL

ECC Application Component CA

Business Intelligence Content N/A

SAP Enterprise Services N/A

JAVA Software Component N/A

Portal Content N/A

Sup plementary Comp onents in Further SAP Ap plications As of SAP SCM 20 07

Business Function That You Must Activate in Addition LOG_MM_CI_1

Use

With this business function, you can use the DataSource Purchasing Document Schedule Line (2LIS_11_VASCL) in enhanced form.

You can also use this business function when posting sales orders to copy additional data to SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM).

Prerequisites

To be ab le to use the business function, you must be us ing SAP SCM 2007.

Features

Enhancement of the DataSource

You need the enhanced DataSource if you want to create the demand history in Service Parts Planning (SPP) in SAP SCM using data from SAP ERP.

The DataSource has been enhanced with the following fields:

Description Field Name InfoObject InfoObject Type Data Element

Executing Plant  EXECLOC 0EXECPLANT Characteristic /BI0/OIEXECPLANT

Type of Executing Plant  ELOCTPYE 0EPLNTTYPE Characteristic /BI0/OIEPLNTTYPE

Customer-Facing Location FACELOC 0FACEPLANT Characteristic /BI0/OIFACEPLANT

Type of Customer-Facing 

Location

FLOCTYPE 0FPLNTTYP Characteristic /BI0/OIFPLNTTYPE

First Stockholding Location STOCKLOC 0STOCKLOC Characteristic /BI0/OISTOCKLOC

Type of First Stockholding 

Location

SLOCTYPE 0SLOCTYPE Characteristic /BI0/OISLOCTYPE

Item Category Usage VWPOS 0ITMTYPEUSE Characteristic /BI0/OIITMTYPEUSE

Number of Order Items is filled by a constant 0ORD_LINE Key Figure /BI0/OIORD_LINE

Exponent 10 for Quantity 

Conversion

is filled by a constant 0QTY_EXP Key Figure /BI0/OIQTY_EXP

Higher-Level Item UEPOS (*) 0UP_LVL_ITM Characteristic /BI0/OIUP_LVL_ITM

 Arrival Time EZEIT (*) 0REQ_TIME Key Figure /BI0/OIREQ_TIME

(*) To include these fields in the DataSource, you have to enhance the DataSource manually. For more information about how to enhance the DataSource manually

with these two fields, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management  under SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)  Service Parts

Planning (SPP)  Demand History Creation  Historical Data Capture  Historical Data Capture Using SAP ERP   Enhance DataSource 2LIS_11_VASCL

Manually   .

If you want to create the demand history in SPP using SAP ERP, you can also use the enhanced DataSource Purchasing Data (Schedule Line Level)

(2LIS_02_SCL). You can use this enhanced DataSource with the Materials Management  (LOG_MM_CI_1) business function.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 55 of 148

Page 56: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 56/148

Data Transfer with the Sales Order 

The additional data that you can send from SAP ERP to SAP SCM when you post the sales order is required when you want to work in the service fill monitor and

in the service loss analys is in SAP SCM using documents from SAP ERP.

SAP ERP sends the following additional data at item level to SAP SCM:

Relevant for goods movement

Facing location

Type of customer-facing location

First stockholding location

Type of first stockholding location

Reason for rejection of offers and orders

Rejection reason

In the SAP standard implementation, the rejection reason code is initial.

 Abnormal demand

In the SAP standard implementation, the abnormal demand is initial.

Restrictions in the search according to location

In the SAP standard implementation, the restriction in the search according to location is initial.

Higher-level item in bill of material structures

Quotient numerator for converting the unit of measure

In the SAP standard implementation, the quotient numerator for converting the unit of measure is one.

Denominator for converting the required quantity.

In the SAP standard implementation, the denominator for converting the required quantity is one.

Base unit of measure

Numerator (factor) for converting the sales unit to stockkeeping unit.Denominator (divisor) for converting the sales unit to stockkeeping unit.

SAP ERP sends the following additional data at schedule line level to SAP SCM:

Goods issue date/time

Higher-level schedule line

In the SAP standard implementation, the higher-level schedule line is one.

Integration of SCM and ERP 2 

Technical Data

Technical name of the business function   SCM_GEN_02

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 3

ECC software component SAP_APPL

ECC application component CA

Business Intelligence content Not relevant

SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant

JAVA software component Not relevant

Portal content N/A

Additional content available in other SAP applications  As of SAP SCM 2007

Business function requir ing activation in addition SCM_GEN_01

 As of SAP ECC 6.0 Enhancement Package 3, the business function Integration of SCM and ERP 2  (SCM_GEN_02) is available. You can use this business

function for enhancements in the following areas:

Shelf Life

Subcontracting

Interchangeability

Prerequisites

To be ab le to use the business function, you must be us ing SAP SCM 2007.

Features

Shelf Live

Consideration of Shelf Life Data

The following data is transferred between SAP ERP and SAP SCM:

Remaining shelf life data of purchase requisitions and purchase orders is transferred from SAP ERP to SAP SCM.

Remaining shelf life data of SNP stock transfers (with or without source location) is transferred from Supply Network Planning (SNP) to SAP ERP.

Minimum Remaining Shelf Life in Batch Determination from Stock Transport Order 

The required minimum remaining shelf life from the stock transport order is taken into account in batch determination in the goods issue posting.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 56 of 148

Page 57: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 57/148

When recording a goods issue against a stock transport order, you can carry out a batch determination process. In this process, the system searches for batches

with certain characteristic values, such as minimum shelf life or status, according to a search schema. You can predefine the search schema and the

characteristic values according to which you want to search for the batches. As of this release, the required minimum remaining shelf life and the planned delivery

time from the stock transport order are taken into account in the batch determination process.

Minimum Remaining Shelf Life in Purchase Requis ition and Purchase Or der 

You can display and change the minimum remaining shelf life in the requisition and purchase order. The minimum remaining shelf life is adopted in the PO item

when a purchase order is created from a requisition.

The minimum remaining shelf life in the purchase requisition can be populated from a source of supply (i.e. contract or info record), the material master, or with

data from SAP SCM. Previously, the minimum remaining shelf life in the purchase order was adopted from the following documents and master data in the

following order: reference document, RFQ, contract, info record, material master record.Now the system adopts the minimum remaining shelf life from the purchase requisition. If no minimum remaining shelf life has been defined in the requisition, it is

determined from the aforementioned documents and master data.

Effects on Customizing

Furthermore, you can specify in Customizing for Purchasing via the field selection for the purchase requisition (Define Screen Layout at Document Level) whether 

the field is to be shown or hidden and whether its contents can be changed in the Enjoy transactions. If the minimum remaining shelf life differs from that in the

assigned purchase requisition, you can have a message issued in the purchase order (Define Attributes of System Messages).

Subcontracting

Assignment of Multiple Production Versions in SAP ERP

The subcontracting process has been enhanced. You can now assign multiple production versions to a subcontracting purchase info record in SAP ERP. To do

the assignment, in SAP ERP, choose Logistics  -> Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface -> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer  ->

Environment  -> Data Transfer  -> Assign Multiple Production Versions.

You can also define whether purchase info records, to which multiple production versions are assigned, are transferred from SAP ERP to SAP APO.

For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP ERP under Integration with Other SAP Components -> Advanced Planning and Optimization

-> Basic Settings for Data Transfer  -> Change Transfer  -> Change Transfer for Master Data -> Configure Change Transfer for Master Data.

You can also mark individual production versions as invalid in cases where a purchase info record has multiple production versions assigned to it. As part of theinitial data transfer to SAP APO, SAP ERP transfers only those production versions that are valid. To mark production versions as invalid, you have two options:

You can manually define this by setting the Production Version Invalid indicator for the relevant production version. To do so, in SAP ERP, choose Logistics ->

Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface -> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer  -> Environment  -> Data Transfer  -> Assign

Multiple Production Versions.

You can use the report SET_PRODVER_VALIDITY  to have the system automatically check whether production versions are valid in the background.

You have two options when you use the check report:

- Set not valid entries

If you choose this option, the invalid production versions are simply marked by the system and are not transferred to SAP APO as part of the initial data

transfer. This is the default setting.

- Delete invalid entries

If you choose this option, the invalid production versions are automatically deleted by the system.

Multiple Sources of Supply for Subcontracting

Previously in a subcontracting scenario, Supply Network Planning (SNP) and Capable-to-Match (CTM) could only consider one source of supply for each

subcontracting location. The reason for this was that in SAP ERP, you could only assign one production version to a purchasing info record. You could then only

convert this production version to one production process model (PPM via a PP/DS PPM) or one production data structure (PDS) when transferring data to SAPSCM.

 As of SAP SCM 5.1, you can assign multiple production versions to a purchasing info record in SAP ERP. You make this assignment in the SAP ERP system

using a new transaction: Logistics  -> Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface -> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer  -> Environment  -

> Data Transfer  -> Assign Multiple Production Versions. After converting the production versions to PPMs or PDS, multiple sources of supply are available for 

each subcontracting location in the SCM system.

In interactive SNP planning, you can determine the sources of supply as follows:

For an SNP stock transfer of type Subcontracting, you can choose an alternative source of supply from a proposal list in the planning table.

You can change the source of supply for a planned order in the detail view. SNP and CTM planning runs choose the sources of supply according to the rules

for determining source of supply that are in place (for example, on the basis of procurement priority or cost).

Interchangeability

Integration of Interchangeability Master Data from SAP ERP

Interchangeability master data can now be transferred from SAP ERP to SAP SCM.

SCM, Customer and Vendor Master Data Integration into BP 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   LOG_SCM_CUSTVEND_INT

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component SCM Basis SCM-BAS

Required Business Function Foundation of External Transportation Management SystemSCM_SCMB_TM_FND1

Previously, you could transfer customer and vendor header level data, for example the address, from an ERP system to the business partner in SCM Basis by

using the core interface (CIF). You can use this business function to extend the outbound CIF interface to transfer specific attributes of customer and vendor data

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 57 of 148

Page 58: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 58/148

from an ERP system to the business partner in SCM Basis of a SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) system.

Integration

In SCM Basis, the business function Foundation of External Transportation Management System (SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1) is available to enable the use of 

customer and vendor data transferred from an ERP system. In SCM Basis, you can use the customer and vendor data as follows:

If you have manually created an organizational structure in SCM Basis, you can use the customer and vendor data to maintain a company organization that

corresponds to the company code in an ERP system and is used by, for example, Transportation Charge Management of an external TM system for invoicing

and charge calculation. You can also, for example, create a corporate organization that groups all company organizations.

Maintain specific attributes of the customer and vendor in the business partner master.Furthermore, the SCM basis location master has been extended to maintain international address versions.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   SAP_APPL 604

SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.02

Enhanced Initial Data Transfer  

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function CA_CIF_INILOAD_01

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications: EA-APPL, SAP_APPL

ECC Software Component SAP_APPL

ECC Application Component CA

Business Intelligence Content Not relevant

SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant

JAVA Software Component Not relevant

Portal Content Not relevant

Additional Content Available in Other SAP Applications  As of SAP SCM 7.0

Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition Not relevant

With this business function, you can improve the effectiveness of initial data transfer via Core Interface (CIF). You can use the following features:

Incremental Initial Data Transfer 

Parallelized Initial Data Transfer of PDS

Prerequisites

You have installed SAP Supply Chain Management 7.0 (SAP SCM 7.0) and in Customizing, you have activated the incremental data transfer. For more

information, see Customizing for SCM Basis under Integration  Basic Settings for Data Transfer    Activate Incremental Data Transfer   .

You have activated the parallelized initial data transfer on the  Activate or Deactivate Integration Model  screen. To do so, on the SAP Easy Access screen, you

have chosen Logistics   Central Functions  Supply Chain Planning Interface  Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer   Integration Model  

 Activate   or transaction CFM2.

Features

Incremental Initial Data Transfer 

You can activate the incremental data transfer for a logical system. You can use the incremental data transfer during the initial data transfer of master data objects

from an ERP system to an SCM system via Core Interface (CIF). The incremental data transfer is valid for the following master data objects:

Product master data

Location product master data

Production data structure (PDS) (in SAP APO only)

If you do not activate the incremental data transfer, the initial data transfer stops in the event of an error during the processing of a queue even if the error only

affects one of the objects in the queue. If the data transfer is scheduled in a background job, then the background job is canceled. You must correct the error and

start the transfer of all objects again.

If you activate the incremental data transfer, the system transfers all blocks of correct master data objects in a CIF queue so that you only have to retransfer 

blocks with errors. Due to the lower volume of objects to be processed again, the retransfer becomes more effective.

The incremental data transfer only considers errors in the SAP SCM system for the master data objects listed above. The system does not activate the integration

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 58 of 148

Page 59: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 59/148

model when errors occur in the SAP ERP system or if errors also occur in the SAP SCM system for data objects other than the master data objects listed above.

Parallelized Initial Data Transfer of PDS

The parallelized data transfer has been enhanced to include the object type PDS.

More Information

For more information about the incremental initial data transfer, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) on SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com  Overview of SAP Documentation  SAP Business Suite  SAP Supply Chain Management   SAP SCM 7.0    Application Help EN  

SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM)  SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)  Integration via Core Interface (CIF)  Technical 

Integration  Core Interface (CIF)  Data Transfer   Initial Data Transfer   .

For more information about the parallelized initial data transfer, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) on SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com  Overview of SAP Documentation  SAP Business Suite  SAP Supply Chain Management   SAP SCM 7.0    Application Help EN  

SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM)  SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)  Integration via Core Interface (CIF)  Technical 

Integration  Core Interface (CIF)  Data Transfer   Initial Data Transfer   Parallelized Initial Data Transfer   .

Vendor-Managed Inventory 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   APO_VMI_CONS

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage

ECC Software Component Logistics and Accounting (SAP_APPL)

ECC Application Component Cross-Application Components (CA), Sales (SD-SLS)

Business Intelligence Content Not relevant

SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant

JAVA Software Component Not relevant

Portal Content Not relevant

Additional Content Available in Other SAP Applications  As of SAP SCM 7.0, new functions exist in SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization to enable the implementation of the Vendor-Managed Inventory

process.

Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition Not relevant

You can use this business function to implement an integrated vendor-managed inventory scenario in SAP ERP and SAP APO for a standard or a consigned

process. Vendor-managed inventory enables the vendor to determine replenishment requirements for the customer and replenish the stock of its materials at the

customer's site. If VMI is combined with customer consignment, the vendor owns and manages this stock until the customer withdraws the material for 

consumption. This business function also supports the parallel use of a consigned and a non-consigned scenario with new functions.

Integration

This business function uses the switch MM_OM1_SFWS_SC from the business function ERP OPS O utsourced Manufacturing (LOG_MM_OM_1).

Prerequisites

You have activated the following switches:

CAVE_SFWS_VMI_CONS

CIF_SFWS_STK_INTRANS

CIF_SFWS_UI_VMI_CONS

CIF_SFWS_VMI_CONS

MM_OM1_SFWS_SC

You have implemented the following Customizing activities in Customizing for SAP ERP:

Define Customer/Plant Assignment and Configure ATP Check

BAdI: VMI Third Party Logistic Provider Scenario

Features

This business function includes the following new functions:

Shipment split

For a parallel use of a consigned and a non-consigned VMI process, you can execute a grouping of TLB shipments in SAP APO before publishing theshipments to SAP ERP. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com  SAP 

 Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)  Supply Network Planning Vendor-Managed Inventory Shipment Split in the VMI Scenario  .

 Automatic ATP check of TLB shipments

You can set up an automatic ATP check of TLB shipments in SAP ERP. The SAP ERP system executes the ATP check after you have published the TLB

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 59 of 148

Page 60: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 60/148

shipments from SAP APO, before it saves the relevant sales order. For more information, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com  SAP 

 Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)  Supply Network Planning Vendor-Managed Inventory Automatic ATP Check of TLB Shipments in SAP 

ERP   .

Improved master data integration

By activating this business function, you enable the system to automatically create ship-to location products in SAP APO via CIF based on customer master 

data in SAP ERP.

Consignment stock in transit

You can use the new key figure Consignment Stock in Transit to view intransit consignment stock data, and integrate it in the planning process. For more

information, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com  SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO)  Supply Network Planning

Vendor-Managed Inventory Consignment Stock in Transit in SAP APO  .Third party logistic provider scenario

If the special stock partner defined in the customer master data is a third party logistic provider, the system updates consignment stock at the corresponding

customer location in SAP APO via CIF.

ERP Maintenance & Service Planning (General Core Enablement) 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ERP_ECC_MSP_EA

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Discrete Ind. & Mill Products

Application Component  Aerospace & Defense Industry Solution (IS-AD)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

SCM Enhanced Maintenance & Service Planning for MRO

(SCM_APO_MSP_EPS) in SAP SCM 701

You can use this business function to optimize your use of the Maintenance and Service Planning (MSP) solution and to also benefit from general improvements

in usability. This set of enhancements enables you to optimize utilization of maintenance facilities and other resources. It not only fixes specific problems faced by

customers but also adapts MSP functions for use across diverse industries. The new developments increase the stability of the MSP solution and ensure

improved integration between SAP SCM and SAP ERP systems.

MSP can either be run independently within SAP SCM or integrated with Maintenance Event Builder (MEB) and Plant Maintenance in SAP ERP. The

enhancements have also imp roved MSP’s long-term p lanning capabil ities and allow more accurate modeling of potential business scenarios.

Furthermore, with this business function the MSP function is available for all industry areas.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_APPL 605

EA-APPL 605

ECC-DIMP 605

Technical Component SCM 701 Transfer of independent slots as revisions

Transfer of one-time demands as notifications

You have defined the revision type to be created for the transfer of independent slots. In the Customizing for SAP ERP, choose Plant Maintenance and 

Customer Service  Maintenance and Service Processing   Maintenance and Service Planning (MSP)  Maintain Revision Type  .

You have defined the notification type to be created for the transfer of one-time demands. In the Customizing for SAP ERP, choose Plant Maintenance and 

Customer Service  Maintenance and Service Processing   Maintenance and Service Planning (MSP)  Maintain Notification Type  .

If you activate the ERP Maintenance & Service Planning  (ERP_ECC_MSP_EA) business function and import support packages for the software components

SAP_APPL or EA-APPL, you must also import the support packages for ECC-DIMP.

Integration

Integration between MSP and SAP ERP

The SAP APO system now transfers independent slots within the planning horizon to SAP ERP as revisions. Independent slots within the planning horizon are

now flagged to indicate such a transfer. A configuration table in SAP ERP Customizing defines what revision type to create.

One-time demands within the planning horizon are transferred to SAP ERP as notifications. If that notification already exists in SAP ERP, you can link it to the

one-time demand in MSP.

Through the configuration table, MSP can now create revisions with different revision types. A Customizing setting is provided for this purpose. Previously, only

one revision type was available.

MSP CIF interface settings have been removed from the DIMP switch.

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 60 of 148

Page 61: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 61/148

For more information about MSP enhancements, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management  at http://help.sap.com.

Master Data Governance

Master Data Governance, Generic Functions 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   MDG_FOUNDATION

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Foundation 7.0

Technical Usage None

Application Component Master Data Governance (CA-MDG)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

None

This business function enables you to use basic functions, including the following:

Enterprise-wide centralized managing of master data using SAP Business Workflow

Safeguarding of data quality

Replicating of master data in target systems

Documenting of master data changes

This provides your enterprise with the following benefits, which reduce your total cost of ownership (TCO):

More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance

 Automated, secure, and documented replication of master data

This business function is a prerequisite for using the following business functions with their preconfigured data models:

Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG)

Master Data Governance for Material (MDG_MATERIAL)Master Data Governance for Supplier (ERP) (MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER)

This business function enables you to customize the preconfigured data models to meet your requirements and create your own data models without a template.

Integration

Once the business function is activated, you can make the following settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for 

Enterprise Applications  Master Data Governance  General Settings  .

In the target systems, you activate the business functions that are relevant to your applications. For example, if you use the business function

MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER in the central system, you can activate the bus iness functionCA_SUPPLIER_SOA in the target system.

Prerequisites

You have installed the software component SAP Business Suite Foundation (SAP_BS_FND), version 702 or later.

If you have activated the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), you need to make some changeovers (for 

example, from UI models to UI configurations) before you can activate the given business function. For more information about the changeovers, see the Release

Note MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Governance, Generic Functions.

Features

When you activate this business function, the following functions from the Master Data Governance (CA-MDG) component become available:

Generic Basic Functions

Enhance Existing Master Data Models or Create Your O wn

You can enhance the data models delivered by SAP (for example, by adding custom fields) and you can create your own data models and use them in the

change processes.

Change Request

You use change requests to change master data using workflow-based change processes. Q uality assurance reports on the change process are available.

You also can process change requests using SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe.

Data Replication Framework ( DRF)

The DRF is the technical platform for replicating the master data processed in a change request. You can use filters to make unrestricted and very granular 

data selections, for example, to replicate the data of certain company codes in very specific systems.

Key Mapping

Function for mapping values determined at runtime (for example, business partner IDs or material numbers) in the central system and target system.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 61 of 148

Page 62: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 62/148

Value Mapping

Function for mapping values determined at the time of design. While configuring the central system (in Customizing), you define, for example, country codes

and map these to their counterparts located in the target system. The application-spec ific enterprise services use value mapping.

Changing and Replicating of Master Data

Master Data Governance enables you to change master data in workflow processes. You can assign authorizations to these workflow processes. The workflow

processes are documented for reviewing purposes.

The system manages and documents all change steps in a change request.

You can access and edit the change requests from within a worklist in the portal.

You can replicate master data changes from the central system, in which you make and manage the changes, to the target systems. The DRF enables the

automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand. When doing so, you can use filters to determine which

objects are to be replicated in which systems. In addition to IDocs and enterprise services, you also can use upload and download functions to replicate the

master data changes to the target systems.

Business Foundation for Services for Supplier  

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function CA_SUPPLIER_SOA

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)

Technical Usage  Any Stack inc luding BS_FND

Application Component CA-MDG-BP

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this b usiness function to activate the BAdIs for customer specific mapping of the supp lier replication services.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_BS_FND

Features

With this business function BAdIs are offered to implement a customer specific mapping to override the standard mapping of the listed services

Master Data Governance for Supplier (ERP) 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component CA-MDG-BP-SUP

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Master Data Governance, Generic Functions MDG_FOUNDATION)

You can use this b usiness function to replicate the supp lier master data to different business systems within the central supp lier master data governance.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 62 of 148

Page 63: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 63/148

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_APPL

Portal Content Business Package for Finacial BPERPFINMDM

Business Package for Material BPERPMDGM

Business Package for Supplier BPERPMDGS

This business function must not be activated if there is an active Industry Extension (IE) on the same system. A validation of such a combination must take

place in advance. Please get in touch with the appropriate SAP contact.

If you activate this business function, MDG-S requires that you use ALE inbound processing for initial load. In this case, standard ALE inbound processing is

not available any longer.

Features

The mass data load enables you to extract data from a client system and to upload this data into the master data hub. The extraction of supplier, vendor and

business partner data from SRM and ERP systems throughout different releases is supported - in the case of previous releases by using the existing functions.

Within the governance process, change requests are used to control the creation and change of a supplier and the supplier data is stored temporarily. The

change requests are forwarded automatically to a master data specialist. As soon as the change request gets approved the new supplier master data is storedin the master data tables.

The governance process includes a duplicate check to avoid the creation of duplicates.

Constraints

The Master Data Governance for Supplier does neither support time dependency for central data and address usages nor time validity for addresses and bank

details. Therefore it cannot run on clients using the SAP Business Partner with time dependency and time validity for other purposes.

SRM One Client systems are not supported as client for Master Data Governance for Supplier.

 An installation of Master Data Governance for Supp lier on an SRM One Client system as a hub is not supported.

The Master Data Governance for Supplier only supports the re-use of selected existing field modification criteria. Additionally only the customizing of required

fields will be considered. It is not possible to suppress fields or switch fields to display only within the Master Data Governance for Supplier User Interface.

Master Data Governance for Material 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   MDG_MATERIAL

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component MDG Material  (CA-MDG-APP-MM)

Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)

You can use this business function to establish a governance process for your material master data. This business function provides a clearly structured

approach to master data maintenance; warning of the creation of duplicate data and therefore improving overall master data quality. A comprehensive workflow

concept enables you to streamline the maintenance process while providing a solid approval path and a document trail.

This business function also provides a duplicate check that highlights potential duplicate master data entries.

Integration

Master Data Governance for Material should be used together with the SAP ERP material master to improve data quality and transparency.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component

Software Component   SAP-APPL 605

Software Component   SAP_BASIS 702, SP 06

 Caution

 Caution

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 63 of 148

Page 64: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 64/148

If you do not have SAP_BASIS 702, SP 06 installed, follow the instructions in SAP Note 1502296.

This business function must not be activated if there is an active Industry Extension (IE) on the same system. A validation of such a combination must take

place in advance. Please get in touch with the appropriate SAP contact.

FeaturesThe Master Data Governance for Material business function offers the following features:

Predefined Workflows

SAP ships workflows for a number of change request types and enables you to create your own customized workflows.

Built-In Approval Pr ocess

You can use custom workflows to create an approval process to provide quality checks, helping to prevent changes from endangering your data accuracy.

Duplicate Check

The system can perform a duplicate check to determine likely duplicate master data entries.

Centralized Maintenance

 All material master data updates can be performed through a single work center streamlining day-to-day operations.

Transparency

 A document trail in the form of a log file enables you to track changes to material master data.

Key and Value Mapping for IDoc MATMAS and CLFMAS

In cases where your client system has different keys or values for master data fields or objects than those in the Master Data Governance system you can map

those keys and values to the ones stored in the master data governance hub.

Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_MDM_ORG

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management

Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)

Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)

You can use this business function to configure a governance process for your master data in Financials. The governance of the master data is centralized and is

managed by an app roval p rocess. The changes can be replicated in the decentralized systems and is documented at all times.

This business function offers the following advantages for your enterprise:More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data

Faster individual and consolidated financial statements

 All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).

Integration

This business function has the same features as the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), but has some

additional features and entity types. The business function FIN_MDM_ACC is obsolete as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0. Therefore, if you

want to use Financials content, activate the present business function.

If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data into the application components General Ledger  (FI-GL) and Controlling  (CO), you need to

activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA Organizational Units  (FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG).

If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data of charts of accounts and item hierarchies into the application component Business Consolidation

(FIN-SEM-BCS), you need to activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS (FIN_MDM_SOA_CU).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 64 of 148

Page 65: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 65/148

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component FINBASIS 605 and SEM-BW 605

Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.51

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 Master data reports

XI/ESR Content   FINBASIS 605, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and

http://sap.com/xi/FIN/MDG/Global2

Replication of Master Data Using Enterprise

Services

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Master Data

Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials   .

If you want to use point-to-point communication for the enterprise services (see below), in addition to this business function you also need to activate the business

function Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions (FND_SOA_REUSE_1).

Features

This business function provides you with data model 0G , which models the following business objects in the system as entity types:

 Account

Company

Profit Center 

Cost Center 

Consolidation Unit

Cost Element

This enables you to use the following functions for these business objects:

Approval Process for Master Data Changes

You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. You can choose

one of several workflow processes, which have different levels of approval details. For more information, see Workflow Templates for Financials.

The most detailed process begins with a request for change, which can be evaluated and commented by various persons. Once the request has been evaluated,

considered and approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests

document and manage all steps in the approval p rocess.

Master Data Change

You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see Master Data Processing.

Versioning of Master Data

The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document

when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the

changes.

Replication of Master Data

You can replicate the master data changes from the Master Data Governance hub to your decentralized systems. The data replication framework enables the

automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand.

Enterprise services for replicating the data are available in the following application components:

General Ledger (FI-GL)

Controlling (CO)

Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)

If you want to use enterprise services to replicate master data, you can point-to-point communication.

Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA OrganizationalUnits 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component General Ledger (FI-GL) and Controlling (CO)

Required Business Function Not relevant

This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of accounts and cost elements, including hierarchies thereof, from the

Master Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides your enterprise with the following benefits:

More efficient master data management

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 65 of 148

Page 66: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 66/148

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data

Faster individual and consolidated financial statements

 All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).

Integration

For processing master data and using enterprise services for exporting data from the Master Data Governance hub, you can use the business function Master 

Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605

XI/ESR Content   SAP_APPL 6.05, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2

To be able to import the master data, you need to have made the required Customizing settings for the receiving application component.

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Master Data

Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials   Enterprise Services  Inbound Services for Financials Master Data  .

Features

The following enterprise services are available for importing master data:

Replicate Chart of Accounts

Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication

Replicate General Ledger Account Master as Bulk

Confirm General Ledger Account Master Replication as Bulk

Replicate Financial Reporting Structure

Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication

Replicate Company as Bulk

Confirm Company Replication as Bulk

Replicate Profit Centre as Bulk

Confirm Profit Centre Replication as Bulk

Replicate Profit Centre Group Hierarchy

Confirm Profit Centre Group Hierarchy Replication

Replicate Cost Centre as Bulk

Confirm Cost Centre Replication as Bulk

Replicate Cost Centre Group Hierarchy

Confirm Cost Centre Group Hierarchy Replication

Replicate Cost Element as Bulk

Confirm Cost Element Replication as Bulk

Replicate Cost Element Group Hierarchy

Confirm Cost Element Group Hierarchy Replication

Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_MDM_SOA_CU

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management

Application Component Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)

Required Business Function Not relevant

This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of consolidation charts of accounts and item hierarchies from the Master 

Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides the following benefits for your enterprise:

More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data

Faster individual and consolidated financial statements

 All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).

Integration

You can use the bus iness function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG) for processing the master data and for 

exporting the data from the Master Data Governance hub using enterprise services.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 66 of 148

Page 67: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 67/148

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version listed:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   SEM_BW 605

XI/ESR Content   FINBASIS 604 and SEM-BW 605, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Master Data

Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials   Enterprise Services  Inbound Services for Business Consolidation  .

Features

The following enterprise services are available for importing master data:

Replicate Chart of Accounts

Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication

Replicate Financial Reporting Structure

Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication

CATS classic: cProjects Details 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   CA_CATS_CPR_CORE

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Cross-Application Time Sheet (CA-TS)

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Not relevant

 

You can use this business function to implement the time sheet as a single point of entry for entering project time confirmations. It enables your employees to

simultaneously save confirmation details for collaboration projects (cProjects), such as remaining work time or percentage complete, when recording working times

with the CATS class ic application.

Integration

If you implement the CATS regular Web Dynpro JAVA application, you must also activate the CATS regular: cProject Details bus iness function.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component   SAP_APPL 603

You have activated this business function.

You are using cProjects 4.5 and record time confirmations for your projects with the Cross-Application Time Sheet.

Features

When you implement this business function, you employees only need to call up one application to enter project time confirmations. This expediates and

simplifies the confirmation process. For more information, see Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet.

Confirmations details are saved on the project level, not on the level of an individual time confirmation. This enables your employees to enter data such as the

final time confirmation for an entire project or subproject.

Recorded data is tranferred directly and synchronously to cProjects. It is not saved in the Cross-Application Time Sheet, thus avoiding double data storage and

constantly ensuring data consistency.

More Information

For more information, see SAP Library: SAP cProjects Suite  Project and Portfolio Managment   Collaboration P rojects  Editing Project Structures 

Confirmation  Time Recording Using the Cross-Appli cation Time Sheet

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 67 of 148

Page 68: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 68/148

CATS Classic for Concurrent Employment 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   CA_CATS_CE

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS)

Concurrent Employment (PA-CE)

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Not relevant

You can use this business function to greatly simplify the recording of concurrent employees' working times for users of the CATS classic application interface.

Your users can use these functions to record working times for all of an employee's personnel assignments in one work step. This enables you to more easily

distribute the working times that need to be recorded and analyze error situations more quickly.

These functions are available for recording working times by employees themselves as well as for recording scenarios by centralized or decentralized time

administrators (multi-person recording).

This business function is only relevant if you implement Personnel Management solution SAP ERP 6.0 or higher as well as the Concurrent Employment

functions.

Integration

If you also would like to use the Concurrent Employment functions for users of the Employee Self-Service application CATS Regular/Recording of Working Times,

you must also activate the business function HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component   SAP_APPL 604

You use the Personnel Management solution SAP ERP 6.0. You have activated the Concurrent Employment functions in your system there, as well. For more

information, see Concurrent Employment.

Features

Recording of Working Times by Employees Themselves

If concurrent employees are recording their working times themselves, they are shown a list on the initial screen where they can select their personnel

assignments. In the recording view, employees can record times for their personnel assignments individually or all at the same time. Additional fields allow

employees to identify the personnel assignment.

In the release v iew and variable v iew, the data is also available for all personnel assignments at a glance.

Recording of Working Times for Multiple People

If you record working times for multiple people centrally, you are shown a list on the initial screen where you can select all of a person's personnel assignments.

This function is available independent of the process you use for person selections.

In recording view, all of an employee's personnel assignments can be processed at the same time. Additional fields in recording view enable you to uniquelyidentify an employee's particular personnel assignment here, as well.

More Information

For more information, see Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) for Concurrent Employment.

CATS regular: cProjects Details 

Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 68 of 148

Page 69: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 69/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   CA_CATS_CPR

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage HCM Self-Services

Application Component Cross-Application Time Sheet (CA-TS)

Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Enterprise Extension Human Capital Management (EA-HR)

Business Function CATS classic: cProjects Details (CA_CATS_CPR_CORE)

You can use this business function to implement the time sheet as a single point-of-entry for entering project time confirmations. It enables your employees to

simultaneously save confirmation details for Collaboration Projects (cProjects), such as remaining work or percentage complete, when recording working times

with the CATS regular JAVA Web Dynpro app lication.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component   EA-HR 603

JAVA Software Component   SAP ESS 603

Portal Content Business Package for Employee Self-Service

1.31

You have activated this business function.

You are using cProjects 4.5 and record time confirmations for your projects with the Cross-Application Time Sheet.

You are using the CATS regular JAVA Web Dynpro application for the Cross Application Time Sheet and have done the necessary Customizing for the

application. For more information, see CATS regular / Record Working Time (Web-Dynpro).

You have activated the required functions in the back-end system by activating the CATS classic: cProjects Details (CA_CATS_CPR_CORE) business function.

You have activated the Human Capital Management (EA-HR) Enterprise Extension.

Features

When you implement this business function, your employees only need to call up the CATS regular application to enter project time confirmations. This speeds

up and simplifies the confirmation process.

For more information, see Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet.

Confirmation data is saved on the project level, not on the level of an individual time confirmation. This enables your employees to enter data such as the final

time confirmation for an entire project or subproject.

Recorded data is tranferred synchronously to cProjects. It is not saved in the Cross-Application Time Sheet, thus avoiding double data storage and constantly

ensuring data consistency.

More Information

For more information, see SAP Library: SAP cProjects Suite  Project and Portfolio Managment   Collaboration P rojects  Editing Project Structures 

Confirmation  Time Recording Using the Cross-Appli cation Time Sheet

SAP for Defense & Security

DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense

Application Component Defense Forces & Public Security(IS-DFS)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security  (EA-DFP)

This business function provides new functions in all areas of the Defense Forces & Public Security component. The new functions support armed forces, police,

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 69 of 148

Page 70: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 70/148

and aid agencies in domestic-base processes and to perform operations and exercises with a multilevel sys tem landscape.

Unlike other business functions, these functions are immediately active once you have installed  the software component version EA-DFPS 603 and they

enhance the functions of the EA-DFPS software component without additional activation steps. Therefore, a test catalog is not available for this business

function.

Due to the extent of the enhancements and data conversions required, the installation process may take longer.

With software component version EA-DFPS 603, you can no longer integrate the mobile applications of SAP Mobile Defense Solution 1.0. Instead, use SAP

Mobile Defense & Security 1.5.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component   EA-APPL 603

EA-DFPS 603

SAP_APPL 603

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3 Support

Package 08

You are familiar with the Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP).

In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the new activities.

Features

Organizational Flexibility

Org anizational Structures:

If the periods of your operations or exercises change, you can shift the periods of operational structures and exercise targets mapped in the system

accordingly.

In the operations and exercises calendar , you can also evaluate the force providers and command responsibility for force elements and operations or exercises.

You can also perform additional evaluations through assignments to projects and maintenance orders. Furthermore, the Gantt charts in the Structures

Workbench application allow you to display organizational data in calendar form.

When copying structures, you can copy multiple structures that run in parallel into multiple other structures at once. The system thus facilitates the mapping of 

consistent organizational structures.

Infrastructure and Material Categories:

You can plan the equipment for a force element with buildings and land ( authorized infrastructure) and compare this plan with the actual equipment (actualinfrastructure) in an authorized/actual comparison.

You can copy material or infrastructure assignments of a force element or position to another object of the same type.

You can let the system create provisions or equipment packages automatically based on known consumption values.

To describe the properties of an equipment package in more detail, you can assign an external material group to the underlying material master record directly

in the application for process ing equipment packages.

You can specify a number for assignments of provisions packages to force elements.

You can display an overview of the assignments to material objects for selected force elements.

Personnel Categories:

 As part of the process for assigning personnel to positions in operational structures and exercise targets, you can propose suitable persons and then convert

these proposals into active assignments.

When creating positions, you can assign jobs directly. You can also create positions using a copy function.

You can enter the flight training activities completed by personnel and transfer this data to the HR master data. You can then derive qualifications for these

persons from the training data.

Additional Assignments and Properties:

You can weight relationships and assignments and calculate the readiness of force elements based on these weightings.To determine the exact purpose of task organizations, you can distinguish their relationships based on the type of task organization.

When assigning technical objects to force elements, you can distinguish between the assignment to the owner (organizational assignment), utilizer (stock), and

holder (change authorization).

You can assign qualifications to force elements, positions, and jobs to map requirements.

You can shift the validity period of task organizations and material assignments to remove any data inconsistencies.

When you define and display the validity periods (to the minute) of relationships to task organizations, support relationships, and technical objects, the system

takes into account the respective time zone selected.

The system can pass on address ass ignments of an assigned business entity or higher-level force element to assigned force elements.

In addition to the master WBS element assignment, you can also assign additional WBS elements to force elements to map their involvement in projects.

 A workflow is p rovided that notifies the agent responsible when the assignment of a force provider  changes. The recipient can then make any changes required.

You can connect force elements and equipment packages to the classification system to describe their properties in more detail.

For selected force elements, you can display an overview of the services provided by other force elements. You can also replace service providers

automatically.

The system stores task organizations, support relationships, and assignments to technical objects, material objects, and Real Estate Management objects in a

uniform table framework.

Exporting and Importing Data:

You can export force element data to PDF forms. When doing so, you can also create interactive PDF forms whose data you can edit externally. You can then

import these changes b ack into the sys tem.

You can import external organizational data (for example, in XML format) into the system and convert it into corresponding data for force elements, positions, and

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 70 of 148

Page 71: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 71/148

assignments.

Performing Approval Processes:

To delimit or delete activated object properties and assignments, you can perform an approval process.

 A function is availab le that allows you to determine and display all measures (approval processes for organizational changes) in which a selected user was or 

is involved.

Using D ecentralized Systems:

You can switch the system for force elements using workflows and checks that are triggered automatically in the issuing and receiving ERP systems.

In decentralized systems, you can create task organizations to map location-based organizational structures. The system distributes information about

decentralized task organizations to all relevant systems in your system landscape.

Accounting

In Customizing, you can specify how the names of cost centers and profit centers are assigned automatically.

When a profit center is created, the system blocks it against postings and then removes this block in the approval process.

The system displays the assignments of accounting objects to the force element on separate tab pages.

Materials Management

In decentralized Warehouse Management Systems, you can operate offline warehouse management.

For relocations and transportations, you can use a relocation monitor  to monitor the stocks, logistical follow-up actions, and so on for selected force elements.

You can post mass losses caused during transportations or in warehouses.

You can get a quick overview of procurement processes by disp laying the document flow in a hierarchical tree structure (from purchase requisition to purchase

order, right through to the delivery).

In the Planning Workbench, the system can display serial numbers to distinguish between items of material.

In Customizing, you can specify whether you want to include restricted batches in the ATP check.

Enhancements for distributed materials management are available for multisystem landscapes and cross-system material planning. For more information, seeCross-System Materials Management.

 An alternative method to determine a supplier is available for the initial supply of force elements.

You can define NATO stock numbers and classify these numbers into groups and classes.

Maintenance

You can relocate technical objects for a force element to another force element within a system and externally through change of ownership, utilizer, or holder.

In the central system, you can edit settlement rules for maintenance orders from decentralized systems.

You can create maintenance books as PDF files for equipment and master equipment so that you can view maintenance data outside the system.

Support for Flight Operations

Logbook enhancements are available in the Aerospace & Defense Industry Solution (IS-AD-LBK) component, which you can use to edit flight and aircraft data

or perform technical debriefings, for example.

Using a central event monitor , you can display corresponding flight and maintenance events for selected master equipment and check availability.

You can enter an aircraft accident as a PDF file with all the relevant data for the aircraft involved.

You can group sites into areas.

You can enter training activities completed by persons for flights.

You can adjust the functions in the Status Board and Controlled Usage Rate applications to meet your requirements.

System Architecture

User Administration:

The system can assign authorizations to users that work with systems in your system landscape automatically after every organizational change.

You can compare changes to user master data that you made when working offline in decentralized systems after you have restored communication to the

Central User Administration and remove any data inconsistencies as necessary.

System Administration:

You can exchange data between the systems in your sys tem landscape and SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI).

You can define the organizational unit responsible for synchronization problems and assign clients to CCMS mechanisms directly in the production system.

In Customizing, you can define which reports are started in the system after synchronization has been completed successfully.

You can adapt the transport functions for Software Change Management  to meet your own requirements.

 Additional functions are available for optimizing number range monitoring.

Distribution:

You can use product data replication (PDR) to distribute object types such as: reference functional locations, reference measuring points, partners, approvals,

master warranties, production resources and tools, confirmations, relocations, relocation steps, and loading objects.

The following enhancements are also available:

The mechanism for distributing technical objects has been enhanced based on the new concept for assigning these objects.

You can enhance the distribution scope manually to include functional locations that belong to a force element.

You can include customer enhancements of specific tables in the distribution process.

You can distribute change documents and conversion rules using separate applications.

You can filter the IDocs to be distributed at plant level.

Archiving and Data Extraction:

You can archive the following objects/data:

Change documents (distributed system landscape)

Force elements and command and control relationships

Material objects (material planning objects, material containers, equipment packages, and provisions packages)

 Assignments to material and infrastructure objects, task organizations, support relationships, and assignments to technical objects Assignments between change documents and organizational measures

Material planning records, external batches, relocations

Data for mass losses and loading objects

Data segments for extracting error logs (relevant only if you use SAP Mobile Defense & Security) and purchase requisitions are available.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 71 of 148

Page 72: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 72/148

Operation of Mobile Applications

New Customizing activities are available for connecting the mobile applications in SAP Mobile Defense & Security with the functions in the Defense Forces &

Public Security component.

DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_OF_OS

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense

Application Component Defense Forces and Public Security (IS-DFS)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise business function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 

(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)

This business function provides you with new functions for the Defense Forces & Public Security  (DFPS) component. The new functions support armed forces,

police, and aid agencies in domestic-base processes and in performing operations and exercises with a multilevel sys tem landscape.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component   EA-APPL 604

EA-DFPS 604

SAP_APPL 604

Portal content Business Package for Defense Forces & Public

Security 1.4

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3 Support

Package 09

Business function   OPS_EC_INTEGRATION Integration of SAP Environmental Compliance into

the work area of the Environment, Health and 

Safety (EH&S) component

Business function   LOG_EAM_SIMP Function for making mass changes to equipment

(via transaction IE05)

You are familiar with the Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP) enterprise extension and the DFPS, Logistical O perational Support

(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG) business function.

In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the new activities.

Features

Organizational Flexibility

You can use a mass change to edit the following logistical ass ignment information for multiple force elements at once:

Plant, MRP area, and storage location

Purchasing organization, purchasing group, reference element, organizational priority, and logistical level

You can use this function as an alternative to the existing functions for editing individual force elements if you need to edit larger volumes of data.

To process data inconsistencies centrally for Material and Infrastructure Assig nments, you have reports available that you can use to make the following

changes to one or more force elements at once:

Delete material assignments

Delete infrastructure assignments

Change the status of material assignments

Change the status of infrastructure assignments

Materials Management

You can use a new transaction to distribute or group storage locations. See Report: Distribute and Group Storage Locations.

The following new functions are available for the workbench for logistical deployment planning and execution:

You can represent the display in the stock/requirements list in all units of measure given in the material master record.You can use the Select Storage Loc. pushbutton to change the storage location of the requesting force element.

You can directly transfer post an infrastructure material managed in serial numbers in the serial number view to a different storage location.

For an existing purchase requisition for a material managed in serial numbers, you can copy serial numbers that you selected via the stock situation to the

purchase requisition.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 72 of 148

Page 73: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 73/148

See Requisitioning and Planning of Material.

For equipment for which the stock is in transit, the receiving storage location from the related stock transport order is displayed.

In a purchase order, you can copy the advice code from the main item to the subitems of the purchase order. If you change the advice code in the main item,

the system automatically updates the subitems with the new advice code. See Advice Code.

The following new functions are available in the authorized/actual comparison:

You can define customer selection parameters.

In Customizing, you can use a Business Add-In to define customer links and inc lude these links in the app lication.

You can display the serial numbers of installed equipment in the detail view.

You can consider unassigned storage locations of a stock MRP area in the authorized/actual comparison.

See Authorized/Actual Comparison.Initial supply is also possible for distributed materials management. Since the distributed materials management in a distributed system landscape can only

handle purchase orders that were converted from purchase requisitions, purchase requisitions instead of purchase orders are now created during initial supply.

See Initial Supply.

 A new Business Add-In is available that, when deleting storage locations, you can use to delete table entries that the standard deletion program cannot include.

See Deleting Stock Storage Locations.

The following new functions are available for cross-plant reorganizations:

 A new transaction is available for cross-plant reorganizations.

If you perform storage location mapping during a cross-plant reorganization, the system issues a warning message if storage locations with the same name

that are not yet assigned to a force element already exist in the new plant.

 A detailed app lication log is available for each cross-plant reorganization. Each notification that is written to the application log is ass igned to the object that

was being processed when the notification was issued. It is also possible to jump from the application log to the display transaction of the relevant object.

During a cross-plant reorganization, the system edits purchasing documents with a release strategy. Performed releases for purchase requisitions and

purchase orders are thus reset.

You can perform a cross-plant reorganization for a force element that is active in a decentralized system.

 A cross-plant reorganization is now also possib le without a structure change, whereas cross-plant reorganizations previously always required theorganizational or operational structure to be changed.

 A new Business Add-In is available, which you can use to include additional materials in the list of materials to be copied.

See Support for Cross-Plant Reorganization.

You can use the integration of SAP Environmental Compliance into the work area of the Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S) component to display the data

from SAP Environmental Compliance directly on a separate tab page in the EH&S work area. See Integration of SAP Env. Compl. with EH&S Work Area.

This function is only available if the OPS_EC_INTEGRATION business function is activated in addition to this business function.

Maintenance

For the mass creation of maintenance notifications, you can use a new transaction. See Mass Creation of Maintenance Notifications.

In the application for making mass changes to equipment (via transaction IE05), the two fields Position in Superior Technical Object  and Construction Type

Material of the Object  are available on the new Structure Data tab page. See Mass Changes for Equipment.

The function for making mass changes to equipment (via transaction IE05) is only available if the LOG_EAM_SIMP bus iness function is activated.

You can use the BAdI: Delete Personnel Number from Operations in the Distribution Business Add-In to delete personnel numbers in maintenance order 

operations in the decentralized system. See Distribution of Maintenance Objects.

If you use a distributed system landscape, you can forward the change authorization for multiple objects at once. See Change Authorization.

New functions for creating, changing, and reversing measurement documents in distributed systems are available. See Measurement Documents in

Distributed Systems.

You can use the training program functions to map training programs for maintenance orders (for example, also for flights). See Training Data and Qualifications.

Support for Flight Operations

You can use the staff assignment board to plan operations for your staff.

You can use the Mass Change Usage Rate function to change the usage rate for multiple aircraft at once.

For the Status Board  and Controlled Usage Rate applications, you can make technical settings to accelerate the data selection for master equipment with

hierarchical s tructures. See Status Board.

System Architecture

When distributing  data to the decentralized systems of your system landscape with product data replication (PDR), you can include the following data to

make it available for functions and processes in these systems:

Hazardous substance data for material

Partner data for customers or vendors

NATO stock number for material

 Additional properties of force elements that you assign using SAP Military Data Exchange functions

Logbook

 Assignments of material planning objects and material containers to Human Resources Management objects

You can archive DFPS-specific additional data from the Support for Flight Operations area for maintenance notifications, maintenance orders, and equipment.

If you have activated the Distributed Maintenance scenario, note the following:

You can archive data in both the central and decentralized systems. If you are using a distributed  system landscape, you must work out an archiving

concept in sync with your system landscape that fulfills the following requirements: To exclude data inconsistencies you must specify exactly in which

systems and at what times data can be archived. You can only archive data when it is no longer needed for other processes.

You can use the Data Retention Tool (DART) to extract component-specific additional data, as well as information about the previous and subsequentpurchase requisition of purchase requisitions.

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 73 of 148

Page 74: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 74/148

DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 3 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_OF_LOG

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense Forces & Public Security

Application Component Defense Forces and Pub lic Security (IS-DFS)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise b usiness function DFPS, Logistical O perational Supp ort 2

(DFPS_OF_OS)

This business function enables you to use new functions in the Defense Forces & Public Security (DFPS) component. The new functions support armed forces,

police, and aid agencies in domestic-base processes as well as in performing operations and exercises with a multilevel system landscape.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component SAP_APPL 605

EA-APPL 605

EA-DFPS 605

Portal content Business Package for Defense Forces & Public 

Security  1.51

 App lication for the mass change of assignments to

relocation steps

Features

Organizational Flexibility

Displaying and Editing Ass ignments

You can use an application for mass changes to edit assignments of material planning objects, equipment packages, provisions packages, positions, and

packing instructions to relocation steps for more than one force element at once.

The application for making mass changes to support relationships provides additional selection and editing functions.

You can edit the address ass ignments of more than one force element at once.

You can display the logistics work centers assigned to an organizational structure and edit assignments of work centers to force elements or positions.

Furthermore, after copying a force element or a structure, the system can use a workflow to trigger the generation of new assignments of work centers to the

copy. The processor of the work item has an application available for generating these assignments, which provides the assignments that exist for the copy

template as default values.

In the Structures Workbench, the system displays the existing role assignments for force elements, positions, jobs, persons, and users. You can also

create or edit role assignments directly in this application.

Authorized Materials

You can assign an equipment package to an assignment to the material planning object. In material planning, for the materials that are assigned to the

equipment package, the system can then determine those material p lanning objects that comprise these materials as a model. The system considers these

material planning objects as additional authorized materials.

For assignments between force elements and material planning objects, you can specify whether these assignments are to be considered for the mass

execution of material planning. This also applies for indirect assignments via material containers.

Evaluations

You can display an overview of an organizational s tructure  including the authorized personnel (assigned positions) and actual personnel (assigned persons).

You can display an overview of an organizational structure including the levels of readiness for each force element.

You can determine which force elements are not included in operations or exercises (by direct assignment or as a force provider) in a particular period and

are thus available for other use.

You can perform an authorized/actual comparison for equipment in terms of materials from an organizational structures perspective.

For an organizational structure, you can perform an authorized/actual comparison for the staffing of an organizational structure. This authorized/actual

comparison displays a comparative overview of the authorized personnel (assigned positions) and the actual personnel (staffing status of positions) for each

force element.

The enhancements to Human Resources search functions described in SAP Note 1314572 are available and you can adapt them for the special features of 

the Defense Forces & Public Security component:

For the structure search, you also have evaluation paths defined via Customizing available for selection. For example, you can thus use the component-

specific structures (such as operational structures or exercise targets) to search for objects.

The object manager (function in Human Resources applications) contains these enhancements to the structure search. Furthermore, the object manager 

provides the evaluation paths defined in Customizing for a keyword search. In both cases, the search can determine objects with a status that is not  Active.

In the header area of the Change Profile app lication (transaction PPPM), the system disp lays the status of the currently selected object. On the tab pages

Requisitions and Requirement Blocks, the system displays the status of the relationship. When creating a relationship, this field is ready for input.

In the Find Objects for Requirements application (transaction PPQ2), you can use the enhanced structure search to limit the person subgroup that you want

to synchronize. Alternatively, you can specify a period in addition to a key date.

In transactions of the components Defense Forces & Public Security  and Human Resources, you can include additional search helps for each HR object type.

Customizing

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 74 of 148

Page 75: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 75/148

You can include additional functions (transactions, reports, views, view clusters) in the Structures Workbench menu.

 Automatic shipp ing point determination is availab le for processing stock elements and provisions elements in the Structures Workbench.

You can define system follow-up actions that are to be performed after a force element or structure has been copied.

You can specify which subtype of infotype 1952 (Address) is used in Enterprise Services for the Location Assignment  value.

Materials Management

Requisitioning and Planning of Material

For the replenishment procedure with equipment packages, you can implement the functions of the later handling unit assignment and thus structure the

replenishment procedure more flexibly. Previously, the latest point at which you could assign a particular handling unit (HU) to a stock transport requisition

was when you converted this stock transport requisition to a stock transport order. Now, you can make this assignment at a later point (up until goods issue of 

the delivery) during the replenishment procedure.

You can use the new Assign HU  pushbutton in the Structures Workbench or in the Planning Workbench to assign a handling unit to a PReq or purchase

order. The delivery of an HU purchase order is now no longer generated in the same step; instead, you can use the new pushbutton to assign an HU to an

HU purchase order at a later point. Alternatively, it is possible to wait until the delivery to assign an HU or to pack a completely new HU. See Requisitioning

and Planning of Material.

 A new transaction is available for generating a pick lis t for the creation of handling units based on equipment packages (/ISDFPS/EPA_PRINT). A pick list

based on a delivery contains new additional information in a separate line if a material originally comes from the requirement of an EPA. The EPA-relevant

information includes the number of the EPA and whether the material is the leading record, a mandatory part, or an optional part of the EPA. See Pick List for 

Equipment Packages.

The authorized/actual comparison contains a new material-container-oriented view for improved planning. In this view, it is possible to display all material

containers for a material planning object (MPO) that contain the MPO and are assigned to a force element. The material containers are displayed with all

contained MPOs and with the equipment packages that are derived from the material container. See Authorized/Actual Comparison.

You can create an assignment between a "force element-material planning object" relationship and an equipment package (EPA). To consider this

assignment in the authorized/actual comparison, new MPO lines are dynamically generated in the material list. Two new columns provide you with

information about the EPA assignment. One column displays the EPA number; the other column displays the material through which the assignment

between EPA and MPO was established. You can use a pushbutton to choose between different views for the EPA assignment. The initial screen for the

authorized/actual comparison contains three new selection options that you can use to specify how the equipment packages are to be evaluated. See

 Authorized/Actual Comparison.

 A new transaction (/ISDFPS/MAT_COMP_PR) is available for the procurement of authorized materials. You can use this transaction to create and convert

procurement proposals. You can use this transaction in material planning to create purchase requisitions for multiple force elements and MPOs at once. You

can use the Adjust Mass Purchase Requisition for Authorized/Actual Comparison Business Add-In to adjust the generated mass purchase requisitions.

You can also access the mass generation of purchase requisitions via the material list from the detail view for the MPO and in relocation planning. See

Creation of Procurement Proposals.

You can use the Customizing activity Adjust Requested Quantity for New PReqs in Material Planning Process to adjust the requested quantity for new

purchase requisitions. You can use the Business Add-In Adjust Quantities in Material Planning  to adjust quantities in material planning. See Requisitioning

and Planning of Material.

 A new transaction (/ISDFPS/REORG1) is available to display and change reorganizations. You can specify warehouse assignments between issuing and

receiving force elements. In the existing transaction (/ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC) for grouping and distributing storage locations, you can use the specified

warehouse assignments from the reorganization as default values. If you use transaction /ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC with a reorganization, you can save the

issue list without posting the goods movements and can continue processing later. In this transaction, you can also distribute quantities from one storage

location to multiple storage locations, change the receiving storage location, and select the transfer posting movement type for each stock type. You can use

the BAdI Adjust Reorganizations to adapt transaction /ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC when it is used for reorganizations. See Report: Display /Change

Reorganizations .

You can use the Business Add-In Determine Deviation Reason for Proof of Delivery  in Customizing for Shipping to determine the default deviation reason for 

proofs of delivery and override this as required. See POD: Adjustment of the Reason for the Deviation.

Master Data

You can use a new transaction to hide entries that are no longer required or that are invalid in the input help for purchasing groups, material groups, and

purchasing organizations, if the assigned force elements are no longer valid with regard to time. See Hiding of Invalid Entries from Input Help .

In the transaction for displaying the change documents for material master records (transaction MM04), a new indicator is available on the initial screen. You

can use this indicator to display all change documents at field level on one screen using the SAP List Viewer. This means that you do not have to navigate

from each individual change document header to the respective change documents at field level. See Disp lay and Change Master Data.

In the transaction for making mass changes to material master data (transaction MM17), table MARA (general material data) contains four DFPS-specific

fields: MCOND (material condition management), RETDELC (return code), LOGLEV_RETO (return up to logistical level), and NSNID (NATO stock number).

See Disp lay and Change Master Data.

Maintenance

For distributed maintenance, in Customizing for maintenance orders and maintenance notifications, you can specify when (in number of days) the change

authorization for these objects is to be automatically transferred from the decentralized system to the central system after the technical completion of these

objects. See Change Authorization.

For distributed maintenance, in Customizing for measuring documents, you can specify when (in number of days) this document is to be archived in the central

system after the creation of a measurement document. See Measurement Documents in Distributed Sys tems.

You can forward maintenance notifications and orders that were generated as maintenance call objects for a maintenance plan as well as the change

authorization for these maintenance notifications and order to the system in which the responsible work center assigned to them is operational. They are thus

available in the system in which they are to be processed. See Forwarding of Maintenance Call Objects.

Support for Flight Operations

You can use the Site Equipment functions to assign a site to equipment without having to designate this equipment as master equipment. See Site Equipment.

In Customizing for master equipment, you can permit multiple assignments to sites. See Master Equipment.

System Architecture

Archiving

To ensure data consistency in a distributed system landscape, the system ensures that maintenance orders, maintenance notifications, equipment,

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 75 of 148

Page 76: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 76/148

functional locations, and measurement documents can only be archived in the central system.

For measurement documents, you can specify the archiving time via Customizing.

You can use the PM_EQUI archiving object to archive site equipment data.

When archiving equipment packages with the IS-DFS_EPA archiving object, the sy stem prevents an object from being archived if it is still ass igned to an

assignment between force elements and material planning objects.

Distribution

When distributing assignments between force elements and material planning objects, the system also considers equipment packages that are assigned to

these assignments. The VMPO2EPA FO X relationship is available for this p urpose.

For distribution, the system also considers site equipment (in the same way as master equipment).

The system prevents maintenance orders, maintenance notifications, equipment, functional locations, and measurement documents that are businesscompleted in the central system or that have received the deletion indicator through the archiving process from being included in further distribution

processes.

You can use filter rules to reduce the volume of data when distributing maintenance orders and notifications and when forwarding change authorizations. You

use Business Rule Framework plus to define the rules.

DFPS, Personal Equipment 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_OF_PERS_EQUI

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense Forces & Public Security

Application Component Defense Forces and Pub lic Security (IS-DFS)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise b usiness function DFPS, Logistical O perational Supp ort

(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)

You can use this business function to define the authorized materials for persons for the equipment of persons with material. You can use separate applications to

issue and return personal and functional equipment for persons. Evaluation applications are available for monitoring the authorized material equipment and the

material assignment to persons.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component SAP_APPL 605

EA-APPL 605

EA-DFPS 605

Portal content Business Package for Defense Forces & Public

Security 1.51

Features

Organizational Flexibility

For the process of equipping persons with material, you can use Organizational Flexibility  functions to define the corresponding authorized materials for 

persons and evaluate the equipment of persons:

When defining the authorized materials for positions, jobs, and force elements, you can specify whether the assignment of a material planning object or a

material container for the process for the equipment of persons in terms of materials is to be used for planning authorized personal equipment or authorized

functional equipment:

When assigning material planning objects and material containers to positions or jobs, you can choose whether these assignments are to be used to plan the

equipment of persons in terms of materials as authorized personal equipment or authorized functional equipment.

When assigning material planning objects and material containers to force elements, you can choose whether these assignments are to be used to plan the

equipment of persons in terms of materials as authorized personal equipment or authorized functional equipment, or whether these assignments are not to be

used in this p rocess (structural equipment).

You can use the Equipment Status application to show, for a key date for selected persons, a comparative overview of the authorized materials of the

equipment in terms of materials according to infotype 0800 (Material Assignment) relevant to these persons.

You can use the Monitoring Equipment  app lication to evaluate infotype 0800 (Material Ass ignment) for any periods.

Materials Management

Materials Management  contains four applications for the process of issuing and returning personal and functional equipment of persons:Issue of Personal Equipment

Return of Personal Equipment

Issue of Functional Equipment

Return of Functional Equipment

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 76 of 148

Page 77: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 77/148

You can use the applications for issuing personal and functional equipment to issue personal and functional equipment for a required period in three steps. You

can create the list of materials to be issued either manually or based on a person’s authorized material equipment.

You can use the applications for returning personal and functional equipment to return personal and functional equipment in three steps.

In the first step for each application, you select the personnel for whom equipment is to be issued or returned. In the second step, you select the materials

concerned for each person, and in the third step, you post your selection. For issued and returned materials, the system can create an issuing or return document

as a PDF file for each person.

The applications are included in the Business Package for Defense Forces & Pub lic Security as worksets.

DFPS, Investigative Case Management for SecurityOrganizations 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_ICM_OF

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense for Public Admin.

Application Component Case management for security organizations (IS-DFS-ICM)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise Business Function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 

(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)

You can use this business function to create the prerequisite for integrating functions of the Organizational Flexibility  area with the functions of the Investigative

Case Management System into SAP Customer Relationship Management.

Integration

You use this business function if you want to implement the Investigative Case Management System from SAP Customer Relationship Management.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software Component   EA-APPL 604

EA-DFPS 604

SAP_APPL 604

SAP Customer Relationship Management SAP CRM 7.0

You are familiar with the Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP) Enterprise Extension and the DFPS, Logistical Operational Support

(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG) business function.

You are using the Investigative Case Management System from SAP Customer Relationship Management and are familiar with the functions of this system.

In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the activities under Investigative Case Management .

Features

The following functions are available:

The system provides the necessary technical prerequisites for accessing Organizational Flexibility  functions from a CRM system for implementing the

Investigative Case Management System.If you assign a case ID to an operation, the system displays this assignment in the Structures Workbench app lication.

You can assign a position to a force element via the A/B 290 relationship to specify which position is responsible for an operation as the operation planner .

For more information, see Investigative Case Management.

DFPS, Distribution of Signatures 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 77 of 148

Page 78: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 78/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_PM_DIS_SIG

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense Forces & Public Security

Application Component Plant Maintenance (IS-DFS-PM), Master Data Dis tribution (IS-DFS-PDR)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise b usiness function DFPS, Logistical O perational Supp ort 3

(DFPS_OF_LOG)

You can use this business function to distribute digital signatures between the ERP systems in your system landscape for the following objects of the areas

Maintenance and Support for Flight Operations:

Log entry

Log notification

Order operation in logbook

Operations for a maintenance order (outside of the logbook)

If you activate this business function, you also have the option of distributing digital signatures for maintenance order operations (outside of the logbook) between

an ERP system and SAP Mobile Defense & Security .

Integration

In the ERP system, digital signatures are created using the functions of the Security  component (BC-SEC) of SAP NetWeaver .

The digital signatures are distributed between the ERP systems in distribution processes of the Defense Forces & Public Security  component.

If you implement SAP Mobile Defense & Security  you can sign operations for a maintenance order (outside of the logbook) on mobile devices and distribute this

signature together with the relevant object to the ERP system. There, the system handles this signature in the same way as signatures that were created directly

in the ERP system. The system distributes digital signatures for operations for a maintenance order in the back-end system to the mobile device. These

operations are indicated appropriately and cannot be changed on the mobile device.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component SAP_APPL 605

EA-APPL 605

EA-DFPS 605

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

You operate the involved systems either all in Unicode mode or in non-Unicode mode with an identical character set.

Customizing, particularly for signature strategies, signatures, authorization groups, maintenance order applications, and logbook applications, is identical in the

systems involved.

To avoid data inconsistencies, open signature processes (order operations in the logbook) must have been completed or terminated in all involved systems

before this business function is ac tivated.

Features

Signature Objects

In addition to other enhancements to the standard functions for the digital signature, the signature objects LBK_OPR and EAMDISOP are available for order 

operations inside and outside the logbook. These signature objects ensure that the keys of the signed documents remain the same after distribution to the target

system.

Distribution

To distribute the digital signatures between ERP systems, an additional FOX object for digital signatures and the required FOX relationships are available.

For more information about distributing digital signatures, see Distribution of Digital Signatures for Maintenance Objects.

DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 78 of 148

Page 79: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 79/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_MDS_INTEGRATION

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense

Application Component Mobile Applications (IS-DFS-MA)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise business function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 

(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)

You can use this business function to activate additional functions in the ERP system that you require if you want to implement the full range of the features of SAP

Mobile Defense & Security 1.6 (or higher).

Integration

You use this business function if you want to implement SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component   EA-APPL 604

EA-DFPS 604SAP_APPL 604

Software component   DEF-MDS 160

SAPMDS 160

You are familiar with the Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security and the business function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support.

In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the new activities under Mobile Applications.

Features

The following new functions are available:

The system provides the technical p rerequisites for using SAP Mobile D efense & Security 1.6.

You use new Customizing activities to make the necessary settings to be able to check whether a mobile device that is reassigned to a middleware system is

compatible with the sys tem landscape.

You use a new Customizing activity to specify various parameter values for mobile applications.

To use the Accident Report  mobile app lication, you use a new Customizing activity to specify the statuses available in the system for accident reports.For more information about these functions, see the documentation for SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6.

DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   DFPS_MDS_INTEGRATION_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Defense

Application Component Mobile Appl ications (IS-DFS-MA)

Business Function That You Also Have to Activate DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security

(DFPS_MDS_INTEGRATION)

You can use this business function in the ERP system to fulfill the technical prerequisites for using new functions of SAP Mobile Defense & Security  1.6 (or 

higher) on mobile devices.

Integration

You use this business function if you want to implement all of the features of SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 79 of 148

Page 80: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 80/148

Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions

Software component EA-APPL 605

EA-DFPS 605

SAP_APPL 605

Software component DEF-MDS 160

SAPMDS 160

You are familiar with the enterprise business function DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security .

Features

In the ERP system, you can use this business function to fulfill the necessary technical prerequisites for the following functions:

Use of the s tructural authorizations to control the authorization assignment for the SAP Mobile Defense & Security  (SAP MDS) mobile applications

Functions for creating and editing assignments between equipment production resources/tools and maintenance orders in SAP Mobile Defense & Security 

mobile app lications

The necessary functions in the mobile applications will be available with a future SAP Mobile Defense & Security  release.

Reporting Using XBRL Standards

 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_ACC_XBRL

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage   Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to create XML documents using the internationally accepted XBRL format (specification 2.1). XBRL is particularly beneficial

for reporting in financial accounting because certain authorities and institutions require enterprises to report information in this format. You can access and prepare

the data for this purpose by means of executing queries of SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence, thereby relinquishing the need to implement additional

software.

The new application features a portal-based, s treamlined user interface your employees can access in SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business

Client. This user interface enables you to configure and generate XML documents.

 As of February, 2009, SAP also offers the solution SAP BusinessObjects XBRL Publishing by Ubmatrix for the creation of XBRL documents. This solution

features the ability to convert Excel workbooks into XBRL documents.

 As in XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR), you can use SAP BusinessO bjects XBRL Publishing by Ubmatrix to create XBRL documents from all data that can be

evaluated with BI queries. Furthermore, SAP BusinessO bjects XBRL Publis hing by Ubmatrix offers several other functions:

Enhancement of XBRL taxonomies

Validation of XBRL documents

Manual editing of XBRL documents

In general, SAP recommends you use the new solution SAP BusinessObjects XBRL Publishing by Ubmatrix for the creation of XBRL documents, instead of 

the present business function.

For more information about SAP BusinessOb jects XBRL Publishing b y Ubmatrix, see http://sap.com/epm. For current information about the XBRLstrategy of SAP, see SAP Note 1278989.

Integration

Reporting Using XBRL Standards is a part of the Local Close bus iness process, which is located in the system you use for SAP Solution Manager. You also can

use the reporting function in other areas - for example, Disclosure and Reporting  in the SAP for Banking industry solution.

Reporting using XBRL standards uses various queries of your BI system to evaluate your business data.

 Authorities that require XBRL reporting typically furnish you with a taxonomy. You also can download current taxonomies from the Internet.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

 Recommendation

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 80 of 148

Page 81: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 81/148

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   FINBASIS 603

SEM_BW 603

SAP NetWeaver Portal As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00, SP14

Portal Content As of Business Package BP for XBRL Reporting

1.30

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

You have assigned the objects of business package BP for XBRL Reporting 1.30 to an existing role.You have assigned this role to all colleagues that require this role.

In your BI system, you have configured the queries you need for reporting.

In your back-end system, you have activated this business function.

In your back-end system, you have checked whether you require the two Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Instance Documents and Adjust Time Contexts in

Background Report P rogram. To do this, in Customizing for Cross-Application Components, choose General Application Functions   XBRL Reporting  

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)  .

Features

This business function covers both the configuration and the execution of reporting. Essential parts of configuration are located in the Web application where

you define the following entities:

In the data basis, you centrally define which queries of your BI system you want to use for XBRL reporting.

Taxonomies are sets of rules for creating XBRL reports; for example, there are taxonomies for U.S. GAAP and for German commercial code (HGB).

You can use value selections to define selections that you need in the same way for different taxonomy elements.

You use dimension mapping to map the fields of the queries and their values to the XBRL dimensions and their values.You use the report category to define the mapping of the fields of the assigned queries to the elements of the assigned taxonomy.

You create the instance documents – that is, the various reports – in the Web application. An additional function for mass processing is available in the back-end

system.

For more information about this business function, see the following:

 App lication component XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR)

Business package BP for XBRL Reporting 1.30

Security Guide for the XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR) component

Information Lifecycle Management: Tax Auditing 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_ACC_ILM

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Retention Warehouse (BC-ILM-RW)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)

Using this business function, you can use extraction services of the Retention Warehouse for archiving the following information when you decommission an SAP

system:

Metadata from the ABAP Dictionary

Customizing data

Master data

This information completes the existing archive data by providing additional information needed for storing and evaluating the data independently of the system.

 Another name for extraction services is Context Data Extractor (CDE).

Integration

You can use extraction services starting from Release 4.6C. You get the required software from SAP System Landscape Optimization (SLO).

The extraction services belong to SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component

Software Component SAP_APPL 604, EA-APPL 604

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 81 of 148

Page 82: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 82/148

Features

Before you can archive the required information, you have to configure the data being archived in Customizing. The standard system contains a complete

configuration for SAP systems. You can enhance this configuration by adding your own customer-specific objects. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver  under

 Application Server   Basis Services  Information Lifecycle Management   Context Data Extractor   , you can prepare archiving information as follows:

You define applications in order to structure your archive data in the Retention Warehouse. During archiving, the system creates one archiving object for each

application. In a further step, you define archiving objects and assign them to the applications.

You define segments and assign them to the applications. When defining segments, you specify if the segment is for master data or transaction data (such as,

document-like data). You link each segment with one or more database tables (reference tables) of the SAP system that make the data available for archiving.You define the sequence in which the system archives the segments. You assign a function module to each segment for reading the data from the database

tables.

You can register existing archiving objects in the Retention Warehouse. In addition to your customer-specific archiving objects, this registration applies to

transaction data that you archived using other tools. For each added archiving object, you also have to register the relevant reference tables.

You can access the following functions on the SAP Easy Access sc reen under Tools   Administration   Administration  ILM: Context Data Extractor   :

 Archive Data for ILM 

 After you have configured the data, you use this function to archive the data.

Data Extract Browser 

 After you have archived the data, you can use this function to obtain an overview of the archived data.

Display Archive Files

Using the Archive File Browser , you can disp lay the archived data in detail.

Segment Catalog 

Using this program, you can obtain an overview of the current configuration of the extraction services. Since this program is also useful during the configuration,

you can also access it in Customizing for Context Data Extractor  under Reporting . You can also use this overview for comparison and discussion with the

responsible departments or with auditors.Field Catalog 

Using this program, you can you can display detailed information on the individual segments of the current configuration of the extraction services. You can also

call the field catalog from the segment catalog in order to display detailed information.

More Information

For more information about SAP NetWeaver ILM and about Retention Warehouse, see the SAP Library under SAP NetWeaver   SAP NetWeaver by Key 

Capability   Information Integration by Key Capability   Information Lifecycle Management   .

Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   PCA_KEYV

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  Enhancement package 1 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Payment Card (AP-BP-PCA)

Payment Cards (SD-BIL-IV-PC)

You can use this b usiness function to increase security for payment card handling in your system.

You use this bus iness function if you manage payment card data in your system.

Prerequisites

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_ABA 7.01

You activated the Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption (PCA_KEYV) bus iness function.

Features

By activating this bus iness function you can:

Replace the keys used for payment card encryp tion on a periodic basis

Delete keys that are no longer used

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 82 of 148

Page 83: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 83/148

Integration of IPM and ERP 

IPM, Industry-Independent Back End 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component SAP for Media

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to integrate Intellectual Property Management (IPM) with SAP Product Sales and Distribution (SD) and Financial Accounting

(FI) without a specific back-end industry imp lementation.

If you have already activated the industry business function set Media, we recommend that you use the industry business function

TITLE_LIFECYCLE_MANAGEMENT instead of this enterprise business function. TITLE_LIFECYCLE_MANAGEMENT provides the same functionality that is

available with ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1.

Integration

The function of integrating IPM with SD and FI, previously available in the business function set Media, is now enabled without any dependence on an industry-

specific back end.

This integration is available for SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, business function Intellectual Property Management  and for SAP enhancement

package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-APPL

SAP_APPL

In CRM, you have activated the enterprise business function Intellectual P roperty Management  (CRM_IPM_1)

In ERP, you have activated the enterprise business function IPM, Industry-Independent Back End 1 (ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1)

Features

Integration of IPM with SD and FI

Previously, integrating IPM with SD and FI required you to activate the business function set Media. The key aspect of this business function is the enabling of 

this integration without any dependence on an industry-specific back end.

The integration with SD means that the sales of products that are managed using SD are transferred seamlessly into IPM for the processing of incoming andoutgoing royalties.

Some of the benefits of integration with FI are that:

Expenses and licensing revenues per p roduct can be rolled up or used in a profitability analysis

Royalties can be transferred into Accounts Payable and licensing fees can b e transferred to Accounts Receivables

Partial cash receipts from licensees can be used in the calculation of remuneration for licensors

IPM, Download to CRM of Material-Related IP Information 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 83 of 148

Page 84: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 84/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   ERP_IPM_BACKEND_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package number 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component SAP for Media

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to tighten integration between the material master and intellectual property (IP) master, as the download capability of the

material master is enhanced. If either the material master or media product master are downloaded to CRM, information about the assigned IP is also downloaded.

 Additionally, the materials assigned to an IP are now visib le in the CRM system.

Integration

Downloading the related IP information (as described above) improves the integration of IPM with ERP Sales and Distribution.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-APPLSAP_APPL

In CRM, the enterprise business function Intellectual Property Management (CRM_IPM_1) is activated

In ERP, either the business function Title Lifecycle Management (TITLE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT) or the business function IPM, Industry-Independent Back

End (ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1) is activated

Features

Download of Related Material IP Information

Downloading the related IP information when either the material master or the media product master is downloaded to CRM improves the integration of IPM with

ERP Sales and Distribution

The materials ass igned to intellectual properties are now visib le across sys tems

 Accounting

Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts 

This business function is obsolete (and can no longer be activated). Activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational

Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management

Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to centrally manage and make changes to the financial master data of your enterprise. The approval process is guided via a

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 84 of 148

Page 85: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 85/148

workflow and you have the option of distributing the master data changes to your transactional systems via enterprise services.

Integration

This business function enables you to distribute the master data for the application components General Ledger ( FI-GL) and Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-

BCS).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   SAP_BS_FND 701

Software Component   FINBASIS 604 Complete List of Features

Software Component   SAP_APPL 604 Import of master data into General Ledger (FI-GL)

Software Component   SEM-BW 604 Import of master data into Business Consolidation

(FIN-SEM-BCS)

Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.40 Complete List of Features

SAP Enterprise Services   FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and

SEM-BW 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2 or 

SAP APPL 6.04, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2

Distribution of Master Data Using Enterprise

Services

Business Intelligence content SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 4 Reports Ab out Master Data Changes

To be able to distribute the master data of the chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary Customizing settings for General Ledger.

To be able to distribute the master data of the group chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary settings for Business Consolidation. For more

information, see Workbench for Customizing.

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Financial 

Master Data Management .

Features

The following functions become available when you activate this business function:

Approval Process for Master Data Changes

You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. The processbegins with a request for a change, which can b e evaluated and commented by various p ersons. Once the request has been evaluated, considered and

approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests document and

manage all steps in the approval process.

Master Data Change

You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see the documentation of the business package.

Versioning of Master Data

The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document

when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the

changes.

Replication of Master Data

You can distribute the master data changes from the system in which you centrally made the changes to the transactional systems: You can use enterprise

services to distribute new and changed chart of accounts master data. You also can download the master data as files for upload into the transactional systems.

Data Modeling

In the standard delivery, the business function contains a data model for changing charts of accounts. You can adjust the data model to suit your master data.

Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 85 of 148

Page 86: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 86/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_MDM_ORG

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management

Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)

Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)

You can use this business function to configure a governance process for your master data in Financials. The governance of the master data is centralized and is

managed by an app roval p rocess. The changes can be replicated in the decentralized systems and is documented at all times.

This business function offers the following advantages for your enterprise:

More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data

Faster individual and consolidated financial statements

 All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).

Integration

This business function has the same features as the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), but has some

additional features and entity types. The business function FIN_MDM_ACC is obsolete as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0. Therefore, if you

want to use Financials content, activate the present business function.

If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data into the application components General Ledger  (FI-GL) and Controlling  (CO), you need to

activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA Organizational Units  (FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG).

If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data of charts of accounts and item hierarchies into the application component Business Consolidation

(FIN-SEM-BCS), you need to activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS (FIN_MDM_SOA_CU).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component FINBASIS 605 and SEM-BW 605

Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.51

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 Master data reports

XI/ESR Content   FINBASIS 605, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and

http://sap.com/xi/FIN/MDG/Global2

Replication of Master Data Using Enterprise

Services

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Master Data

Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials   .

If you want to use point-to-point communication for the enterprise services (see below), in addition to this business function you also need to activate the business

function Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions (FND_SOA_REUSE_1).

Features

This business function provides you with data model 0G , which models the following business objects in the system as entity types:

 Account

Company

Profit Center 

Cost Center 

Consolidation Unit

Cost ElementThis enables you to use the following functions for these business objects:

Approval Process for Master Data Changes

You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. You can choose

one of several workflow processes, which have different levels of approval details. For more information, see Workflow Templates for Financials.

The most detailed process begins with a request for change, which can be evaluated and commented by various persons. Once the request has been evaluated,

considered and approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests

document and manage all steps in the approval p rocess.

Master Data Change

You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see Master Data Processing.

Versioning of Master Data

The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document

when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the

changes.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 86 of 148

Page 87: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 87/148

Replication of Master Data

You can replicate the master data changes from the Master Data Governance hub to your decentralized systems. The data replication framework enables the

automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand.

Enterprise services for replicating the data are available in the following application components:

General Ledger (FI-GL)

Controlling (CO)

Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)

If you want to use enterprise services to replicate master data, you can point-to-point communication.

Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA OrganizationalUnits 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component General Ledger (FI-GL) and Controlling (CO)

Required Business Function Not relevant

This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of accounts and cost elements, including hierarchies thereof, from the

Master Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides your enterprise with the following benefits:

More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data

Faster individual and consolidated financial statements

 All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).

Integration

For processing master data and using enterprise services for exporting data from the Master Data Governance hub, you can use the business function Master 

Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605

XI/ESR Content   SAP_APPL 6.05, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2

To be able to import the master data, you need to have made the required Customizing settings for the receiving application component.

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Master Data

Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials   Enterprise Services  Inbound Services for Financials Master Data  .

FeaturesThe following enterprise services are available for importing master data:

Replicate Chart of Accounts

Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication

Replicate General Ledger Account Master as Bulk

Confirm General Ledger Account Master Replication as Bulk

Replicate Financial Reporting Structure

Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication

Replicate Company as Bulk

Confirm Company Replication as Bulk

Replicate Profit Centre as Bulk

Confirm Profit Centre Replication as Bulk

Replicate Profit Centre Group Hierarchy

Confirm Profit Centre Group Hierarchy Replication

Replicate Cost Centre as Bulk

Confirm Cost Centre Replication as Bulk

Replicate Cost Centre Group Hierarchy

Confirm Cost Centre Group Hierarchy Replication

Replicate Cost Element as Bulk

Confirm Cost Element Replication as Bulk

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 87 of 148

Page 88: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 88/148

Replicate Cost Element Group Hierarchy

Confirm Cost Element Group Hierarchy Replication

Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_MDM_SOA_CU

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management

Application Component Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)

Required Business Function Not relevant

This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of consolidation charts of accounts and item hierarchies from the Master 

Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides the following benefits for your enterprise:

More efficient master data management

Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master dataFaster individual and consolidated financial statements

 All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).

Integration

You can use the bus iness function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG) for processing the master data and for 

exporting the data from the Master Data Governance hub using enterprise services.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version listed:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   SEM_BW 605

XI/ESR Content   FINBASIS 604 and SEM-BW 605, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2

You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components  Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications   Master Data

Governance  Master Data Governance for Financials   Enterprise Services  Inbound Services for Business Consolidation  .

Features

The following enterprise services are available for importing master data:

Replicate Chart of Accounts

Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication

Replicate Financial Reporting Structure

Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_SSC_AIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage   Central Applications

Application Component Controlling (CO)

Financial Accounting (FI)

SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Required Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

You can use the this business function to enable use of the Shared Services Framework functions, that are available cross-component in multiple SAP

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 88 of 148

Page 89: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 89/148

applications.

In connection with SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function in particular optimizes the setting up and operation of an Accounting

Interaction Center (AIC) that runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It is therefore closely linked to the Multifunctional Shared Service

Interaction Center  business function in the SAP CRM system.

Using this business function offers the following business advantages:

Reduced processing times for service requests and the resultant potential for savings

Integration of Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) in the Shared Services Framework

 AIC agents can process large numbers of service requests in the AIC user interface, due to direct access to business objects in ERP systems.

Reduction in the number of errors when processing service requests

Enhanced quality of serviceWith this business function, you can use the following functions in the Shared Services Framework:

Manual creation of service requests from an ERP system

Search for service requests from an ERP system

Start ERP transactions from the Interaction Center 

Link ERP objects with service requests

Integration of SAP Collections Management with the Accounting Interaction Center 

Integration of SAP Dispute Management with the Accounting Interaction Center 

Irrespective of whether you use the Share Services Framework, this business function provides you with the option of connecting non-SAP systems and various

SAP systems to SAP Collections Management.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   EA-APPL 605

SAP_APPL 605

Software Component   BBPCRM 701 Integration with the AIC

Software Component   FINBASIS 605 * Integration of SAP Collections Management and

SAP Dispute Management with the AIC

Software Component   FINBASIS 604 * Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP

systems to SAP Collections Management

* Software component, in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management run

You have set up the application components that you are using.

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FI , Enablement for FSS (New) (FIN_605_AIC_1_M).

You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:

FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) in the system in which CRM runs.

You need this business function to integrate with the AIC. For additional information on this business function , see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP

Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm   SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business Functions (SAP 

Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)  Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management   Multifunctional Shared Service

Interaction Center   .

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1) in the system in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute

Management run.

You require this business function if you use the integration of these two applications with the AIC.

The following prerequisites must be met for the users:

So that ERP users can create and find service requests from the ERP system, they must have a user with the same name in the CRM system, to which the

business role Occasional User  (SSF_OCCUSER) is assigned.

So that AIC agents can call ERP transactions from the AIC and link ERP objects with service requests, they must have a user with the same name in the

ERP systems, to which the roles are assigned that authorize then to execute ERP transactions (transaction PFCG).

Features

Manual cr eation of service req uests from an ERP system

Service requests are used for quick reporting and resolution of problems and errors. Consequently, you can create a service request in the transactions for 

Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) direct, for example in the Change Vendor  (FK02) or Display General Ledger Documents (FV53) transactions.

When you create a service request, the system opens it in the SAP CRM Interaction Center direct. It transfers contextual data, and gives you the option of 

enclosing a screenshot. Moreover, you can link various ERP objects, for example, the vendor master record or the document.

The AIC agent in turn can later call up the linked objects by navigating direct from the service request to the ERP system.

Search for service r equests from an ERP system

In addition to the option of creating service requests direct from an ERP system, you can search for services requests. You can check their status and update the

service requests, without an AIC employee having to be active. You can choose whether you want to see only those service requests that have been created in

the ERP system in the UI of SAP CRM, or whether you want to see all of the service requests irrespective of where they were created.

Support for launching ERP transactions from the AIC

When you start an FI or CO transaction from the AIC, the ERP system calls a search screen, making it easier for the AIC agents to access the required data

records. The search screen already contains the data that is known from the account identification in the AIC (customer/vendor and company code).

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 89 of 148

Page 90: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 90/148

Enhanced Generic O bject Services for linking ERP objects with service requests.

In many FI and CO transactions in the ERP system you can link individual business objects with a service request in the AIC, for example, the master data of a

customer or vendor, using Generic Object Services (GOS). AIC agents can use this link to start the transaction with the ERP object in the ERP system from a

service request.

Generic Object Services for linking ERP objects with service requests in the AIC are only available if an AIC agent has started the ERP transaction from the AIC,

and the account in the AIC has been identified and confirmed. If at the point when the ERP transaction was started from the AIC a service request had been

opened in the AIC, the system inserts the link in the business context of the service request. If no service request had been opened in the AIC, the system

inserts the link in the interaction records of the accounts currently confirmed in the AIC.

Fact Sheet for Customer and Vendor 

The Accounting Interaction Center contains the account fact sheet that is used in financial scenarios as a support tool for communication with partners. It provides

context-related information about the communication partner, where the partner can be a customer or a vendor.

The fact sheet for the customer contains information about the special business context that ranges from purchasing volumes to the latest dispute cases for the

customer. The AIC agent is therefore able to access a complete picture of the current and past relationship with the communication partner in his daily work.

The fact sheet for the vendor contains data such as open invoices, payments, and master data. It assists the AIC agent in giving informed replies to inquiries from

the vendor.

Search for External Documents

The Accounting Interaction Center employee must be in a position to access information about the communication with the customer to date that is as complete as

possible. This includes documents that are stored in the optical archive.

The Find Document  function of the CRM user interface gives the AIC agent the option of searching from one place for documents relevant to a business partner in

a series of back-end systems, and of displaying them if necessary.

Roles

Both accounting clerks from various SAP ERP applications and agents from the SAP CRM Interaction Center are involved in the Shared Services Framework

processes. All of those involved have to navigate between various SAP systems. Such navigation is supported by the following new roles:

Occasional User  (SSF_OCCUSER)

This business role allows ERP users to create service requests from ERP systems, and to search for service requests.

 Accounting IC Agent  (IC_AIC_AGENT)

With this business role, agents in the AIC can process service requests from Financial Accounting and Controlling, execute the appropriate ERP transactions,

and link ERP objects with service requests.

 AIC Manager  (AIC_MANAGER)

 AIC managers are IC managers who have the additional option of linking particular categories of service requests with particular categories of dispute cases.

Based on this, AIC managers can have particular dispute cases created automatically.

For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  – see the SAP Library on

SAP Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Interaction Center   Interaction

Center WebClient   Shared Services Framework   Integration with SAP ERP   .

Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP systems to SAP Collections Management

This function increases the range of accounting systems the data of which you can access with SAP Collections Management. You set up the connection with the

help of a substitute system that you connect to SAP Collections Management, and to which you transfer the required master and transaction data. In this way you

can centralize and standardize the processes for collecting open receivables, irrespective of the system architecture used in your company. In the standard

system, the sample loading procedureSAP_46C is available for an SAP system with Release SAP R/3 4.6C.

Without this business function you can only connect SAP systems where Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) has at least the status SAP R/3 Enterprise

4.70.

For more information, see:Connection of Non-SAP Systems and Various SAP Systems

Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm 

Financial Accounting (FI)

Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 90 of 148

Page 91: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 91/148

General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)

New General Ledger Accounting 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_GL_CI_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component FI-GL (New)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You use the New General Ledger Accounting business function to optimize the FI-GL (New) application component for the processes of parallel accounting as

well as planning and reporting on the basis of profit centers. The following functions are provided:

Posting and Clearing for Specific Ledger GroupsTransfer of External Plan Data to New General Ledger Accounting

Integrated Planning with Controlling for Secondary Cost Elements

Cumulative Plan Data Entry for Balance Sheet Accounts

Drilldown Reports for Profit Centers and Segments

Tool for Transferring Report Writer/Report Painter Reports from Profit Center Accounting

Use of the "Elimination Profit Center" and "Origin Object Type" Fields in Reports

Line Item Extractor 

 Authorization Check for Profit Centers

Switch to Open Item Management for G/L Accounts

 Analysis of Posted Documents for Document Splitting

Integration

For planning purposes, you can transfer plan data for secondary cost elements from Controlling (CO) to new General Ledger Accounting. During the transfer,

account determination is performed in the same way as with the real-time integration of Controlling with Financials. A Business App lication Programming Interface (BAPI) enables you to transfer plan data from an external data source to new General Ledger Accounting.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components from the version specified:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_APPL 603

SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (BI) From SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3

Support Package 08

Line Item Extractor 

You have set up the General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) application component. In this way, new General Ledger Accounting is active.

You have activated the New General Ledger Accounting business function.

For information about activating individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_GL_CI_1: New General Ledger Accounting.

Features

Parallel Accounting: Posting and Clearing for Specific Ledger G roups

You use clearing specific to ledger groups if you perform parallel accounting using the ledger approach (and not the account approach). Clearing and making

postings specific to ledger groups supports you with your closing tasks. You can use the function for all items that, due to parallel accounting, are posted to

multiple ledgers and valuated differently in those ledgers, in particular for provisions (such as provisions for commission, for rebates, for process risks, or 

provisions for creating and check ing year-end closing).

This function achieves greater transparency and efficiency in monitoring individual business transactions as well as during closing.

You can restrict authorization for ledger group-specific posting and clearing to individual users by giving those users authorization for the relevant transactions and

ledgers.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Clearing and Posting Specific to Ledger Groups.

Planning

Transfer of External Plan Data to New General Ledger Accounting

 A BAPI enables you to transfer plan data from an external data source to new General Ledger Accounting. For each data callup, you can transfer data to a ledger 

for a plan version, a company code, and a fiscal year. You can also transfer values for selected periods of a fiscal year.

Existing plan data is overwritten during the transfer.

For the transfer of account assignments, the sys tem checks whether they exist and checks their validity. You can use a Bus iness Add-In (BAdI) to specify in

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 91 of 148

Page 92: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 92/148

addition that the system only transfers plan data records that meet specific criteria.

This function considerably simplifies and shortens the process for transferring plan data.

For more information, see the SAP Library under External Plan Data Transfer .

Integrated Planning with Controlling for Secondary Cost Elements

To reconcile planning in Financials with planning in Controlling, you can transfer plan data for secondary cost elements from Controlling to new General Ledger 

 Accounting. During the transfer, the accounts are determined in the same way as for CO real-time integration.

This function enhances the existing integrated planning function for primary cost elements. It increases the consistency between the plan data in Controlling and

the plan data in Financials.

If necessary, you can activate this function in Customizing independently of the other functions in the New General Ledger Accounting business function. The

function is not activated automatically when the business function is activated.For more information, see the SAP Library under Transferring Plan Data from Controlling.

Cumulative Plan Data Entry for Balance Sheet Accounts

When manually planning balance sheet accounts, you can choose at the client level whether you want to plan balance sheet changes or cumulated balance

sheet values.

If you plan cumulated balance sheet values, you can carry forward balances for plan data. The system considers the balance carryforward values when

determining the balance sheet values for the individual periods but does not display them separately.

If necessary, you can activate this function in Customizing independently of the other functions in the New General Ledger Accounting business function. The

function is not activated automatically when the business function is activated.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Setting Up Planning.

Reporting

Drilld own Reports for Pr ofit Centers and Segments

You can use the following standard drilldown reports for profit center and segment reporting. These reports have a structure that is similar to that of the reports from

Profit Center Accounting (8A-PCA001G, 8A-PCA004G, and 8A-PCA011) that they are based on.

Report in FI-GL (New) Description

0SAPBSPL-03 Profit Centerr Group: Plan/Actual/Variance

0SAPBSPL-04 Profit Center Group: Plan/Plan/Actual

0SAPBSPL-05 Profit Center Group: Key Figures

0SAPBSPL-06 Profit Center Comparison: Return on Investment

0SAPBSPL-13 Segment: Plan/Actual/Variance

0SAPBSPL-14 Segment: Plan/Plan/Actual

0SAPBSPL-15 Segment: Key Figures

0SAPBSPL-16 Segment Comparison: Return on Investment

You can call the executed reports for an individual profit center, for a range of profit centers, for a profit center group, for an individual segment, or for a range of 

segments.

In the reports, you can drilldown by profit center, by partner profit center, or by segment and by partner segment.

In a drilldown report, you can navigate from the G/L account line item list to an original document in Controlling. Furthermore, you can navigate to the plan line item

list.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Drilldown Reports for Profit Centers and Segments.

Tool for Transferring Report Writer/Report Painter Reports from Profit Center Accounting

You can transfer Report Writer reports or Report Painter reports from Profit Center Accounting to new General Ledger Accounting. For this, you can use a tool that

supports you as follows:

You can choose a source library and a target library.

If required, the system can also transfer dependent objects (such as sets) with the reports to the new environment.

For fields in the report, you can use substitution (for example, to replace the account number from Profit Center Accounting with the cost element in new

General Ledger Accounting).

You can perform the report transfer either in a test run or in an update run. The transfer can also be run during background processing.

Before the reports are actually transferred, the system analyzes for each report in Profit Center Accounting whether the report can be transferred without any

problems or with the need for postprocessing, or whether the report cannot be transferred at all.

The report transfer is valuated in detailed logs that are also saved during an update run.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transfer of Report Writer / Report Painter Reports from Profit Center Accounting.Use of the "Elimination Profit Center" and "O rigin Object Type" Fields in Reports

You can define Report Writer reports or Report Painter reports with elimination of internal business volume by using the Elimination Profit Center (ZZEPRCTR)

field.

In drilldown reports, you can use the Origin Object Type (ZZHOART) field.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Including Fields HOART and EPRCTR in Reports.

Line Item Extractor 

You can use the extractor 0FI_GL_14 to extract the leading ledger documents for BI Reporting.

For more information, see the Release Note Line Item Extractor for New General Ledger Accounting (New) as well as the SAP Library under General Ledger 

 Accounting (New): Line Items of the Leading Ledger .

Postings to Ad ditional Account Assignments

Authorization Check for Profit Centers

You can assign profit center authorizations for posting, displaying, or clearing documents. When you have activated the authorization check for profit centers, the

system reacts as follows:

 A document can only be posted if the user has authorization for all profit centers to which postings were made in the document. The authorization check is

performed simultaneously during data entry.

For manual clearing, the system only selects those open items that, in accordance with the general ledger view, make postings to profit centers that are initial

or for which the user is authorized.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 92 of 148

Page 93: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 93/148

For document display, the system only displays those line items for which the profit centers are initial or in which postings are made to authorized profit centers.

If necessary, you can activate this function in Customizing independently of the other functions in the New General Ledger Accounting business function. The

function is not activated automatically when the business function is activated.

For additional information, see Authorizations for Profit Centers in the SAP Library.

Switch to Open Item Management for G/L Accounts

You can subsequently apply open item management for G/L accounts with line item management.

You can choose between ordinary open item management and open item management for clearing specific to ledger groups.

Analysis of Posted Documents for Document Splitting

To adjust previously posted documents in accordance with the current Customizing settings for document splitting, you can use an analysis program. It is possible

to run an analysis for individual documents or for multiple documents at the same time.For the analysis, the system compares the posted version of a document against a simulated version of the document for which the current Customizing settings

were applied. The output log lists all documents for which error messages are issued or for which the comparison between the posted and the simulated version of 

the document shows differences due to changed Customizing settings.

See also:

For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the central release note FIN_GL_CI_1: New General Ledger Accounting and the detailed release

notes.

For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component  

 Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  .

From SAP ECC 6.0, enhancement package 3, you have the option of subsequently implementing document splitting. This does not require the New General

Ledger Accounting business function to be activated.

New General Ledger Accounting 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_GL_CI_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component FI-GL (New)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

New General Ledger Accounting (FIN_GL_CI_1)

You use the New General Ledger Accounting 2  business function to improve your processes for parallel accounting in the component FI-GL (New) and to ensure

the integration with Controlling.

The following functions are provided:

 Assignment Monitor for Profit Centers

Wizards for Customizing Document Splitting

Enhanced standard configuration of document splitting

Navigation from FI Reports to CO Reports

Validation of Account Assignment Combinations

Document display specific to ledger groups

Closing/Opening Postings for the Leading Ledger (Country-Specific)

Separate check on posting period for postings from CO to FI

Check Posting Period for Non-Representative Ledgers

Integration

The enhanced standard configuration of document splitting also forms part of the following business functions: PSM, Cash Flow Reporting (PSM_FA_CASH) as

well as PSM, Funds Management 2 (PSM_FM_CI_2).

Prerequisites

You have installed the following component from the version specified:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_APPL 6.04

For you to be able to use the business function, the following criteria must be met:

You have set up the General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) application component. In this way, new General Ledger Accounting is active.

You have activated the New General Ledger Accounting bus iness function.

You have activated this business function, New General Ledger Accounting 2 .

For information about activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the Release Note FIN_GL_CI_2: New General Ledger Accounting 2 .

Features

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 93 of 148

Page 94: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 94/148

New General Ledger Accounting and Profit Center Accounting

Assignment Monitor for Profit Centers

The assignment monitor for profit centers enables you to easily locate missing or incorrect assignments of objects to profit centers. This function also supports you

in performing closing correctly at the profit center level.

Now you can also check the assignment to profit centers for the following objects:

Sales order items and

Real estate objects for Flexible Real Estate Management (RE-FX)

For more information, see Assignment Monitor for Profit Centers in the SAP Library.

Wizards for Customizing Document Splitting

The wizards provide a new and user-friendly way of accessing the Customizing settings for document splitting. The following wizards are available:

Wizard for Configuring Document Splitting

Wizard for Creating a Document Splitting Rule

Both wizards contain step-by-step instructions that enable you to make the Customizing settings and to check those settings. With the wizard for creating a

document splitting rule, you can also simulate documents on the basis of existing documents.

Enhanced Standard Configuration of Document Splitting

Using these standard settings for document splitting considerably s implifies configuring some of the bus iness processes, such as those for nonassigned

payments. Configuration of these processes in document splitting is now restricted principally to assigning the default account assignment values of the

predefined constant and to assigning the new document splitting rule to the relevant document type.

Navigation from FI Reports to CO Reports

This function enables you to improve the integration of Financial Accounting (FI) with Controlling (CO) for reporting, to reduce the effort required for reconciliation,

and to make the origin of values more transparent. From within the profit center reports and segment reports in new General Ledger Accounting, you can use the

report-report interface to call up various summary reports from Controlling. The profit center and the origin object type (such as cost center or internal order) are the

points of connection between the sender report in new General Ledger Accounting and the receiver report in Controlling. In other words, the receiver reports are

derived from the selected origin object type of the sender report. You can use either predefined standard reports or your own reports and transactions as receiver 

reports.

For more information, see Navigation from FI Reports to CO Reports.

Validation of Account Assignment Combinations

This function prevents postings with invalid account assignment combinations from being posted and thereby ensures the consistency of your reporting. You can

define your own validation rules and use them to check whether different account assignment combinations are useful from a business point of view and, where

necessary, prevent invalid postings. You can also extend the check to include an account assignment combination of G/L accounts and cost centers and prevent

postings with this account assignment combination. The system only checks documents that are in the process of being posted; it does not check parked

documents. During postings, you can display the account assignments to be checked and determine the result. In Customizing, you can assign a validation

strategy with validation rules to an entire company code as the default strategy. You can define exceptions for specific ledger groups. You can use the validation

log to analyze validation rules.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Validation of Account Assignment Combinations.

Parallel Ledg ers

Document Display Specific to Ledger Groups

The selection criterion for the ledger group has been added to the logical database BRF  (Business Rule Framework, the document database). You can therefore

make selections by ledger group or by ledger  in all reports that use the logical database BRF  to select data.

The following reports have been adapted so that they now contain the ledger group as a selection criterion:

Compact Document Journal (RFBELJ00)

Compact Document Journal [not accessible] (RFBELJ00_NACC)

Document List (RFBUEB00)

Furthermore, you can also add the ledger group as a selection criterion to your own reports that are based on the logical database BRF .

Closing/Opening Postings for the Leading Ledger (Country-Specific)

You can make year-end closing entries and opening entries for specific ledgers, including for the leading ledger. For this, you use the program Closing/Opening 

Postings at Year End . This program is intended mainly for the following countries: Italy, Slovakia, Turkey, Portugal, Romania, and Columbia.

Local Close

Separate Check on Posting Period for Postings from CO to FI

This function enables closing operations in Controlling and Financial Accounting to be performed more smoothly. Previously, the FI period had to remain open

during closing operations at period end all the while postings from Controlling were being transferred to Financial Accounting. Now, you can continue to post CO

transactions in the preceding period even if this period has been closed for FI postings. For this, you can use the additional period interval in the Customizing

settings for the posting periods; this period interval is only relevant for postings from Controlling to Financial Accounting. It is valid for postings created with the real-

time integration as well as for postings created using the CO-FI reconciliation ledger during closing operations.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Opening and Closing Posting Periods.

Check Posting Period for Non-Representative Ledgers

This function reduces the effort required for coordination between the different accounting principles during closing operations. Previously, when a posting was

made to different ledgers, the period check was only performed for the representative ledger. This meant that posting periods in non-representative ledgers were

not considered. You can now specify that the posting period check is also performed for non-representative ledgers. In this way, postings can still be made in non-

representative ledgers even after the posting period in the representative ledger has been closed. Furthermore, you can specify a different fiscal year variant for 

non-representative ledgers.

For more information, see the SAP Library under G/L Account Posting.

More Information

For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the central release note FIN_GL_CI_2: New General Ledger Accounting 2  and the detailed release

notes.For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component  

 Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New).

From SAP ECC 6.0, enhancement package 4, you can transfer document splitting information that already exists in Special Purpose Ledger (FI-SL) to new

General Ledger Accounting. This migration function is only available as part of the SAP General Ledger Migration Service in the Migration Cockpit . This does

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 94 of 148

Page 95: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 95/148

not require the New General Ledger Accounting 2  business function to be activated. For more information, see SAP Note 1163997.

New General Ledger Accounting 3 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_GL_CI_3

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL)

Depending on the function, also the following application components:

Materials Management  (MM), Asset Accounting  (FI-AA)

Prerequisite Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to improve your processes for periodic tasks and optimize how you use the archive. As part of the financial statement

analysis, you can perform actual/actual comparisons between different ledgers. Furthermore, the business function enables you to manage how numbers are

assigned when assets are transferred.

The following functions are provided:

Impairment of Assets in Accordance with IAS 36

Parallel Valuation of Material Stocks

Enhanced Reports for Reconciliation Between Materials Management and New General Ledger Accounting

Reading of General Ledger Accounting Totals Records from the Archive

 Actual/Actual Comparison Between Different Ledgers

Number Ass ignment During Asset Transfer 

Update of Internal Revenues Between Profit Centers

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software Component   SAP_APPL 6.05

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 Reading of General Ledger Accounting Totals

Records from the Archive (for BI Reporting)

You have activated this business function, New General Ledger Accounting 3.

Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic

General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) application component. In these application components, the functions are available as follows:

Function New General Ledger Accounting Classic General Ledger Accounting

Impairment of Assets Available Available

Parallel Valuation of Material Stocks Available Available

Reconciliation Between MM and FI-GL Available Not available

Reading Totals Records from Archive Available Not available

 Actual/Actual Comparison Between Different

Ledgers

 Available Not available

Number Assignment During Asset Transfer Available Available

Update of Internal Revenues Between Profit

Centers

 Available Not available

For information about activating individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_GL_CI_3: New General Ledger Accounting 3.

Features

Impairment of Assets in Accordance with IAS 36

You can use this function in Asset Accounting to post the impairment of fixed assets by means of mass processing. You can use a worklist to portray the asset

master records of a cash-generating unit (CGU) and specify a total amount for the impairment. You have the following options for distributing the total amount for the

impairment:

Impairment with dependency on net values of the individual fixed assets

Impairment down to a net book value of zero

Impairment using customer-specific distribution by means of a Business Add-In (BAdI)

Impairment is posted either as an increase of cumulated depreciation or as a reduction of the asset acquisition value.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Impairment.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 95 of 148

Page 96: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 96/148

Page 97: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 97/148

For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component  

 Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  .

.

FI-GL (New), Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_GL_REORG_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 (SAP_APPL 605)

Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)

Application Component FI-GL (New)

FI-AA

Other application components with objects for which you want to change the

profit center assignments during the profit center reorganization (see details

below)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation inAddition

For segment reporting for fixed assets in new General Ledger Accounting:Business Function Reporting Financials 3 (FIN_REP_SIMPL_3)

You can use this business function to portray the reassignment of profit centers in new General Ledger Accounting (Profit Center Reorganization).

 A change to the profit center structure is generally triggered by a management decision. The profit center reorganization assists you in dividing up, combining, and

replacing profit centers. A change to the profit center structure necessitates a change to the assignment of profit centers to objects (such as materials, orders,

purchase orders, or sales orders).

This often entails changing thousands of objects and making corresponding adjustment postings. With the profit center reorganization, this business function

provides a standard process for this.

You can use this standard process to change the profit center assignment on a key date in the future. Profit center reporting can be performed consistently in new

General Ledger Accounting both before as well as after changes to profit center assignments. Objects affected by the reorganization (such as materials and

orders) are reassigned and their stocks or balances are transferred in new General Ledger Accounting. All steps are logged and are therefore verifiable.

Furthermore, you can use this business function in Asset Accounting as well as in new General Ledger Accounting to create asset reports at the profit center 

or segment level.

Contact your SAP Account Executive to establish whether using Profit Center Reorganization causes additional license fees to be incurred by you.

Integration

You can use the reorganization to change the profit center assignments of objects from different application components (such as FI-AA, CO, or SD). For a

detailed list of the objects that can be reorganized, see below.

Prerequisites

For you to be able to use this business function, the following criteria must be met:

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component SAP_APPL 605

Technical Component NetWeaver Portal 7.02 or 

NetWeaver Business Client

Portal Content If you use the NetWeaver Portal:

Business Package for Reorganization

Management 1.50

Work center pool role 1.50 of Business Package

for Common Parts

Reorganization

You have set up and activated the application component General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New).

You have activated this business function FI-GL (New), Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports (FIN_GL_REORG_1).

In Customizing for the Reorganization, you have activated the reorganization plan type Profit Center .

You need to activate segment reporting for assets separately in Customizing for  Asset Accounting .

Segment reporting for fixed assets must be activated and set up before the reorganization of fixed assets is possible.

To be able to use segment reporting for fixed assets in new General Ledger Accounting, you need to have activated the business function Reporting Financials

3 (FIN_REP_SIMPL_3) and the related portal content.

For more information, see Reporting Financials 3.

For the profit center reorganization, you need to perform additional preparatory activities as well as make the necessary Customizing settings.

For information on this, see the release note FIN_GL_REORG_1: Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports (New).

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 97 of 148

Page 98: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 98/148

The reorganization is available as a Web Dynpro application in the portal as well as in the NetWeaver Business Client.

To be able to use the reorganization in the portal, you need to have installed the following business package: Business Package for Reorganization

Management 1.50.

For more information on using the reorganization in the portal and in the NetWeaver Business Client, see the release note FIN_GL_REORG_1: Profit Ctr 

Reorganization and Segment Reports (New).

Features

Reorganization

Roles

The reorganization supports the following users with their tasks:

The Reorganization Manager  is responsible for the entire reorganization project. He or she creates the reorganization plan and performs the steps for generating

the object lists (that is, determining the objects involved), for reassignment, and for performing transfers on the basis of specifications made by object owners in

the system. The reorganization manager ends the reorganization by closing the reorganization plan.

The Object Owner  assigns the new profit centers to the objects in his or her area of responsibility. The reorganization manager cannot make any further 

changes to these assignments during reassignment and transfer postings.

Process Flow

The reorganization manager creates a reorganization plan. This is where the reorganization date is specified. The reorganization date occurs in the future, is the

start date of a posting period of the leading ledger, and is also the start date of the reorganization period. The reorganization also contains the controlling area and

the assignment of new to old profit centers. In the next step, the reorganization manager starts object list generation from within the reorganization plan. When

generating the object list, the system looks for the objects (such as materials or WBS elements) that are affected by the profit center reorganization and to which a

new profit center needs to be assigned. These objects are entered in the object lists belonging to the object owners. An object list serves as a worklist for an

object owner. Before the reorganization period is opened, the object owners need to store the new profit center assignments in the system.

Once the previous period (including any assessments, settlements, and so on) has been closed, the reorganization manager performs the reassignment from

within the reorganization plan. This changes the profit centers stored in the master data of the objects determined in the previous step. The system determines any

dependent objects for successfully reassigned objects that have imparted the profit center and reassigns such dependent objects in the same way. This ensures

in particular that floating processes (such as the clearing of any open items) are diverted to the new profit centers.

Then, from within the reorganization plan, the reorganization manager starts the balance transfers for objects that have already been reassigned. This enables

balances to be displayed consistently for key dates at the profit center level. Transfer postings are made in new General Ledger Accounting. In the case of fixed

assets, the system performs an integrated transfer posting (in new General Ledger Accounting as well as in Asset Accounting). The system logs all affected

objects, their old and new assignment, and the relevant object owner. It also logs the transferred balances for each object. Separate consolidation transaction

types can be used to see the transferred balances in totals reports in new General Ledger Accounting.

For a more detailed introduction, see Profit Center Reorganization.

For more information about the process flow of the reorganization, see Reorganization Process.

Objects that Can Be Or ganized

The following object types that have profit centers in their master data record are reassigned consistently: Fixed asset, material, purchase order, sales document

(such as sales order or contract), cost center, cost object, WBS element, network, network activity, internal order, accrual order, CO production order, product cost

collector, Q M order, PP p roduction order, service and maintenance order, process order, payable, and receivable.

During the transfer of the balances of the affected objects, the system only transfers balances that can be assigned directly to the affected objects. The following

balance sheet items are reorganized:

Fixed assets

Inventory (raw materials, work in process, finished products)

Receivables from goods and services

Payables from goods and services

In the profit and loss (P&L) statement, no transfer postings are made. In the case of cost-relevant transactions, the following applies: Provided that the P&L line

items contain a cost object carrying a profit center, the system makes postings to the new profit center in the reorganization period in the P&L statement; in the

prior period, the system makes postings to the old profit center.

For more information, see:

Reorganization of Materials and Purchase Orders

Reorganization of WIP and SD Objects

Reorganization of Cost Centers

Reorganization of Fixed Assets

Reorganization of Receivables and Payables

Segment Reporting for Fixed Assets

You can specify the account assignment objects Profit Center  and Segment  in the master data of the fixed assets. (You use a corresponding program to derive

the profit center or segment for fixed assets already present in the system as well).

This enables you to create asset reports at the profit center or segment level.

In Asset Accounting, you can create various reports at the profit center or segment level.

In new General Ledger Accounting, you can create an aggregated report on changes in tangible assets. In the report, the values are cumulated on the basis of 

the G/L accounts. The report is provided via POWL technology.

For more information, see the application documentation:

For new General Ledger Accounting under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) 

Reporting   Financial Statements  Segment Reporting for Fixed Assets  (for the report itself, see Aggregated Report on Changes in Tangible Fixed Assets)

For Asset Accounting under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   Financial Accounting    Asset Accounting (FI-AA)  Information System  Standard 

Reports  Segment Reporting for Fixed Assets  (for the reports themselves, see Segment Reports and Profit Center Reports)

More InformationFor a detailed list of the new functions delivered with this business function as well as information on the Customizing settings, see the central release note

FIN_GL_REORG_1: Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports (New) as well as the detailed release notes accessible from this central release note.

For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component  

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 98 of 148

Page 99: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 99/148

 Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  .

There is a business function corresponding to this business function in Public Sector Management (PSM), allowing you to reassign account assignments in

Funds Management. For more information on this PSM business function, see PSM, Reassignment with New General Ledger Accounting.

FI-GL (New), Transfer of Totals and Single Documents inDistributed Systems 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_GL_DISTR_SCEN_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 (SAP_APPL 605)

Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)

Application Component FI-GL (New)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

This business function provides you with an ALE distribution scenario for new General Ledger Accounting.

In a system landscape with distributed production systems (such as a central FI system as a receiver system with local Logistics systems as sender systems),

you can transfer FI documents individually or grouped together in aggregated form. In the case of aggregated document transfer, the system collects business

transactions of the same type, summarizes them in an aggregated document, and transfers this aggregated document to the receiver system. Transferring

documents in aggregated form reduces the data volume considerably, thereby improving performance.

The new distribution scenario replaces the previously used distribution scenarios for Financial Accounting.

Integration

You activate the new distribution scenario for a specific company code. Once you have activated the new distribution scenario for a company code and the same

receiver system is set up with the old distribution scenario for that company code, only the IDoc of the new distribution scenario is generated. Otherwise, you can

continue to use the old distribution scenario as before.

Prerequisites

For you to be able to use the business function, the following criteria must be met:You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software Component SAP_APPL 605

You have set up the General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) application component. In this way, new General Ledger Accounting is active.

You have activated this business function FI-GL (New), Transfer of Totals and Single Documents in Distributed Systems (FIN_GL_DISTR_SCEN_1).

For more information on the Customizing settings for the individual functions, see the release note FIN_GL_DISTR_SCEN_1: Transfer of Totals and Single

Documents in Distributed Systems (New).

Features

You specify which documents are transferred individually and which are transferred in aggregated form by using the corresponding indicator in the account master 

record. When this indicator is set, all documents that contain that account are transferred individually. Similarly, all documents containing taxes are transferred

individually. Furthermore, you can specify additional criteria for the single document transfer.

With the single document transfer, document splitting information is also transferred to the receiver system.

 All documents that have not been transferred individually are collected and can be transferred in an aggregated document. With the aggregated document transfer,

as many single documents as possible are summarized in an aggregated document and then transferred as one document.

The single document transfer is performed automatically at the time of posting. You have to start the transfer of aggregated documents explicitly from the menu.

To compare the transferred documents with the transaction figures at the ledger level, you can use the existing reconciliation report Compare Documents / 

Transaction Figures, which you start in the central system. To check the totals of the transferred documents at the account level in the receiver system and to

display any variances, you can use the reconciliation report Compare Documents from Totals Document Transfer .

You can reverse a transfer run for aggregated documents. You can control the reversal with the reconciliation report Compare Documents from Totals Document 

Transfer .

The new basic type FAGLDT01 belongs to the new distribution scenario. There are the following new message types:

FAGLDT01 for single document transfer, and

FAGLST01 for aggregated document transfer 

There are various Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) available for the new distribution scenario in the sender and receiver systems (such as for appending customer 

fields to the IDoc). These BAdIs correspond to the customer exits of the old distribution scenarios. We recommend using the BAdIs for the new distribution

scenario.

More Information

For more information about each function, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger 

 Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  Tools  Document Transfer Using ALE (FI-GL (New))  .

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 99 of 148

Page 100: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 100/148

Average Balances 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_ADB

Type of Business Function Industry Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)

Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) and Classic General Ledger Accounting 

(FI-GL)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this b usiness function at any time during the fiscal year to calculate average daily balances. For example:

Month-to-date average balance

Quarter-to-date average balance

Year-to-date average balance

The system calculates average daily balances on the basis of the posting date of the document. You can correct and adjust average daily balances manually.

You can also calculate various key figures, such as the prior day balance and the year-to-date average balance.

You can use average daily balances for regulatory reporting, for instance, or to analyze your funding costs.

Integration

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software component   SAP_APPL 6.05

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01

Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic

General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) app lication component, p lus the Special Ledger (FI-SL) application component.

Features

Key Figure Calculation

You can use this function to calculate all or a selection of the key figures provided in the system.

Calculate Monthly Averages

You can use this function to update the monthly average ledger. You should do so once a month. This improves system performance and minimizes rounding

errors.

Correct Monthly Average Balances

You can use this function to correct average balances from the monthly average ledger.

Move and Merg e

You use this function to move balances to different ledger combinations.

Import of precalculated averages

You can use this function to post averages that have already been calculated (such as the month-to-date average activity) to FI.

More Information

For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the release information FIN_GL_ADB: Average Daily Balance (New).

For more information about each function, see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger 

 Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  Reporting   Financial Statements   Average Daily Balance  .

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 100 of 148

Page 101: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 101/148

FI Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable

FI, Enterprise Service For Sending Payment Advice Notes 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_APAR_PAYMT_ADV

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 

Technical Usage   Central Applications

Application Component  Accounts Payable (FI-AP)

 Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)

Prerequisite Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to automate the processing of payment advice notes by employing enterprise services also for outgoing  payment advice

notes. For this purpose, the following new operation is available in process component Payment Processing :

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2/PaymentAdviceNotification_Out

The operation for incoming payment advice notes http://sap.com/xi/APPL/SE/Global/PaymentAdviceNotification_In is already available

to you with software component version ESA ECC-SE 604.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   EA-APPL 605

SAP_APPL 605

SAP Enterprise Services with the use of SAPNetWeaver Process Integration

SAP NetWeaver 7.02 , software componentversion SAP_APPL 605, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2

You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for all application components that you use. For additional information on the specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_APAR_PAYMT_ADV: Business Function FI, ES Sending Payment Advices (New).

You activated this business function.

Features

You have the following options for sending payment advice notes electronically in the form of an XML file:

Point to Point Connection of the PI Systems

You use the direct connection between your system and the receiver system, meaning between two systems in which SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

(SAP NetWeaver PI ) is running. These systems are referred to as PI systems below. Your PI system sends in this instance an XML message direct to the

receiver PI system.

Sending an E-Mail

You use the e-mail address of the recipient. Your PI system sends in this instance an e-mail that includes the payment advice note in the form of an XML file as

an attachment. The recipient extracts the XML file and forwards it for processing to the enterprise service PaymentAdviceNotification_In.

For more information on enterprise service http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2/PaymentAdviceNotification_Out, vis it the SAP Help Portal

under http://help.sap.com  SOA  .

Example

You can use enterprise services for outgoing payment advice notes for the following business transactions:

You pay your incoming invoices using the payment program (transaction F110) and transfer a payment advice note to the vendor via the cleared documents.

You collect the money for your outgoing invoice with the payment program for payment requests (transaction F110) and transfer a payment advice note to the

customer via the cleared documents.

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 101 of 148

Page 102: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 102/148

Subcontractor Management (Down Payment Chains) 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function  LOG_FI_DPC_MM_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Down Payment Chains (FI-AF-DPC), Purchasing (MM-PUR)

Directly dependent business function requiring activation in addition Enterprise Extension Financials Extension (EA-FIN)

This business function enables you to enter the various b usiness transactions with your business partners, such as the ordering party, vendor, and

subcontractors, for projects that extend over a long time period.

You can create transactions s uch as advance payments, partial invoices, a final invoice, and adjustments/corrections. When you create partial invoices, final

invoices, and adjustments/corrections, you can take retention amounts and additional costs into account. Debit-side and credit-side down payment chains are

used for this kind of settlement.

The debit-side down payment chain comprises invoice processes and payment transactions with a customer, such as the ordering party of a construction project.

The credit-side down payment chain comprises invoice processes and payment transactions with a vendor, such as a subcontractor.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   EA-APPL 605

SAP_APPL 605

You have activated the Enterprise Extension Financials Extension (EA-FIN).

For more information about this Enterprise Extension, see Financials Extension (EA-FIN).

If you have activated both business functions MM, Integration of Materials Management and Financial Accounting  (LOG_MMFI_P2P) and Subcontractor 

Management (down payment chains) (LOG_FI_DPC_MM_1), you cannot use their functions simultaneously in the same purchase order item. You can activate

both business functions, but you cannot use them in the same purchase order item.

For more information, see the documentation for the business function MM, Integration of Materials Management and Financial Accounting.

For more information about the required Customizing settings, see the SAP Customizing Implementation Guide under Financial Accounting (New)   Accounts

Receivable and Accounts Payable Accounting   Business Transactions  Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains  Enhance Debit-Side and Credit-

Side Down Payment Chains  .

Features

Integration of the Down Payment Chain in Purchasing

If you have assigned the item category Service to an order item in the purchase order and the Customizing activity Assign Chain Type to Purchase Order 

Document  is configured accordingly, a contract for the credit-side down payment chain is created or changed for this order item. In credit-side down payment

chains, the contract can be settled as follows:

 Advance payment, several partial invoices taking account of retention amounts and service charges, a final invoice, and adjustments after the final invoice. The

following features are available:

Invoices and credit memos are only entered in the credit-side down payment chain and not in the logistics invoice verification.

When an invoice is created in the down payment chain, the system enters a default gross value determined from the service entry sheets that have been

entered and released so far. You can overwrite this default value. Using message control in Customizing, you can specify that the gross value cannot just be

changed as required.

For more information, see the Implementation Guide under Enhance Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains  Change Message Control   .

If you post or cancel invoices in a down payment chain, the system updates the commitment for the corresponding purchase order item. The cancellation

recreates the commitment items, and a final invoice clears the commitment.

You can make an account assignment for the contract to WBS elements, a cost center, a network/activity, or an order.

For more information, see SAP Library under Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains.

Integration of the Debit-Side Down Payment Chain in the Sales Process within the Sales Order Item

If you create or change a sales order, the system checks if a chain type of a debit-side down payment chain has been assigned to the selected item category of a

sales document item.

If there is an ass ignment, the sys tem displays the DP Chain tab page in the details of the sales document item and prepopulates the chain type.

If the user has entered all the required data for creating a debit-side down payment chain, the system creates a debit-side down payment chain contract when

the user saves the sales order.

You can use WBS elements and orders as account assignment objects.

You create billing documents using the standard billing transaction, for example, transaction VF01 in the SAP Easy Access screen under Logistics   Sales

and Distribution  Billing   Billing Document   Create  .You can only release billing documents for down payment chains in transaction /SAPPCE/DPC_REL_INV  in the SAP Easy Access screen under

 Accounting   Financial Accounting    Additional Functions  Down Payment Chains  Release Billing Documents for Down Payment Chains  .

If the accounting employee releases the billing document for the debit-side down payment chain, the system checks if a transaction category of the down

payment chain is assigned to the billing document type.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 102 of 148

Page 103: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 103/148

If there is an assignment, the system triggers posting for the corresponding transaction in the debit-side down payment chain. The employee can enter retention

amounts and additional costs. The gross amount of the transaction is copied from the billing document and cannot be changed by the employee.

When the posting is saved, an entry is created in the debit-side down payment chains and an accounting document is created in FI.

You post the incoming / outgoing payments for advance payments, partial invoices, final invoices, and corrections/adjustments in Accounts Payable

 Accounting (FI-AP). The payments are cleared in the down payment chain transactions and disp layed in the posting data.

You can only cancel billing documents that are relevant for down payment chains using transaction  /SAPPCE/DPC_CANC_INV  in the SAP Easy Access

menu under  Accounting   Financial Accounting    Additional Functions  Down Payment Chains  Cancel Billing Documents Relevant for Down Payment 

Chains  . In the first step select the billing document for a specific billing date. Detailed information about the cancellation appears in a log.

Customer Enhancements

You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Posting the Down Payment Chain to design your own subscreen for posting a new down payment chain transaction.

The Business Add-In (BAdI) Customer-Specific Tab Pages in Contracts allows you to develop your own tab pages in down payment chain contracts.

For more information about the Business Add-Ins, see the Customizing section Enhance Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains under Define

Customer Enhancements.

Account Assignment Objects

You can make an account assignment for the contract of a debit-side or credit-side down payment chain to WBS elements, a cost center, a network/activity, or an

order. When you integrate debit-side down payment chains in the sales process, you can use the WBS element and the order as account assignment objects.

Advance Payment

 Advance payments are used for advance financing. If you post partial invoices as invoices, you can enter advance payments up until you enter a final invoice.

 Advance payments can be cleared with the following partial invoice completely, partially, or not at all. Retention amounts and additional costs are not taken into

account in advance payments. Advance p ayments only affect payments, not revenues. You post an advance payment entirely to an account assignment object

(for example, a WBS element).

Retention Amounts

In the down payment chain contract, you can agree on the following retention amounts with your business partner:

Security retention amounts for partial invoices (that are cleared in the final invoice)

Security retention amounts for final invoices

You can consider the following retentions in the down payment chain transactions:

Security retention amounts for partial invoices (that are cleared in the final invoice)

Security retention amounts for final invoices

Special retention amounts (quality defects or incorrect invoicing)

When advance payment requests are created, no retention amounts are considered.

If you enter partial invoices as down payment requests, the retention amounts are posted statistically to the down payment chain. The accounting document shows

the open receivab le or payable.

If you enter partial invoices as invoices, final invoices, or adjustments/corrections, the security retention amounts and special retention amounts are:

Posted as payables with a special G /L indicator and assigned a payment block for a credit-side DP chain

Posted as receivab les with a special G/L indicator and assigned a payment block for a debit-side DP chain

You define the special G/L indicator in Customizing either based on the company code or based on the company code and the retention category for debit-side

and credit-side down payment chains.

The special G/L indicator determines the reconciliation accounts of the general ledger to which the system updates the retention amounts (security retention

amounts and special retention amounts). You define the payment block in Customizing based on the company code for debit-side and credit-side down payment

chains for partial invoices and final invoices. In Customizing, you can still configure the net amount or gross amount as the base amount for the percentage

calculation of the security retention amounts.

Additional Costs

In the down payment chain contract, you can enter additional costs or contractors' all risk insurance that you agreed on with your business partner. For contractors'

all risk (CAR) insurance, you can choose the invoicing method:

Complete amount (percentage amount of the contract value) with the first partial invoice, and possible corrections when posting the final invoice and

adjustments

Percentage of invoice amount

If the accounting employee posts a document, the system uses the percentage stored in the contract and the base amount defined in Customizing to calculate anamount for the additional cost category. The employee can make a value-based or percentage-based change to this amount when processing the posting. In

Customizing, you define if the additional costs should be updated such that they decrease expenses or decrease revenues. The additional costs reduce the

amount of the down payment request in Accounting and are updated statistically in the down payment chains. For invoices, the additional costs reduce the

receivable or payab le and are updated in Accounting such that they decrease revenues or decrease expenses .

Verifications

You can maintain agreed verifications in the contract. You can agree on a payment block for verifications if the verification does not arrive in the period specified.

You define the payment block in Customizing.

Deferred Tax

Deferred taxes (known as minimum actual taxes in the construction industry) are taxes that are not reported to the tax authorities at the time of the incoming

invoice, but at a later time. Depending on the legal requirements in your country, you can define the reporting time in Customizing, that is when the deferred tax

should be reported to the tax authorities. The following procedures are supported:

In Germany, the reporting time before the final invoice is the time of payment. After a final invoice of a down payment chain has been created, the reportingtime is the time of the incoming or outgoing invoice. That means there is a change from actual taxation to taxation on an accrual basis.

In France, the reporting time is generally the time of payment.

Determine Accounting Document Type

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 103 of 148

Page 104: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 104/148

In Customizing, you can store which document type should be used for the accounting documents when a posting is created in the DP chain. If the available

Customizing settings are not sufficient, you can store your own logic for determining the document type in a customer-specific implementation.

FI, Exclusions in Extended Withholding Tax 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_EWHT_EXCL

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component  Accounts Payable (FI-AP-AP)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to exclude line items from the base amount used to calculate withholding tax. You can define the exclusion parameters and

include account assignments, document types, document ranges, and other fields.

You define a derivation strategy with criteria that specifies which line items are excluded from the base amount used in the withholding tax calculation. If new

General Ledger Accounting, Grantee Management, or the US Federal ledgers are used with a splitting method that splits the base item category of withholdingtax, the resulting lines for withholding tax are split based on the characteristics that have not been excluded. The withholding tax data screen shows the details of 

included and excluded lines.

Integration

This business function does not alter the existing extended withholding tax functionality; it makes it more flexible by redefining the withholding tax base amount.

Limitation

If you are using automatic down payment transfer functionality as described in the following list, the withholding tax information is not stored on the down payment

transfer lines, and therefore, the withholding tax calculation does not consider previously calculated withholding amounts.

Down payment offset for purchase order-related documents (ERP 2005) including transfer lines calculated in goods receipt (for valuated purchase order line

items) and transfer lines in logistic invoice verification documents (for non-valuated purchase orders)

Down payment offset for earmarked funds-related Financial Accounting (FI) invoices (EHP4 functionality included in the PSM_FM_CI_2 business function)

Down payment offset for earmarked funds-related FI invoices at the header level (EHP5 functionality included in the PSM_USFED_PPAP_3 business function)

If you need to use any of the above functionality, we recommend that you manually post the down payment transfer lines using the Clear Vendor Down Payment 

transaction.

The automatic down payment transfer functionality for purchase order-related down payments in logistic invoice verification (EHP4 functionality included in the

LOG_MMFI_P2P business function) is excluded from this limitation.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   SAP_APPL 604 or higher 

Features

In Customizing for Financial Accounting (New) under Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Withholding Tax   Extended Withholding Tax   Calculation 

Exclusions   Define Exclusions  , you can maintain the exclusion rules depending on various parameters such as G/L account and fund.

Error Correction System 

Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 104 of 148

Page 105: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 105/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_ERR_CORR

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)

Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) and Classic General Ledger Accounting 

(FI-GL)

Required Business Function Not relevant

You can use this business function to correct FI documents from feeder systems. You can correct individual documents manually, or you can correct mass

documents. The data for can come from SAP systems or non-SAP systems. There is a predefined interface that you can use to integrate the systems into the Error 

Correction System.

Integration

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software component   SAP_APPL 6.05

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01

Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic

General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) application component.

Features

Posting of FI Documents

This function contains the following options for posting FI documents in the target system:

ECS direct input

Direct input

BAPI_ACC_DOCUMENT_CREATE

The enterprise service AccountingDocumentERPBulkNotification_In

Incorrect postings are handled in different ways. For example, the system creates an ECS item, which it converts into an FI document after you have corrected the

document manually.

Mapping data from a feeder system to an SAP target system

You can use this function to map data from feeder systems to the Error Correction System, and continue processing the data in the Error Correction System.

Mass correction

You can use this function to correct FI documents in mass processing, and to correct individual documents manually.

Reversal

You can use this function to reverse incorrect FI documents and to delete the ECS items that were generated.

Document splitting

You can use this function to split documents that have more than 990 line items into multiple documents.

More Information

For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the release information FIN_GL_ERR_CORR: Error Correction System (New)

For more information about each function, see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger 

 Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  Business Transactions  Post   G/L Account Posting Error Correction and Suspense Accounting   .

Error Correction System: Suspense Accounting 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 105 of 148

Page 106: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 106/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_ERR_CORR_SUSP

Type of Business Function Industry Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)

Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) and Classic General Ledger Accounting 

(FI-GL)

Required Business Function Error Correction System (FIN_GL_ERR_CORR)

You can use this business function to correct mass FI documents from feeder systems and to post them to a suspense account. The data for can come from SAP

systems or non-SAP systems. There is a predefined interface that you can use to integrate the systems into the Error Correction System.

Integration

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software component   SAP_APPL 6.05

BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01

Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic

General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) application component.

Features

Posting to a suspense account

You use the Error Correction Sys tem (FIN_GL_ERR_CORR) bus iness function.

You can use this function to post incorrect documents as ECS items to a suspense account.

More Information

For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the release information: FIN_GL_ERR_CORR_SUSP: Error Correction System: Suspense Accounting 

(New).

For more information about each function, see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   Financial Accounting   General Ledger 

 Accounting (FI-GL) (New)  Business Transactions  Post   G/L Account Posting   Error Correction and Suspense Accounting   .

 Leasing

Full Service Leasing

Technical Data

Technical name of the business function LAM_GEN_FSL

Available as of  SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2

ECC software component EA-APPL 602, SAP_APPL 6.02

ECC application component Lease Accounting  (FI-LA)

Business Intelligence Content Not relevant

SAP Enterprise Services  As of SWC EA-APPL 602, namespace http://sap.com/xi/AB/FS/VP

Java software component Not relevant

Portal Content Not relevant

Additional content available in other SAP applications Not relevant

Business function that has to be activated EA-FIN Financials Extension

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 106 of 148

Page 107: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 107/148

Use

You can use this business function in leasing processing to create, check, and post large numbers of invoices from service providers (such as service c enters).

You create service invoices in the settlement request list. When you process settlement request lists, the system compares the invoices with the existing leasing

documents in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It checks whether the service invoice to be settled is covered by the leasing document and

which conditions apply to this service.

Integration

The processing of service invoices in agency b usiness is part of the SAP Leasing solution.

For more information, see SAP Help Portal at help.sap.com → SAP for Industries → SAP for Banking  → SAP Leasing .

Prerequisites

● The business function LAM_GEN_FSL is part of the Lease Operations business scenario.

Note the entries in the business scenario component list.

● To be able to use the functions of the business function LAM_GEN_FSL, you have to activate the business function in Switch Framework Customizing 

(transaction SFW5).

● You have made the Customizing settings for leasing processing in agency business.

For more information, see Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General → Agency Business → Enhancements for Full Service Leasing.

Features

● When invoices are received for services previously authorized by the lessor, the system checks whether the corresponding service order exists in SAP

CRM.

● When invoices are received for services that have not been authorized, the system checks in SAP CRM whether the lease covers this service and what

proportion of the costs are accepted by the lessor.

● In agency bus iness, invoices are received that are initially paid by the lessor but are then forwarded to the customer, for example fuel card accounts. In the

case of fuel card accounts, the system checks the validity of the fuel card and offsets the sales for each fuel card against the advance payments made by

the customer.

 

Travel Management

Travel Management

Technical Data

Technical name of business function FIN_TRAVEL_1

Type of business function Enterprise business function

 Available as of SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2

ECC software component EA-HR 602

ECC application component Travel Management (FI-TV)

Business Intelligence Content Not relevant

SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant

JAVA Software Component Not relevant

Portal Content As of Business Package ESS 602,

Business Package MSS 603 (optional)

Enhancing elements in other SAP applications Not relevant

 Additional business function you need to activate Enterprise Extension Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV)

Use

This business function encompasses the new and extended functions of the Travel Management (FI-TV) component described below.

Integration

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 107 of 148

Page 108: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 108/148

This business function contains a switch, which activates the Business Add-ins (BAdIs) and programs for the new enterprise services (see the section

"Enterprise Services"). If you activate the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system, the BAdIs and programs for the

enterprise services become available.

Prerequisites

You have installed the Business Package for Enterprise Self-Service 1.2.

You have activated the Travel Management Extension(EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.

You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.If you want to use the worklist for approving managers in Manager Self-Service (MSS) of SAP NetWeaver Portal, you also need to install SAP enhancement

package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0 and Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.3.

Features

Unless indicated otherwise in the details that follow, the new or enhanced functions are available only in the new user interfaces and in Web browsers.

New User Interfaces

SAP NetWeaver Portal

The extended travel management applications in Employee Self-Service (ESS) of SAP NetWeaver Portal are based on Web Dynpro ABAP technology. If you

activate this business function, SAP NetWeaver Portal no longer launches the Web Dynpro Java-based app lications, b ut rather the new Web Dynpro ABAP-

based applications. Employees require new authorization profiles, which are defined in the new standard roles.

For more information, see Web Dynpro ABAP-based Applications in Travel Management.

SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC)

NWBC represents an alternative means of access ing the Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications of Travel Management. Employees can run the same

applications in NWBC as in the SAP NetWeaver Portal, depending on which new standard roles are assigned to the employees. Employees with the new role

Travel Policy Administrator can execute the Customizing applications for managing travel policy.

For more information, see SAP NetWeaver Business Client in Travel Management.

Integration of Travel Requests and Travel Planning

The areas Travel Requests, Travel Planning, and Travel Expenses are fully integrated in the new Web Dynp ro ABAP-based user interface. Employees can copy

the following travel data:

● When creating travel plans, emp loyees can copy data from their travel requests. When employees create a new travel plan, the sys tem displays a list of 

open travel requests, from which employees can copy data to the new travel plan.

● When creating expense reports, employees can copy data from their travel requests and travel plans . When employees create a new expense report, the

system displays a list of open travel requests and travel p lans, from which employees can copy data to the new expense report.

The personal object worklist (POWL) of each user shows the status of the user's trips and expenses, and p rovides emp loyees with quick access to the

subsequent actions that are possible based on that status. For example, once a travel request is approved, the user can create a travel plan.

Integration of Travel Services and Travel Preferences in Travel Requests

In travel requests, you can specify which travel services are required for the following modes of travel (but you cannot reserve or book them here):

● Flight

● Hotel

● Car rental

● Rail

● Other travel services

The system displays the preferences of an employee based on his or her travel profile. At a later date, employees can transfer the data of a travel request to a

travel plan, and book the trip. Alternatively, employees can use the Send PDF function to transmit the travel request in PDF format to a travel agency, which then

books the trip.

Copying of Travel Requests

Employees can copy travel requests. Travel assistants can copy travel requests of one employee for another employee, and edit the new request. (Both

employees need to be on the employee list of the travel assistant.)

Other Travel Services

In travel requests, employees now can specify (but not reserve or book) other travel services, such as ferries or airport shuttles.

Saving of Drafts of User Entries

Employees can temporarily save their entries in the app lications (except when entering travel plans). The system saves the incomplete entries with the status

Open.

Expense Types per Settlement Schema

For each settlement schema (trip schema), you can assign those expense types (travel expense types) that need to be availab le in the respective settlement

schema. If you do not sp ecify any expense types for a settlement schema, then all expense types stored in the system are valid for that settlement schema. You

can use this function, for example, to create a settlement schema for miscellaneous receipts, which enables employees to enter receipts that are not directly

related to a specific trip. These might be expenses for phone costs, office supplies, or promotional gifts on behalf of consultants or sales staff.

This function is also available in SAP GUI.

Advanced Passenger Information

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 108 of 148

Page 109: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 109/148

In travel plans, you can enter additional passenger data for Advanced Passenger Information System (APIS). When a flight is booked, this data is transmitted to

the airlines via a Global Distribution System (GDS). This passenger data is required for entering the U.S.A. (and other countries).

Sarbanes-Oxley Compliance

The following functions ensure audit ability of statutory rules, such as those p rescribed by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act:

● Credit Card Receip ts in Expense Reports

○ You can define in Customizing that employees cannot delete credit card receipts.

○ In expense reports, you can itemize your private expenses as separate receipts, and allocate them to private expense types (for example, for mini-bar use in

hotels). This documents the personal portion of expenses in the system.

● Additional Receipt Information in Expense Reports

When entering expenses, you can specify internal and external participants of an entertainment event in the form of a table under additional receipt

information. You can evaluate this information in reporting.

In Customizing, for each trip provision variant and expense type, you can determine whether employees are required to enter such participants.

These enhancements are also available in SAP GUI.

Use of Scanned Receipts and Adding of Attachments

If you use optical archives for Travel Management, in expense reports you can display receipts that are scanned into the sys tem. When scanned receipts are

allocated to an expense report, the system shows them in the POWLs for employees, travel assistants, and approving managers.

Employees can add attachments to their expense reports (for example, the agenda of a convention). This can be done when creating an expense report or in the

POWL. Attachments are linked to the trip number and can be viewed by travel assistants and app roving managers.

Enhancements for Flight Reservations

New functions for flight reservations are listed below:

● You can determine whether the Amadeus reservation system should apply Value Pricer or Master Pricer in fare-driven flight availab ility queries . You do this

with the MASTERPRICER attribute in table TA20SWITCH.

● The system sorts best-price query results by p rice, but groups different flight combinations that have the same price. Within these groupings, you can

select any combination of outbound and return flights.

● If you have set up a di rect connection to a flight reservation system such as TRAVELfusion (in addition to GDS), the sys tem shows the available flights for 

both reservation systems in the fare-driven flight availability list.

Enhancements in Bookings at Deutsche Bahn (DB)

Train reservations using NVS (Amadeus) have the following new functions:

● You can book tickets for multiple passengers. You can specify whether each individual passenger has a BahnCard. For international trips, you can enter the

age of each passenger, for example, to receive a discount for people under the age of 26.

● You can book tickets, reserve seats, or both.

● When booking a trip, you can request a Bahn-Tix. Then, prior to departure you can pick up the train ticket at any DB ticket machine for intercity rail traffic.

You can identify yourself at DB ticket machines with any of the following:

○ BahnCard

○ Credit card

○ Eurocheque card

○ The order number shown in the booking

Enhancements for Hotel Reservations

You can sort the hotels listed in the availability display according to different criteria such as price, star rating, or distance from an address.

Generic Interface to Rail Portals

 As an alternative to using a global distribution system (GDS) to include rail connections in Travel Planning, you can instead use rail portals for this purpose.

Using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration, Travel Planning provides a generic interface for connections to rail portals. One such connection is the Deutsche

Bahn Corporate Portal (also referred to as Bahn Internet Booking Engine = BIBE).

Generic Interface to Flight Reservation Systems

 As an alternative to using a global distribution system (GDS) to include flights in Travel Planning, you can instead use flight reservation systems for this purpose.

Using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration, Travel Planning provides a generic interface for connections to flight reservation systems. This enables you to book

flights with low-cost carriers (LCC) and Web fare deals on the Internet. Travel Planning displays the offers of flight reservation systems as part of the fare-driven

flight availability list, alongside the offers from a GDS.

Enterprise Services

Report programs and BAdIs (Business Add-ins) are available for the new enterprise services for the following process components:

● Expense and Reimbursement Management

● Travel Management

● Business Data Management

● Personnel Adminis tration

For more information, see HCM, Enterprise Services 01.

 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 109 of 148

Page 110: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 110/148

Travel Management 2 

Technical Data

Technical name of business function   FIN_TRAVEL_2

Type of business function Enterprise business function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical use Human Capital Management

Application component Travel Management (FI-TV)

Directly dependent business function you also need to activate Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1)

This business function encompasses the new and extended functions of the Travel Management (FI-TV) component described below.

This business function improves and simplifies the travel management process for customers who use SAP ERP 6.0 in their back -end system. Most new

features, such as the combined display of flights and rail or express expense sheets, are available with the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface only, which

was introduced with the Travel Management business function (FIN_TRAVEL_1).

The use of this business function provides the following business advantages:

Increased acceptance of the Employee Self-Service (ESS) Trips and Expenses for all bus iness units and employees

Reduced travel expenses through transparency and comparability of flight and rail connections Accelerated entry of travel expenses

Simplified expense report for employees who travel daily or frequently

 Accelerated booking of trips and expense settlement in the event management process of the enterprise

Reduced processing costs for trips in conjunction with meetings and events

 Additional advantages for the public sector 

Travel request and travel expense report also available in ESS

 Automated approval of travel requests and travel plans

Increased transparency of costs for managers

Faster reimbursement of expenses

Improved cash flow

Constraints

Unless indicated otherwise in the details that follow, the new or enhanced functions are available only in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components from the version specified:

Type of Component Component Only needed for the following functions

Software component EA-HR 604 and SAP_HR 604

Portal content Business Package for Employee Self-Service 1.41

SAP Enterprise Services As of EA-HR 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/Travel/Global2

For you to be able to use the business function, the following criteria must be met:

You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.

You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.

You have installed the Business Package for Enterprise Self-Service 1.41.

You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) bus iness function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management 2  (FIN_TRAVEL_2) business function in your back-end sys tem.

If you want to use the Worklist for Approving Managers in Manager Self-Service (MSS) of SAP NetWeaver Portal, you also need to install SAP enhancement 

 package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0  and Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.3.

Features

Travel Requests

You can use the following new features in travel requests:

Travel Mediums and Estimated Costs to Be Approved

In travel requests you can determine the use of individual means of transportation and types of accommodations, thereby explicitly having their use be approved.

Similarly, you can have either the traveler, an administrator, or the system, enter various categories of estimated costs. This approach provides more accurate

information and transparency of costs, enabling approving managers to make qualified decisions when approving travel requests. For more information, see

Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Request Travel Request ESS Travel Mediums and Estimated Costs to Be Approved   .

Standing Approval of Business Trips

In personnel master data, infotype Travel Privileges (IT 0017), you can configure a standing approval of business trips for certain trips for individual employees.

Enhancements for the Public Sector of Germany

Travel requests contain a range of new fields for the public sector of Germany. These include fields for official business (Dienstgeschaeft), different kinds of 

mileage reimbursement, and car pooling.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 110 of 148

Page 111: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 111/148

Display of the Travel Request Form in Travel Expense Manager (Transaction PR05)

In Travel Expense Manager, administrators can display the form for travel requests that have been created, for example, by travelers in the Web Dynpro ABAP-

based user interface. This lets administrators reconcile approved facts with travel expense reimbursement data prior to a trip.

Enhancement of BOR O bject BUS2089

The Business O bject Repository object Employee Trip (BUS2089) is enhanced with additional methods that enable you to control workflows depending on the

means of transportation and types of accommodations, or estimated costs. Using the workflow as an aid, approving managers can make decisions about the

relevancy of "significant official interest" without having to go to a different application (public sector Germany only).

Constraints

If you use the new travel request functions, travel requests that have been created in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface cannot be processed in

Travel Manager (transaction TRIP).

Travel Plans

You can use the following new features in travel plans:

Combined D isplay of Flight and Rail Connections

You can configure flight searches so that the system also queries the available rail connections and displays these in a combined display of flight and rail

connections. This improves comparisons with regards to travel expenses and travel times. When searching flights, employees can choose to do a comparison.

Furthermore, you can define that certain routes require the combined display of flights and rail connections.

The combined display of flights and rail connections is supported in the fare-driven flight availability only and requires a connection to the German rail authority

Deutsche Bahn (NVS).

For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Planning   Trip Rules and Profiles  Trip and Class Rules  Trip and Class Rules

for Flights  Flight Trip Rules  Flight Availability Query Control   Define Mandatory Combined Flight/Rail Display   .

Enhancements for Flight Reservations

The following new features are available for flight reservations:

Grid for Displaying Fare Availability in Travel Plans

You can configure the fare-driven flight availability so that the system displays an airfare grid above the available flight combinations. The columns of the grid

show the lowest airfares per provider, and the rows show the lowest fares for nonstop flights, flights with one stopover, and flights with two or more stopovers. In

the grid, users can filter the available connections by c licking the column and row headings or by click ing individual cells.

For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Planning   Process Control   Dialog and Planning Control   Travel Planning 

Control   Define Behavior for Price and Availability Queries  .

Alternative Airports

For the fare-driven flight availability, you can define alternative airports for additional queries. This can be done differently for each destination. For example, you

can define Stuttgart as an alternative airport for Frankfurt for flights within Europe; or you can define Berlin as an alternative airport for overseas flights to the

United States or the Asia-Pacific region.

For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Planning   Trip Rules and Profiles  Trip and Class Rules  Trip and Class Rules

for Flights  Flight Trip Rules  Flight Availability Query Control   Extend Query for Additional Airports  .

Premium Economy Class

Some airlines have introduced a new booking class called "premium economy c lass," which is s ituated between business class and economy c lass. You can

spec ify the routes and the employees for which the premium economy class should be available. Employees can then choose economy class or premium

economy class when selecting flights. This does not app ly to fare-driven flight availability.

You can make the assignments for premium economy class in Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Planning   Master Data  Travel Service

Providers  Flights  Define Exceptions of Airlines for Determining Cabin Class   .

You also can use travel profiles to assign premium authorizations. The Business Add-in (BAdI) required for this is located in Customizing for Travel 

Management  under Travel Planning   Trip Rules and Profiles  Travel Policy   Travel Profiles  Control and Evaluation of Availability Queries  BAdI: Assign

Premium Authorization via Travel Profile  .

Improved Display of Airfare Rate Terms

 After a traveler successfully chooses the flight connections, the Check Selection step lists the following in summarized form:

Taxes/fees

Latest ticketing date (latest date on which the ticket must be issued)

Rebooking fees

Cancellation fees

If you use the Amadeus reservation system with Master Pricer, the flight availability display shows the rate terms per price segment when querying best

prices with price groups.

 A prerequisite for both cases is that the reservation system provides the rate terms in a format that is readable by the system.

Expense Report

You can use the following new features in expense reports:

Express Expense Sheet

This new Web Dynpro ABAP-based app lication simplifies the entry of expenses for employees (for example, sales representatives) who typically travel daily

and settle their expenses once a month, every week, or in other, user-defined intervals. For more information, see Express Expense Sheet.

Enhancement of Expense Reports for the Public Sector of Germany

The Create Expense Report  application is enhanced to accommodate the statutory and industry-specific requirements for the public sector in Germany.

The requirements for the public sector in Germany were already met in the back-end transactions, such as Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05). All

functions needed by casual users are now also available in this application. This includes the public sector requirements at federal and state levels in G ermany.

The application also allows for linking trips to start work and trips to return from work with related separation allowance events.

Externally Created Bar Codes in Travel Expense Data Entry

If you use optical archiving for receipts in expense reports, you also can use bar codes that are created externally (for example, bar codes p reprinted on receipt

envelopes). In this case, the system prompts for the bar c odes when you save an expense report, upon which the employees manually record the bar codes

printed on their receipts. After the save, the system disp lays the recorded bar codes in the expense report under the scanned receipts.

You can set the conditions for recording bar codes through the use of a Business Add-In (BAdI). The BAdI also enables you to assign internally generated bar 

codes to the reference table of the optical archive so that the assignment to the expense report occurs automatically after the receipts and the bar code are

scanned.

For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management  under Business Add-Ins and User Exits in Travel Management   Entry   BAdI: Processing of 

Bar Codes  .

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 111 of 148

Page 112: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 112/148

Adobe PDF Forms

 A new PDF form (PTRV_EES_FORM) exists for Express Expense Sheets. You can use this form to display and print for a configured time period all expense

reports that have saved. New fields have been added to the existing PDF forms for travel requests, travel plans, and travel expense statements/expense reports,

and these forms have been optimized. For more information, see PDF-Based Forms in Travel Management.

Integration of Event Management

The following new features support the integration of Event Management systems with Travel Management systems:

New Service Interface

The Event Management system is able to use a new service interface to read the personnel master data relevant for managing participants from an SAP

system - for example, the personnel master data of employees who belong to a particular cost center. For more information, see SAP Library under

Enterprise SOA  ES for SAP ERP   SAP ERP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0   Enterprise Services for SAP ERP Financials  Travel 

Management   Travel P lanning Arrangement  

New URL Parameters

The Event Management interface of Travel Management is enhanced with a range of new URL parameters. You can use these URL parameters when calling

the Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications of Travel Management for creating travel requests, travel plans, and expense reports to transfer travel data from the

Event Management system. For more information, see URL Parameters for Integration with Event Management.

Travel Management 3 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_TRAVEL_3

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)

Prerequisite Business Function Travel Management 2(FIN_TRAVEL_2)

This business function encompasses the new and extended functions of the Travel Management (FI-TV) component described below.

Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the new or enhanced functions are available in the following user interfaces of Travel Management:

Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications

Transactions in SAP G UIThis business function provides the following bus iness advantages:

New history and automatic saving of versions for travel requests and expense reports

Improves transparency for users (regarding changes that other users, for example travel administrators, have made to their travel requests or expense

reports)

Protects the employee where changes to expense reports have been made that the employee does not accept

Meets the relevant legal requirements

Trip breaks and expense reports for several trips on the same day

 Allows correct reports for several trips on the same day

Meets the relevant legal requirements of German taxation law

Restriction to contributions for business partners of particular industries

Ensures compliance with statutory regulations, for instance the Sarbanes-Ox ley Act

No additional solutions from other providers are required for compliance with statutory regulations

Highlights critical data in the expense report that you can evaluate

Definition of threshold values that determine when users have to submit a paper receipt

Reduces the chances of incorrect settlementEnsures compliance with statutory regulations, for instance the Sarbanes-Ox ley Act

Optimizes back-office operation

Cost comparison between expense reports and the related travel requests or plans

Improves the transparency of additional costs

Reduces the chances of incorrect settlement

Enables evaluations of unplanned costs or adherence to regulations

Country versions for the Czech Republic and Slovakia

Enables the settlement of travel and expenses in the Czech Republic and Slovakia

 Allows the future import of legal changes using Support Packages, which you can download from SAP Service Marketplace.

Is also available in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface

Integration

Integration with third-party online booking systems

If you activate the business functions Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL) and Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL_2), you can use various third-party online bookings systems instead of SAP Travel

Management to book travel services.

Integration with the Shared Services Framework

If you activate the business function Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services (FIN_SSC_TIC_1) you can integrate selected applications of SAP

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 112 of 148

Page 113: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 113/148

Travel Management in your SAP Shared Services environment. This means that users can create service requests starting from these applications.

Integration of budg et periods in the cost assig nment

If you have activated business function PSM, Budget Period 2 (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2) then budget periods are available in all travel management functions that

use cost assignments.

You can control the visibility of fields for the budget period in Customizing of Travel Management  under Employee Self-Services  Interface Configuration for 

the Web Dynpro Interface in Travel Management   Set Up Variable Layout for Account Assignment Objects   .

Enhanced treatment of tax on sales or purchases (value added tax) in expense receipts

You can use this business function to use the enhanced treatment of tax on sales and purchase in expense receipts. Users can enter additional data for the

refund of value added tax (tax on sales/purchases) in the receipts.

This means you can meet, for example, the requirements of the EU directive for the refund of value added tax (COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 2008/9/EC of 12 February 2008 that stipulates detailed rules for t he refund of value added tax provided for in Directive 2006/112/EC, to taxable persons not established in the Member 

State of refund but established in another Member State).

For additional information, see the Entry of VAT Refund Details  function.

Integration into the Employee Self-Service (WDA)

If you activate the business function HCM, ESS with Web Dynpro ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1), you can use the Employee Self-Service (WDA) in SAP NetWeaver 

Portal and SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC) for HTML.

To use the Travel and Expenses Employee Self-Service in SAP NetWeaver Business Client for HTML, assign the role ESS Single Role for Travelers

(SAP_FI_TV_WEB_ESS_TRAVELER) to the users. This role is integrated into the ESS role for Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications

(SAP_EMPLOYEE_ESS_WDA_1).

To use the Travel and Expenses Employee Self-Service in SAP NetWeaver Portal, you require the Business Package for Employee Self-Service (WDA) 1.50.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software Component   EA-HR 605 and SAP_HR 604

Portal Content Business Package for Employee Self-Service

1.41

If you use SAP NetWeaver Portal.

You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.

You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.

You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_2) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management 3 (FIN_TRAVEL_3) business function (this business function) in your back-end system.

Features

New history and archiving of forms

The history has been enhanced, and also logs the following information:

Reimbursement amount

Estimated costs

Number of receipts

If you activate logging of history, the system logs the changes to travel requests and expense reports. Users can display the history in the following user 

interfaces:

Work centers for travelers, travel assistants, and approving managers on the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface of Travel Management

Transactions of the Travel Expense Report in SAP GUI; for example, in the Travel Expense Manager (PR05) or in the Travel Calendar (PR02)

If you have activated logging of history, you also can define that the system should automatically archive the forms for travel requests and expense reports when

certain events occur. For example, when a user changes the data for a travel request or expense report, the system writes a version document (a copy of the

form) to the optical archive. Users can use the history to access the versions.

If you do not activate logging of history, the system logs only the changes made to travel expense reports as it did in earlier releases (see History). In this case,

users can display the change history only in the transactions of the Travel Expense Report in SAP GUI.

You can define when the system archives a version in Customizing of Travel Management  under Travel Expenses  Define History and Archiving   .

You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Adjust Archiving Settings to override or enhance the default settings in Customizing. For more information, see

Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Expenses  BAdI: Adjust Archiving Settings  .

Storage of attachments

You can archive attachments to travel requests and expense reports in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface as Business Documents. This function was

previously only available using Generic Object Services (GO S) in the Travel Expense Manager (PR05).

You can insert a file either as a simple attachment or as a business document. Business documents are different from simple attachments in the following ways:

The system stores business documents in an archive v ia the ArchiveLink. Simple attachments are stored by the system under content category SOFFDB in

the content repository assigned.

Business documents are classified by documentation type, for example as a travel document or as a travel costs receipt. You define the document types in

 ArchiveLink Basic Customizing .

Trip breaks and expense reports for several trips on the same day

Users can insert breaks in their travel requests and expense reports that the system does not include when calculating the flat rates. Users have the option of 

copying trip breaks to create expense reports with daily or weekly return (for example, for a training course). This enables you to correctly reimburse the

employees for several trips on the same day (in compliance with the local taxation laws).

To make it possible to insert trip breaks for a trip schema, you have to set the indicator Multiday Trip in schema and single field control of Travel Management .

You cannotuse the Multiple Trips/Day  function available in previous releases at the same time.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 113 of 148

Page 114: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 114/148

Restriction to contributions to business partners of particular industries

You can track expenses that have been incurred for bus iness p artners of particular industries. In many industries this is mandatory, and must be recorded by the

system.

In Customizing for Travel Management , under Travel Expenses  Dialog and Travel Expenses Control   Dialog Control   Field Control for Additional Receipt 

Information  , you can define that users can select a business partner as participant for a receipt. You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Check If Maximum

 Amount Exceeded for Business Partner  to check whether the costs for a business partner have exceeded a certain amount.

The BAdI ensures compliance with statutory regulations, for instance the Sarbanes-Oxley Act in the USA. Based on these regulations, the entertainment

expenses that a pharmaceutical company pays for business partners that are health care providers should be restricted, for example.

Definition of threshold values that determine when users have to submit a paper receipt

You can define expense-type specific threshold values and so determine when a user has to submit a paper invoice. If a receipt exceeds a threshold value, the

user receives a warning message that informs him he must submit a paper receipt. If the user ignores the warning message, the system inserts a corresponding

comment in the PDF form of the expense report.

The PDF form for the expense report contains a summary of the receipts that cause violations:

Missing paper receipts required

 Amounts exceeding the maximum rate

You can define the threshold values in Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Expenses  Master Data  Travel Expense Types  Define Maximum

Rates and Default Values for Expense Types  . This Customizing activity makes the following new amount types availab le:

Warning message if paper receipt is missing (manual receipt)

Warning message if paper receipt is missing (credit card receipt)

These amount types make it possible for you to define different threshold values for manual receipts and credit card receipts.

You can define the standard settings for the Paper Receipt Exists indicator in the various user interfaces of travel expenses in Customizing of Travel Management 

under Employee Self-Services  Interface Configuration for the Web Dynpro Interface in Travel Management   Define Schema and Individual Field Control   .

Cost assig nment for trip segments and receipts

In the dialog windows for the cost assignment of trip segments and receipts, users can reuse existing cost assignments that they have created for additional

destinations.

Cost comparison

You can activate the cost comparison between expense reports and the related travel requests or plans. When a user saves an expense report, the system

makes the following cost comparisons:

The system compares the total costs of the expense report with the estimated total costs of the related travel request or plan. If an expense report exceeds the

customer-defined maximum difference, the user has to enter a reason. In this case, the PDF form for expense reports displays how much the maximum is

exceeded and the reason of the user.

For a comparison between the expense report and travel plan, the system also compares the receipts with the bookings. If a receipt exceeds the customer-

defined maximum difference, the system issues either a warning or an error message. If there is an error message, the user has to enter a reason. In this case,

the PDF form for expense reports displays how much the maximum is exceeded and the reason of the user.

The cost comparison is available in the following applications:Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05)

Expense Report in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface (but not in the Express Expense Sheet)

You activate the cost comparison in Customizing of Travel Management  under Travel Expenses   Activate Cost Comparisons  . You define the maximum

differences in the following Customizing activities:

Comparison of total costs

In Travel Management  Customizing, under Travel Expenses  Define Maximum Values for Cost Comparisons of Travel Expenses 

Comparison of receipts and bookings

In Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Expenses  Master Data  Travel Expense Types  Define Maximum Rates and Default Values for 

Expense Types 

Entry of trips abroad in the express expense sheet

Users can enter trips abroad in the express expense sheet, providing you have activated this function in Customizing. If a user enters a foreign destination in the

express expense sheet, the system requests the additional information that is required for trips abroad. Users can call the additional information using the More

Details pushbutton. The PDF form for for expense reports displays the additional information for trips abroad.

If you activate the entry of trips abroad in the express expense sheet, you can no longer  use the trip calendar (PR02).

Negative Postings

If you have p ermitted negative postings in Financial Accounting, these are also valid when you reverse travel expenses. In this case a deb it posting reduces the

credit side of the account and a credit posting reduces the debit side of the account. For more information, see Canceling a Trip that has been Posted.

Country versions for the Czech Republic and Slovakia

You can use the country versions for the Czech Republic and Slovakia in the Travel Expense Reports and Expense Reports.

The following trip provision variants are available:

Trip provision variant Country More Information

18 Czech Republic (CZ) Country Version for Czech Republic

31 Slovakia (SK) Country Version for Slovakia

The following new features are available in both of these country versions:Reimbursement of pocket money

Reimbursement for the use of private vehicles

Rounding of currency amounts for cash payments

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 114 of 148

Page 115: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 115/148

Page 116: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 116/148

For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management  under Travel Planning   Master Data  Technical Control Parameters for Travel Planning  

 Access to External Reservation Systems   Access Parameters for External Reservation Systems  BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning   .

Replication of SAP Travel Management Master Data in a Third-Party Online Booking System

You can use the enterprise service Travel Planning Arrangement Out  with service operation TravelPlanningArrangementEmployeeNotification_Out

to provide master data from SAP Travel Management to third-party online booking systems. You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Mapping for 

TravelPlanningArrangementEmployeeNotification to control the mapping of the outbound interface.

This business function includes the example imp lementation PTRM_SE_PROXY_GETTHERE, which adapts the mapping of master data to meet the requirements

of GetThere. You can copy the example implementation and adapt it to meet your requirements.

For more information about this enterprise service, see SAP Library on SAP Help Portal at help.sap.com  SOA  Enterprise Services for SAP ERP 

Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0   Travel Management   Travel Planning Arrangement Out   .

New content for SAP NetWeaver Portal

SAP NetWeaver Portal contains a new page and a new iView, which enables the system to launch an online booking system. The Employee Self-Service role

has been enhanced accordingly.

For technical reasons, the portal content for third-party travel planning resides in the content administration of SAP NetWeaver Portal under Portal Content  

Content Provided by SAP   End User Content   Employee Self-Service  ERP 2005 EhP2   .

Support for Single Sign-On in SAP NetWeaver Portal

Single Sign-On (SSO) is a mechanism that spares users the trouble of entering a password for each system they log on to. With SSO, a user identifies him- or 

herself only once and afterwards can log on to all systems that are part of the SSO environment.

In SAP NetWeaver Portal, the system can use SSO to log on the users of SAP Travel Management automatically to a third-party online booking system.

Before you can use Single Sign-On, you need to provide the public certificate (SAPLogonTicketKeypair-cert.pse) of your SAP NetWeaver Portal for the

third-party travel planning system.

For more information, see Single Sign-On to Non-SAP Sys tems and App lications.

More Information

Third-Party Travel Planning

Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise business function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)

Prerequisite Business Function Travel Management, Third-Party Travel

Planning(FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL)

You can use this business function to use the below-mentioned new functions for travel planning in third-party online booking systems.This business function provides the following bus iness advantages:

Optimization of the travel management process

Reduction of manual interfaces

Constraints

The new features are available only with the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface of SAP Travel Management.

Integration

Integration with GetThere

You can use this business function to use the following functions for integrating the GetThere online booking system by Sabre:

 Additional example imp lementations of the Business Add-In BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning 

Program for synchronizing booking data with the GetThere database

Integration in the approval workflow

Integration with Amadeus e-Travel Management

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 116 of 148

Page 117: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 117/148

You can use this business function to use the following functions for integrating the Amadeus e-Travel Management  online booking system:

 An example imp lementation of the Business Add-In BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning 

Program for synchronizing booking data with the Amadeus e-Travel Management  database

Integration in the approval workflow

Travel assistants can create third-party travel p lans for employees

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions

Software component   EA-HRGxx 605 and SAP_HRGxx 604

Portal content Business Package for Employee Self-Service

1.41 SP 04

If you use SAP NetWeaver Portal.

You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.

You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.

You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated the Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL) business function in your back-end system.

You have activated this Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning 2  (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL_2) business function in your back-end

system.

Features

This business function contains the following new and enhanced features:

Integration in Approval Workflow

You can use SAP Business Workflow WS77900173 to set up an approval workflow for third-party travel plans. This workflow is not activated in the standard

system.

The third-party online booking system must meet the following prerequisites:

For new or changed bookings, the third-party booking system first sets the status to Waiting for Approval  and then awaits approval or rejection from the SAP

system before proceeding with the actual booking.

In Amadeus e-Travel Management , the users to which the status Waiting for Approval  is to apply must be ass igned to a relevant Amadeus e-Travel 

Management Community .

In GetThere, the users to which the status Waiting for Approval  is to apply must be ass igned to a relevant GetThere Site.

For the approval p rocess, you can use the Business Workplace or, in SAP NetWeaver Portal, the universal worklist (UWL) of Manager Self-Service (MSS) with

SAP Business Workflow.

When a user has created or changed a third-party booking, the system does not trigger a workflow until the booking data between the third-party online booking

system and the SAP system has b een synchronized. The booking data can be synchronized as follows:

The user refreshes his or her personal object worklist (POWL) or the travel plan query in the POWL.

The SAP system executes a program for synchronizing the booking data with the database of the third-party online booking system (see the "Synchronizing the

Booking Data" section).

If, upon synchronizing the booking data, the system finds a third-party booking with the status Waiting for Approval , it triggers the workflow for this booking. The

workflow first sends a message to the approving manager.

Once the approving manager has rejected or approved the third-party booking, the SAP system notifies the third-party online booking system (the SAP system

calls the relevant Web service of the third-party online booking system).

If the booking is rejected, the third-party online booking system sets the booking status to Rejected , cancels the booking, and notifies the user.

If the booking is approved, the third-party online booking system sets the booking status to Purchase ( Amadeus e-Travel Management ) or Purchase PNR 

(GetThere), makes the actual booking, and notifies the user.

Synchronizing the Booking Data

You can use the following programs to import new and changed data from third-party online booking systems GetThere and Amadeus e-Travel Management  into

SAP Travel Planning:

Program GET_GETTHERE_PNR for synchronizing booking data with the GetThere database

Booking data must be synchronized because the GetThere Web service (that you use to import new and changed PNR data records) only returns those PNR

data records that have been changed within the last hour.

You can continue to use program GET_SABRE_PNR to synchronize booking data with the Sabre database.

Program GET_ETRAVEL_PNR for synchronizing booking data with the Amadeus e-Travel Management  database

We recommend that you execute the program for synchronizing booking data once an hour.

Travel Assistants Can Create Third-Party Travel Plans for Employees

Users with the Travel Assistant role can create third-party travel plans for employees in their employee list. The prerequisite for this is that you have set up the

third-party online booking system for the travel assistants in the Office Find  (TRVOF) feature.

When a travel assistant calls the third-party online booking system for an employee, the system logs the relevant employee on to the third-party online booking

system. The travel assistant works in the third-party online booking system using the identity of the employee.

If the travel assistant makes changes for an employee in the third-party online booking system, the SAP Travel Planning form displays the name of this travel

assistant as the person who last changed the data.

This function is currently available for Amadeus e-Travel Management  only.

 Recommendation

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 117 of 148

Page 118: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 118/148

Role for SAP NetWeaver Business Client

The new role Traveler  (SAP_FI_TV_WEB_TRAVELER_EXT_TP) enables users to use third-party travel planning in SAP NetWeaver Business Client. The role

has all authorizations of the role Traveler  (SAP_FI_TV_WEB_TRAVELER), with the following exception: When a user with this role in SAP NetWeaver Business

Client starts Travel Planning, SAP NetWeaver Business Client executes a third-party travel p lanning solution, such as GetThere or Amadeus e-Travel 

Management , instead of executing SAP Travel Planning.

Additional Example Implementations

With this business function, the following example implementations of the business add-in BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning 

(PTRM_EXTERNAL_TP_BADI_DEF) are available in the enhancement spot PTRM_EXTERNAL_TP_ENHSPOT:

Example implementation for the third-party online booking system GetThere

Example implementation PTRM_EXTTP_ENHSPOT_GETTHERE_V2 uses newer Web services from GetThere to import the list of new and changed PNR data

records from the GetThere database, and to read individual PNR data records from the GetThere database.

Example implementation for the third-party online booking system Amadeus e-Travel Management 

Example implementation PTRM_EXT_TP_E_TRAVEL illustrates how you can integrate the third-party online booking system Amadeus e-Travel Management .

You can copy the example implementations and adapt them to meet your requirements.

More Information

Third-Party Travel Planning

Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_SSC_TIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Human Capital Management

Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)

Required Business Function Travel Management 3(FIN_TRAVEL_3)

With this business function you can integrate selected applications of SAP Travel Management in your SAP Shared Services environment. Users can createservice requests in these Travel Management applications.

In connection with SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function supports the operation of a Travel Interaction Center (TIC) that runs in

SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) For this, you must have activated business function Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center 

(CRM_SHSVC) in the CRM system.

This business function provides the following business advantages in connection with the Travel Interaction Center:

Optimizes your business processes for trips and expenses

Improves service quality and the efficient resolution of problems

You can perform conventional functions, such as approving trips and further processing by travel administrators, in your shared services environment.

Integration

The service request is available in the following Travel Management applications:

Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications

Expense report

Express expense reportWork center for travelers

Work center for travel assistants

Work center for approving managers

These applications and their dialog windows contain the Service Request  or Create Service Request  pushbuttons, which ERP users can use to create or 

search for service requests.

Transactions in SAP G UI

Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05)

Travel Manager (transaction TRIP)

ERP users can create or find service requests using the menu bar of these transactions under Help  Service Request   .

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 118 of 148

Page 119: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 119/148

Page 120: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 120/148

Technical Name of the Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component ● SAP Dispute Management

(FIN-FSCM-DM)

● SAP Collections Management

(FIN-FSCM-COL)

● SAP Credit Management

(FIN-FSCM-CR)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION)

Note that you do not need this additional business function for all

subfunctions.

Use

You can use this business function to make use of new functions in the following application components of SAP Financial Supply Chain Management:

SAP Dispute Management

This is the focus of the functional enhancement delivered with this business function. You have more flexible options for assigning items and customers to dispute

cases. This makes your dispute case processing more efficient. You can also define dependencies between dispute case attributes and attributes of the

customer line items assigned to the dispute case. You can use the advantages of this improved integration for targeted dunning, for example.

To simplify the daily work of the Dispute Manager, he has the option of simplified user interfaces in the form of a work center.

SAP Collections Management

In receivables processing, you can use the new function of SAP Dispute Management to add customer-disputed objects, such as invoices, to dispute cases.

SAP Credit Management

Here there are enhancements such as improvement of the log display, simulation of the credit check for an individual business partner direct in SAP Credit

Management, and the credit exposure display in the credit horizon. There are additional enterprise services for communicating with information providers.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Only Needed for the Following Features

Software Component ● FINBASIS 602

● SEM_BW 602

 

SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP

NetWeaver BI)

 As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s Enhancements for SAP Credit Management. You

do not have to activate the business function.

Business Intelligence Content As of SAP NetWeaver 20 04s BI Content Add-O n 3

SP06

Enhancements for SAP Credit Management. You

do not have to activate the business function.

SAP NetWeaver Portal As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s ● Work Center of the Dispute Manager 

● Work Center of the Credit Manager 

Portal Content As of Business Package for Dispute Manager  

(SAP ERP) 1.2

Work Center of the Dispute Manager 

Portal Content As of Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP

ERP) 1.2

Work Center of the Credit Manager 

SAP Enterprise Services As of FINBASIS 602, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global

Services for SAP Credit Management

 

To be able to use this business function, the following prerequisites must be met in the individual components:

SAP Dispute Management

● You have configured the following appl ication components:

○ SAP Dispute Management

○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)

● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function.

● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function in the Accounts Receivab le Accounting (FI-AR) system. However,

you do not need this for the work center of the Dispute Manager.

● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Dispute Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business functions.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 120 of 148

Page 121: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 121/148

SAP Collections Management

● You have configured the following appl ication components:

○ SAP Collections Management

○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)

● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function.

● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function in the Accounts Receivab le Accounting (FI-AR) system

● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Collections Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business

functions.

SAP Credit Management

● You have configured the SAP Credit Management application component.

● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function.

Features

This business function covers the following functions:

SAP Dispute Management

Increased flexibility for creating dispute cases

The Customer-Disputed Amount attribute has been added to the dispute case. In the dispute case, you can also display customer-disputed objects under the

linked objects.

You can assign an open or cleared item to any number of dispute cases as customer-disputed object. The customer-disputed amount can correspond to the

amount of the item or you can enter it manually. However, customer-disputed objects do not disp lay the close p rocess integration with Accounts Receivable

 Accounting (FI-AR) as disputed objects do. In particular, in clearing transactions for customer-disputed items there is no change to the customer-disputed amount

in the dispute case.

You can also add a customer to a dispute case without having to assign an item. However, you can still enter a customer-disputed amount.

You can only add customer-disputed objects to a dispute case in individual p rocessing. You can do this in clearing transactions, the line item lis t, individual

document processing, and dispute case processing.

In the clearing transaction, the system recognizes when dispute cases exist for a customer. You can choose whether to add residual items to be created to an

existing dispute case or to create a new dispute case. In the first case, the system displays a prioritized selection list of dispute cases. In a mass processing

function, you can also subsequently assign open items to the existing dispute cases.

 A customer calls before paying an invoice to dispute the invoice - either completely or partly. The responsible clerk in accounts receivab le can create a

dispute case immediately and assign the invoice with the customer-disputed amount as customer-disputed object. Later the customer makes the payment and

deducts the amount as notified. The clerk can assign the residual item that arises to the existing dispute case.

Definition of dependencies between dispute case attributes and attributes of the customer line items assigned to the dispute case.

Changes in a dispute case can trigger changes in the assigned line item. Depending on the status and reason of the dispute case, you can set a dunning block

in the assigned line item and remove it again. The removal can take place after a defined number of days in arrears. When the dispute case receives the status

To Be Collected, the system removes the dunning block again after a number of days.

Work Center for Dispute Manager 

The work center for the Dispute Manager is a portal-based interface to support his daily work. It shows an overview of the dispute cases grouped by predefined

and personalized selection criteria.

 

For more information, see:

● Component SAP Dispute Management for FI-AR (FIN-FSCM-DM):

○ Dispute Case, Linked Objects section (changed)

○ Process Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting (changed)

○ Creating Dispute Cases in Financial Accounting (changed)

○ Creating Dispute Cases from the Document Disp lay (changed)

○ Creating Dispute Cases from the Line Item List (changed)

○ Creating Dispute Cases during Clearing of Open Items  (changed)

○  Assign Customer  (new)

○  Adding Customer-Disputed Objects (new)

○ Removing Ob jects (new)

○ Creation of Proposal for Assignment of Open Items (new)

○ Processing of Proposal for Assignment of Open Items (new)

○ Displaying Dispute Cases from the Document Display and Change (changed)

○ Disp laying Dispute Cases from the Line Item List (changed)

○  Amounts in Disp ute Case, Customer-Disputed Amount section (new)

○ Document Changes from Dispute Cases (New)● Business Package for Dispute Manager (SAP ERP) 1.2 (new)

● Security guide on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/securityguide.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 121 of 148

Page 122: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 122/148

SAP Collections Management

The increased flexibility of SAP Dispute Management on creation of dispute cases is also an advantage in the receivables processing of SAP Collections

Management.

Using the BI Content, the collections specialist can make additional analyses, such as the degree of processing of his work list, or the due dates of his customers.

For more information, see:

● Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL):

○ Invoices (changed)

○ Dispute Cases (changed)

SAP Credit Management

The following enhancements have been realized in SAP Credit Management.

● The log display has been improved to exp lain the calculation of the score.

● In SAP Credit Management, you can perform a simulation of the credit check for an individual business partner. This enables you to check quick ly whether 

the selected check rule leads to the expected results.

● A credit exposure disp lay in the credit horizon has been added to the credit exposure display, based on the check rule ass igned to the business p artner.

This means that you see the credit exposure relevant for the dynamic credit check on the interface.

● You can retrieve updates of external credit monitoring information to update the rating of your business partners.

● You can obtain the ID, which an information provider uses for a business partner, from the information provider electronically .

For more information, see:

● Component SAP Credit Management:

○ External Credit Monitoring Information (New)

○ Search for ID of Business Partner at Information Provider  (New)

 

FSCM Functions 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_FSCM_CCD_2

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage   Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR)

SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)

FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)

This business function is closely linked with business function FSCM Integration 2 in the accounts receivable accounting system. With these two business

functions, you can use functions that contribute to greater flexibility and transparency in the SAP Financial Supply Chain Management components.

To process dispute cases and credit limit requests, Enterprise Services (ES) and Web interfaces are available. If you use several FI systems and a central SAP

Collections Management or SAP Credit Management, then functions are available for replicating customer master data from these FI systems to the business

partner master data of the central system. For the collection of receivables, you can consider the head office/branch office relationships of your customers, and

create targeted worklists.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 122 of 148

Page 123: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 123/148

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   FINBASIS 604

SEM_BW 604

SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP

NetWeaver BI)

 As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 Enhancements for the head office/branch office

relationships in SAP Collections Management*

Bus iness Intelli gence content As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 B I Content Add-On 4 Enhancements for the head office/branch office

relationships in SAP Collections Management*

SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver 

Business Client

 As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 or as of SAP

NetWeaver Business Client for the Business Suite

Web application of SAP Credit Management

Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management

Portal Content Business Package for Credit Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Credit Management

Portal Content Business Package for Dispute Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Dispute Management

SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP NetWeaver 7.01, software component

version FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2

Web application of SAP Credit Management

Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management

SAP Enterprise Services when using SAP

NetWeaver Process Integration

 As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00, software component

version FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2

Customer application for processing credit limit

requests

Customer application for dispute case

processing

SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (UKMS

connection to SAP NetWeaver PI)

You require the following versions:

SAP NetWeaver 7.01 or higher 

SAP NetWeaver 7.11 or higher 

Master data synchronization for connecting

several FI systems to SAP Collections

Management

Master data synchronization for connecting

several FI systems to SAP Credit Management

You do not have to activate the business function for BI content.

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

You have set up the application components that you are using:

SAP Collections Management

SAP Credit Management

SAP Dispute Management

If you use SAP Collections Management or SAP Dispute Management, you have set up Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_2: Business Function FSCM Functions 2 (New)

(FSCM_604_CCD_2_M).

You have activated the following business functions:

FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)

(available bus iness function)FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)

FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)

(in the Accounts Receivable Accountiing sys tem)

Different from the information you can find under FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD), activating business functionFSCM Integration

(FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) is not necessary if you activate the three above business functions.

If you only use the Enterprise Services and the Web interface for credit limit requests and you also have not connected FI-AR to your SAP Credit

Management, you do not need to activate business function FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION).

Features

This business function covers – in connection with business function FSCM Integration 2 – the following functions:

SAP Collections Management

Consideration of Head O ffice/Branch Office Relationships

If you have mapped head office/branch office relationships that exist at your customer in accounts receivable accounting, you can decide whether you want to

take them into consideration in the SAP Collections Management component. In addition to the existing option of creating worklist items for your collection

specialists for each head office, you can create them for each branch office as an alternative. You can distribute the processing of branch offices to several

collection specialists. This enables you to view and collect outstanding receivables for each branch office.

If you use the integration with application component SAP Dispute Management, you can create dispute cases for branch offices direct.

For more information, see Considering Head O ffice/Branch Office Relationships.

Master data synchronization for several FI systems

If you want to use a central SAP Collections Management system to collect receivables from several FI systems, then for the replication of customer master 

data from several FI systems to the central system of SAP Collections Management you can use the connection of Unified Key Mapping Service to SAP

NetWeaver Process Integration (UKMS Connection to SAP NetWeaver PI).

 Caution

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 123 of 148

Page 124: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 124/148

This is also possible even if the number ranges of the customers from the relevant FI systems overlap, so that the customer numbers from a cross-system

view are not unique. In SAP Collections Management the system provides a unique number assignment when creating the business partner. For receivables

processing, it determines the correct assignment between the business partner and the customer in the corresponding FI system.

For more information, see:

Connection to SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm 

Security Guide for SAP Collections Management

SAP Credit Management

Work Center for the Cr edit Manager.

This portal-based interface supports the credit manager in carrying out his job. You can make the Work Center available to your employees either using SAP

NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business Client. It offers an overview of the blocked sales orders from Sales and Distribution (SD). The Credit Manager 

also sees further information from the credit management data of the business partner. This enables him to decide whether to release or reject any particular 

order. The work center also has views of the business partners that are blocked in SAP Credit Management, of business partners that are due for 

resubmission, and of credit limit requests granted.

Web dynpro applications for the credit limit r equest

The Web dynpro ABAP-based applications for creating and changing credit limit requests offer an interface that the credit manager can call up from the Work

Center. A guided procedure takes you through the various steps for creating a credit limit request, and facilitates access even for occasional processors.

For more information, see:

Web dynpro applications for the credit limit request

Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP ERP) 1.4

Enterprise Services for Credit Limit Request

In the process component Credit Management are service operations for creating, changing, reading, and finding credit limit requests. Some of these service

operations are also used in the new Web interfaces for creating and changing credit limit requests.

For additional information, see the documentation for the Enterprise Services (ES) at the ES Workplace.

Master data synchronization for several FI systems

If you want to use a central SAP Credit Management for several FI or SD systems, then for the replication of customer master data from the FI or SD systems to

the central system of SAP Collections Managementand for synchronization, you can use the connection of Unified Key Mapping Service to SAP NetWeaver 

Process Integration (UKMS Connection to SAP NetWeaver PI).

For more information, see:

Connection to SAP NetWeaver Process Integration

Configuration Guide for SAP Credit Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm 

Security Guide for SAP Credit Management

SAP Dispute Management

Web dynpro applications for dis pute case processing

The Web dynpro ABAP-based appl ication for changing dispute cases features a streamlined user interface your employees can access either in SAP

NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business Client. While the regular user processes the dispute case using the existing complete interface, the Web

interface is mainly suitable for the occasional user. As it offers a less complex and streamlined interface with fewer functions, it simp lifies dispute case

processing for the user.

For more information, see:

Web dynpro app lications for dispute case processing

Business Package for Dispute Manager (SAP ERP) 1.4

Enterprise Services for Dispute Case Processing

In the process component Dispute Management are service operations for creating, changing, reading, and finding dispute cases. Some of these service

operations are also used in the new Web interfaces for changing dispute cases.

For additional information, see the documentation for the Enterprise Services (ES) at the ES Workplace.

 Note

 Note

 Note

 Note

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 124 of 148

Page 125: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 125/148

FSCM Functions 3 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_FSCM_CCD_3

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 

Technical Usage   Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component SAP Collections Management 

(FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP Credit Management 

(FIN-FSCM-CR)

SAP Dispute Management 

(FIN-FSCM-DM)

Required Business Function FSCM Functions 2  (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)

With this business function, you can use new functions in various application components of SAP Financial Supply Chain Management :

In SAP Collections Management, you can take into account that a business partner is managed in several collection segments or in several accounting

systems. Using this summary of the outstanding receivables, you can influence their priority in the worklists.

For receivables p rocess ing, you can c reate promises to pay with installments, send correspondence, and create notes at invoice or customer level.

You can now use SAP Credit Management without needing to install a separate server for using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration.

It is easier for you to navigate when forwarding a dispute case from SAP Dispute Management to an external application.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   FINBASIS 605

SEM_BW 605

In addition to both SAP Collections Management  and SAP Dispute Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_3: Business Funct ion FSCM Functions 3 (New).

You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:

FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)

FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

ERP, Integration with Claims and Funds Management (ERP_CF_INTEGRATION_1)You only need this business function for the SAP Dispute Management  functions.

Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions

You only require this business function for WS-RM Support in SAP Credit Management .

Features

This business function covers the following functions:

Aggregation of business partners in SAP Collections Management

You can summarize the data of a business partner that is located in various collection segments. In this way, a collection specialist can gain an overview of all the

worklist items of this business partner. This still applies even if the items are in the worklists of different colleagues, or originate from several accounting systems.

The specialist is consequently better able to make a realistic assessment of the collection of receivables at a customer, and if necessary to centralise it.

For additional information about the individual functions that are available to the collection specialist in his worklist, see Processing Worklist Items.

Individual Functions for Receivables Process ing in SAP Collections Management

To respond to customers who wish to make payment but are experiencing financial bottlenecks, you can create and manage promises to pay also for installment

payments.

To facilitate your correspondence, you can send documents such as account statements, OI lis ts and individual letters during receivables processing. This also

applies to individual dunning notices. Once you have documented a customer contact, you can send the customer a summary by e-mail. You can create notes,

and decide whether you want to assign them to the customer or to an invoice. If you have customers with large numbers of invoices, or if several collection

spec ialists are involved, the ability to make specific assignments of notes makes further processing easier. You can also enter documents as an attachment at

various points, for example, to supplement a note or resubmission.

These functions are closely related to the FSCM Integration 3 bus iness function in the Accounts Receivable (FI-AR) system.

For more information, see:

Invoices (enhanced)

Promises to Pay (enhanced)

Create Promises to Pay (enhanced)

Updating Incoming Payments in Promises to Pay  (enhanced)

Canceling Payments  (enhanced)Evaluating Promises to Pay (enhanced)

Customer Contacts  (enhanced)

Resubmissions  (enhanced)

Notes (new)

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 125 of 148

Page 126: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 126/148

Deletion of Notes (new)

WS-RM Support in SAP Credit Management

You can use SAP Credit Management  without needing to install a separate server for using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration. This option is available not just

in a one system landscape but also if you are using central SAP Credit Management  in a multiple system landscape, in which there is a separate system for 

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA) or several separate systems for Accounts Receivable Accounting  (FI-AR). The messages are exchanged

using the Web Services Reliable Messaging (WS-RM) log that ensures both the transfer of messages and that they are received in the correct order. The use of 

this technology enables simplified message exchange in particular for smaller companies with one or very few systems. The option of a point to point connection

for asynchronous enterprise services is available for the following operations:

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global/CreditCommitmentNotification_In

http://sap.com/xi/PI/FIN/Operational/Global/CreditCommitmentNotification_Out

http://sap.com/xi/FICA/Global/CreditCommitmentNotification_Out

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global/CreditPaymentBehaviourSummaryNotification_In

http://sap.com/xi/FICA/Global/CreditPaymentBehaviourSummaryNotification_Out

http://sap.com/xi/PI/FIN/Operational/Global/CreditPaymentBehaviourSummaryNotification_Out

http://sap.com/xi/FICA/Global/CreditWorthinessChangeInformation_In

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global/CreditWorthinessChangeInformation_Out

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/FICARatingReplicateQuery_In

http://sap.com/xi/FICA/FICARatingReplicateQuery_Out

http://sap.com/xi/FICA/FICARatingReplicateResponse_In

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/FICARatingReplicateResponse_Out

It is not necessary to activate business function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3) for this function.

Enterprise Services for SAP Credit Management

For integration with Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA), the following new service operation is available which you can use to request the data

for the payment behavior:

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2/CreditManagementAccountERPPaymentBehaviourSummaryByDebtorPartyQueryResponse_Out. For 

additional information, see the documentation for the Enterprise Services (ES) at the ES Workplace.

Further, you can use the simplified transfer and display of the data for the payment behavior.

Credit Exposure Comparison in SAP Credit Management

You can compare the credit exposure between a sending system (FI-AR system, SD system) and the receiving system of SAP Credit Management , and

thereby recognize discrepancies early.

For more information, see:Documentation of program UKM_MASSDATA_RECONCILE. From the SAP Easy Access sc reen, choose  Accounting   Financial Supply Chain Management  

Credit Management   List Displays  Reconciliation of Credit Exposure  .

Monitoring of the Credit Exp osure (new)

Forwarding a Dispute Case from SAP Dispute Management to an External Application

To date it was only possible to transfer a dispute case to an external application using program UDM_PUBLISH_DISPUTE_CASES. There is now also a

pushbutton available in dispute case management. If the external application Claims Management  in SAP Customer Relationship Management  is active, you

can also navigate using a second pushbutton first to Claim Submission, and from there to Claim to process the claim.

 FSCM IntegrationTechnical Data

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 126 of 148

Page 127: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 127/148

Technical Name of the Business Function FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Supply Chain Mgmt

Application Component ● SAP Bank Relationship Management

(FIN-FSCM-BNK)

● SAP Cash Management

(FIN-FSCM-CLM-CM)

● SAP Collections Management

(FIN-FSCM-COL)

● SAP Credit Management

(FIN-FSCM-CR)

● SAP Dispute Management

(FIN-FSCM-DM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)

Note that you do not need this additional business function for all

subfunctions.

Use

You can use this business function to make use of new functions in the following components of SAP Financial Supply Chain Management:

● SAP Bank Relationship Management

This new component supports you in monitoring and releasing payment media in payment transactions with banks.

● SAP Cash Management

To simplify the daily work of the Cash Manager, he has the option of simplified user interfaces in the form of a work center.

● SAP Collections Management

In receivables processing, you can use the new function of SAP Dispute Management to add customer-disputed objects, such as invoices, to dispute

cases.

● SAP Credit Management

You can use enhancements, such as the work center for the credit manager.

● SAP Dispute Management

You can use brand new functions, such as the processing of customer-disputed objects. Customer-disputed objects are invoices, credit memos or 

overpayments for which a customer has entered a complaint.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Only Needed for the Following Features

Software Component ● FINBASIS 602

● SAP_APPL 602

● SEM_BW 602

 

SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP

NetWeaver BI)

 As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s Enhancements for SAP Collections Management.

You do not have to activate the business function.

Business Intelligence Content As of SAP NetWeaver 20 04s BI Content Add-O n 3

SP06

Enhancements for SAP Collections Management.

You do not have to activate the business function.

SAP NetWeaver Portal As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s● Work Center of the Cash Manager ● Work Center of the Credit Manager 

Portal Content As of Business Package for Cash Manager (SAP

ERP) 1.2

Work Center of the Cash Manager 

Portal Content As of Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP

ERP) 1.2

Work Center of the Credit Manager 

SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP_APPL 602, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2

 

Services of SAP Bank Relationship Management

SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP_APPL 602, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/PI/FIN/Operational/Global

Services for SAP Credit Management

Java Software Component SWIFT 602 as component of SAP Integration

Package for SWIFT

SAP Bank Relationship Management

 

To be able to use this business function, the following prerequisites must be met in the individual components:

SAP Bank Relationship Management

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 127 of 148

Page 128: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 128/148

● You have configured the SAP Bank Relationship Management application component.

● You have configured the Payment Medium Workbench.

● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.

● You have made the required settings in Customizing. For more information see the release note FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION: Bank Relationship Management

(new).

SAP Cash Management

● You have configured the SAP Cash Management application component.

● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.

SAP Collections Management

● You have configured the following appl ication components:

○ SAP Collections Management

○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)

● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.

● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) business function in the Collections Management system

● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Collections Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business

functions.

SAP Credit Management

● You have configured the following appl ication components:

○ SAP Credit Management

○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)

● To use the work center for the Credit Manager, you have activated this bus iness function FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION).

● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) business function in the SAP Credit Management system

SAP Dispute Management

● You have configured the following appl ication components:

○ SAP Dispute Management

○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)

● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.

● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function in the dispute case processing system.

● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Dispute Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business functions.

Features

This business function covers the following functions:

● SAP Bank Relationship Management

This new component supports you in payment transactions with your banks. For communication with the different interfaces of the banks, the component

provides a uniform user interface.

SAP Bank Relationship Management provides you with a workflow for the internal creation, processing, and release of payments. It also provides a

monitoring function for the status of the payments; the incoming account statements are also considered. To do this, SAP Bank Relationship Management

uses the exis ting Payment Medium Workbench and has a high integration with the payment programs of Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable

 Accounting (FI-AP/AR).

For more information, see:

○ Documentation of the component SAP Bank Relationship Management

○ Component Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Accounting (FI-AP/AR) under Payment Medium Workbench

○ Security guide on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/securityguide.

● SAP Cash Management

For more information for the work center of the Cash Manager, see Business Package for Cash Manager (SAP ERP) 1.2.

● SAP Collections Management

For more information, see the Documentation of the business function FSCM Functions(FIN-FSCM-CCD), "Features" section.

● SAP Credit Management

There is also a work center for SAP Credit Management. The work center for the Credit Manager is a portal-based interface that supports his daily work. It

offers an overview of the blocked sales orders from Sales and Distribution (SD). The Credit Manager also sees further information from the credit management

data of the business partner. This enables him to decide whether to release or reject any particular order. The work center also has views of the business

partners that are blocked in SAP Credit Management, of business partners that are due for resubmission, and of credit limit requests granted.

For more information about the work center, see:

○ Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP ERP) 1.2 (new)

○ Security guide on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/securityguide.

● SAP Dispute Management

For more information, see the Documentation of the business function FSCM Functions(FIN_FSCM_CCD), "Features" section.

 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 128 of 148

Page 129: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 129/148

FSCM Integration 2 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage   Financial Supply Chain Mgmt

Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR)

SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)

FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)

This business function is closely linked with business function FSCM Functions 2 in the SAP Financial Supply Chain Management system. With these two

business functions, you can use functions that contribute to greater flexibility and transparency in the SAP Financial Supply Chain Management components.

To process dispute cases and credit limit requests, Enterprise Services (ES) and Web interfaces are available. If you use several FI systems and a central SAP

Collections Management or SAP Credit Management, then functions are available for replicating customer master data from these FI systems to the business

partner master data of the central system. For the collection of receivables, you can consider the head office/branch office relationships of your customers, and

create targeted worklists.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   FINBASIS 604

SAP_APPL 604

SEM_BW 604

SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP

NetWeaver BI)

 As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 Enhancements for the head office/branch office

relationships in SAP Collections Management*

Bus iness Intelli gence content As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 B I Content Add-On 4 Enhancements for the head office/branch office

relationships in SAP Collections Management*

SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver 

Business Client

 As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 or as of SAP

NetWeaver Business Client for the Business Suite

Web application of SAP Credit Management

Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management

Portal Content Business Package for Credit Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Credit Management

Portal Content Business Package for Dispute Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Dispute Management

SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP NetWeaver 7.01, software component

version FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2

Web application of SAP Credit Management

Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management

SAP Enterprise Services when using SAP

NetWeaver Process Integration

 As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00, software component

version FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2

Customer application for processing credit limit

requests

Customer application for dispute case

processing

SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (UKMS

connection to SAP NetWeaver PI)

You require the following versions:

SAP NetWeaver 7.01 or higher 

SAP NetWeaver 7.11 or higher 

Master data synchronization for connecting

several FI systems to SAP Collections

Management

Master data synchronization for connecting

several FI systems to SAP Credit Management

*Activating the business function is not required for BI content.

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

You have set up Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION: Business Function FSCM Integration 2 (New)

(FSCM_604_INTEGRAT2_M).

You have activated the following business functions:

FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)

(available bus iness function)

FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)

(in the SAP Financial Supp ly Chain Management system)

FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)

(in the SAP Financial Supp ly Chain Management system)

 Caution

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 129 of 148

Page 130: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 130/148

Different from the information you can find under FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD), activating business functionFSCM Integration

(FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) is not necessary if you activate the three above business functions.

If you only use the Enterprise Services and the Web interface for credit limit requests and you also have not connected FI-AR to your SAP Credit

Management, you do not need to activate business function FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION).

Features

For more information about the functions of this business function – in conjunction with business function FSCM Functions 2 – see FSCM Functions 2.

FSCM Integration 3 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 

Technical Usage   Financial Supply Chain Mgmt

Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)

Required Business Function FSCM Integration 2  (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)

FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)

This business function is closely linked with bus iness function FSCM Functions 3 of the system in which SAP Collections Management  is running. With these

two business functions, you can use the following functions for receivables processing:

Promises to pay with installments

Correspondence

Notes

PrerequisitesYou have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only

Software Component   FINBASIS 605

SAP_APPL 605

SEM_BW 605

In addition to SAP Collections Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting  (FI-AR).

You have made the required settings in Customizing for the application components that you are using. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_3: Business Funct ion FSCM Functions 3 (New).

You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:

FSCM Integration 2

FSCM Functions 3 (in the system in which SAP Collections Management  is running)

Features

For more information about the functions of this business function – in conjunction with business function FSCM Functions 3 – see FSCM Functions 3.

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services 

Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 130 of 148

Page 131: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 131/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 

Technical Usage   Strategic Enterprise Mgmt

Application Component SAP Collections Management  (FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP Dispute Management  (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Required Business Function FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_SSC_AIC_1)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC)

You can use this business function to use new functions for the integration of SAP Collections Management , SAP Dispute Management  and Accounting 

Interaction Center  that run in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). This business function is, therefore, closely connected to the Multifunctional 

Shared Service Interaction Center  business function in the CRM system. In the  Accounting Interaction Center , the following work centers are available that you

can use for processing Financial Shared Services in your company:

My worklist  (Integration with SAP Collections Management )

 All worklists  (Integration with SAP Collections Management )

Receivables processing  (Integration with SAP Collections Management )

Dispute case processing  (Integration with SAP Dispute Management )

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   FINBASIS 605

SEM_BW 605

SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP 

NetWeaver 7.0 , software component version

FINBASIS 604, namespace

http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2

Web application of SAP Dispute Management 

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

You are using the Accounting Interaction Center  of SAP CRM  in your company to implement Financial Shared Services. You are using at least SAP 

Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0  for this.

In addition to both SAP Collections Management  and SAP Dispute Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) in SAP ERP .

Software component FINBASIS is either in the same system as software component SAP_APPL or software component BBPCRM.

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FSCM, Enablement for FSS (New).

You have activated the following business functions:

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (this business function)

FSCM Functions 3

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (in the FI-AR sys tem)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (in the CRM system)

For additional information on this business function, see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP 

CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)   Business Functions for 

SAP Customer Relationship Management   Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center   .

Features

 A user-friendly Web interface with integrated telephone is available to the AIC agent in the Accounting Interaction Center  that supports him in the collection of 

outstanding receivables and the resolution of dispute cases. He can easily navigate to the connected ERP systems, and access the required data.

For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  – see the SAP Library on SAP 

Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Interaction Center   Interaction Center 

WebClient   Shared Services Framework   Integration with SAP ERP   .

FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 131 of 148

Page 132: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 132/148

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_SSC_AIC_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage   Central Applications

Application Component Controlling (CO)

Financial Accounting (FI)

SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)

SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)

Required Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

You can use the this business function to enable use of the Shared Services Framework functions, that are available cross-component in multiple SAP

applications.

In connection with SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function in particular optimizes the setting up and operation of an Accounting

Interaction Center (AIC) that runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It is therefore closely linked to the Multifunctional Shared Service

Interaction Center  business function in the SAP CRM system.

Using this business function offers the following business advantages:

Reduced processing times for service requests and the resultant potential for savings

Integration of Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) in the Shared Services Framework

 AIC agents can process large numbers of service requests in the AIC user interface, due to direct access to business objects in ERP systems.

Reduction in the number of errors when processing service requests

Enhanced quality of service

With this business function, you can use the following functions in the Shared Services Framework:

Manual creation of service requests from an ERP system

Search for service requests from an ERP system

Start ERP transactions from the Interaction Center 

Link ERP objects with service requests

Integration of SAP Collections Management with the Accounting Interaction Center 

Integration of SAP Dispute Management with the Accounting Interaction Center 

Irrespective of whether you use the Share Services Framework, this business function provides you with the option of connecting non-SAP systems and various

SAP systems to SAP Collections Management.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   EA-APPL 605SAP_APPL 605

Software Component   BBPCRM 701 Integration with the AIC

Software Component   FINBASIS 605 * Integration of SAP Collections Management and

SAP Dispute Management with the AIC

Software Component   FINBASIS 604 * Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP

systems to SAP Collections Management

* Software component, in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management run

You have set up the application components that you are using.

You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this

business function, see the related release note FIN_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FI , Enablement for FSS (New) (FIN_605_AIC_1_M).

You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:

FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)

Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  (CRM_SHSVC) in the system in which CRM runs.

You need this business function to integrate with the AIC. For additional information on this business function , see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP

Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm   SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Business Functions (SAP 

Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0)  Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management   Multifunctional Shared Service

Interaction Center   .

FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1) in the system in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute

Management run.

You require this business function if you use the integration of these two applications with the AIC.

The following prerequisites must be met for the users:

So that ERP users can create and find service requests from the ERP system, they must have a user with the same name in the CRM system, to which the

business role Occasional User  (SSF_OCCUSER) is assigned.

So that AIC agents can call ERP transactions from the AIC and link ERP objects with service requests, they must have a user with the same name in the

ERP systems, to which the roles are assigned that authorize then to execute ERP transactions (transaction PFCG).

Features

Manual cr eation of service req uests from an ERP system

Service requests are used for quick reporting and resolution of problems and errors. Consequently, you can create a service request in the transactions for 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 132 of 148

Page 133: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 133/148

Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) direct, for example in the Change Vendor  (FK02) or Display General Ledger Documents (FV53) transactions.

When you create a service request, the system opens it in the SAP CRM Interaction Center direct. It transfers contextual data, and gives you the option of 

enclosing a screenshot. Moreover, you can link various ERP objects, for example, the vendor master record or the document.

The AIC agent in turn can later call up the linked objects by navigating direct from the service request to the ERP system.

Search for service r equests from an ERP system

In addition to the option of creating service requests direct from an ERP system, you can search for services requests. You can check their status and update the

service requests, without an AIC employee having to be active. You can choose whether you want to see only those service requests that have been created in

the ERP system in the UI of SAP CRM, or whether you want to see all of the service requests irrespective of where they were created.

Support for launching ERP transactions from the AIC

When you start an FI or CO transaction from the AIC, the ERP system calls a search screen, making it easier for the AIC agents to access the required data

records. The search screen already contains the data that is known from the account identification in the AIC (customer/vendor and company code).

Enhanced Generic O bject Services for linking ERP objects with service requests.

In many FI and CO transactions in the ERP system you can link individual business objects with a service request in the AIC, for example, the master data of a

customer or vendor, using Generic Object Services (GOS). AIC agents can use this link to start the transaction with the ERP object in the ERP system from a

service request.

Generic Object Services for linking ERP objects with service requests in the AIC are only available if an AIC agent has started the ERP transaction from the AIC,

and the account in the AIC has been identified and confirmed. If at the point when the ERP transaction was started from the AIC a service request had been

opened in the AIC, the system inserts the link in the business context of the service request. If no service request had been opened in the AIC, the system

inserts the link in the interaction records of the accounts currently confirmed in the AIC.

Fact Sheet for Customer and Vendor 

The Accounting Interaction Center contains the account fact sheet that is used in financial scenarios as a support tool for communication with partners. It provides

context-related information about the communication partner, where the partner can be a customer or a vendor.

The fact sheet for the customer contains information about the special business context that ranges from purchasing volumes to the latest dispute cases for the

customer. The AIC agent is therefore able to access a complete picture of the current and past relationship with the communication partner in his daily work.

The fact sheet for the vendor contains data such as open invoices, payments, and master data. It assists the AIC agent in giving informed replies to inquiries from

the vendor.

Search for External Documents

The Accounting Interaction Center employee must be in a position to access information about the communication with the customer to date that is as complete as

possible. This includes documents that are stored in the optical archive.

The Find Document  function of the CRM user interface gives the AIC agent the option of searching from one place for documents relevant to a business partner in

a series of back-end systems, and of displaying them if necessary.

Roles

Both accounting clerks from various SAP ERP applications and agents from the SAP CRM Interaction Center are involved in the Shared Services Framework

processes. All of those involved have to navigate between various SAP systems. Such navigation is supported by the following new roles:

Occasional User  (SSF_OCCUSER)

This business role allows ERP users to create service requests from ERP systems, and to search for service requests.

 Accounting IC Agent  (IC_AIC_AGENT)

With this business role, agents in the AIC can process service requests from Financial Accounting and Controlling, execute the appropriate ERP transactions,

and link ERP objects with service requests.

 AIC Manager  (AIC_MANAGER)

 AIC managers are IC managers who have the additional option of linking particular categories of service requests with particular categories of dispute cases.

Based on this, AIC managers can have particular dispute cases created automatically.

For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center  – see the SAP Library on

SAP Help Portal  under http://help.sap.com/crm  SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1   Application Help  Interaction Center   Interaction

Center WebClient   Shared Services Framework   Integration with SAP ERP   .

Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP systems to SAP Collections Management

This function increases the range of accounting systems the data of which you can access with SAP Collections Management. You set up the connection with the

help of a substitute system that you connect to SAP Collections Management, and to which you transfer the required master and transaction data. In this way you

can centralize and standardize the processes for collecting open receivables, irrespective of the system architecture used in your company. In the standard

system, the sample loading procedureSAP_46C is available for an SAP system with Release SAP R/3 4.6C.

Without this business function you can only connect SAP systems where Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) has at least the status SAP R/3 Enterprise

4.70.

For more information, see:Connection of Non-SAP Systems and Various SAP Systems

Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm 

 Note

 Note

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 133 of 148

Page 134: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 134/148

Page 135: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 135/148

 SAP Biller Direct Buy Side

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_BD

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

 Available as of SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Biller Direct - FSCM

 App lication Component SAP Biller Direct (FIN_FSCM_BD)

Directly Dependant Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition SAP Biller Direct (FIN_FSCM_BD)

Use

You can use this business function to enable your vendors, within SAP Biller Direct Buy Side, to upload bills via your portal, and then monitor the corresponding

account movements there.

 Additional functions are available to the Web users of SAP Biller Direct.

Prerequisites

To be able to use the enhanced functions of SAP Biller Direct, you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting  (FI-AR) or Contract Accounts Receivable and

Payable (FI-CA) in connection with an industry business solution.

To be ab le to use SAP Biller Direct Buy Side you are using Accounts Payable Accounting (FI-AP).

You activated the FIN_FSCM_BD (SAP Biller D irect) business function.

You have made the system settings as described in the Configuration Guide for SAP B iller Direct for FI-CA, SAP Biller Direct for FI-AR and SAP Biller 

Direct Buy Side.

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-APPL 602

SAP_APPL 602

 

Technical Component or Business Content As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3

Support Package 06 

 

Features

SAP Biller Direct Buy Side

The following functions are available to vendors within SAP Biller Direct Buy Side.

· Upload of bills i n XML format (optional) with attached documents in the portal

Depending on how you have configured accounts payable accounting (FI-AP) in the back-end system, the bills are either posted there direct or first parked.

· Disp lay of open bills in the portal

· Portal disp lay of payments made by the customer 

SAP Biller Direct

You can connect SAP Biller D irect to various back-end systems and therefore display b ills from different SAP back -end systems to your Web users.

Moreover, as biller you can follow the behavior of your Web users in a monitoring cockpit in Business Intelligence (BI).

With SAP Biller Direct Web users can:

· Use a new layout with navigation tree on the left side of the screen in addition to the existing layout with navigation using tab pages and a header bar.

· Keep a clear overview by restricting the number of items shown in the Web appli cation under Open Items, Paid Bills , Payments and Credits.

· Make working with long lists easier, by filtering items on the tab pages O pen Items, Paid Bills, Payments and Credits us ing various selection parameters.

· Download other archived documents, such as exp ense reports, as a PDF from the optical archive, and not just bills .

· Display s tatus information, such as last logon, latest payments and latest master data change.

 

Biller Direct, Promise to Pay 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 135 of 148

Page 136: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 136/148

Page 137: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 137/148

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component SAP_APPL 605

BBPCRM 70 1

SAP_BS_FND 702

Features

Invoice Status

On the Open Bills page of the SAP Biller Direct Buy Side portal, there is a new column in the open invoices list which shows information on the status of each

invoice. The values displayed in this column are customizable and are based on the payment blocking status or posting status (posted, parked) of the FI

document concerned.

In addition, there is a new text field in the header area of the same page. This text field displays more general information on your accounts payable procedure and

is customizable per company code. A typical entry in this field could read 'We pay b ills on the last Thursday of each month'.

By displaying this information to vendors, you improve clarity and reduce the need for invoice-related inquiries.

Inquiries by Vendors

Vendors have two options for creating inquiries. In the first instance, on the Inquiries tab page of the SAP Biller Direct Buy Side portal, a vendor can create an

inquiry directly, without reference to a particular invoice. A customizable dropdown menu gives a list of predefined reasons for the inquiry. After assigning their 

inquiry to one of these, the vendor can insert text in the Comment  field and then send the inquiry. Once they have created an inquiry, a vendor can return to this

page to check the status of the inquiry over time, or to add additional comments.

 A vendor can also create an invoice-related inquiry from the Open Bills tab page by selecting an invoice from the list of open bi lls and then click ing Create

Inquiry .

In both cases, the inquiry automatically initiates a service request in the CRM system, where it can be dealt with by an operative in your Shared Service Center.

Billing Consolidation Connector  

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_BCONS_CON

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Central App lications

Application Component Billing Consolidation (FIN-FSCM-BC-CON)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

You can use this business function to send outbound messages to SAP Billing Consolidation 2.0 , process inbound messages, and link messages received with

documents and IDoc files. Communication takes place using middleware such as SAP XI / PI  or Transfer Client .

Integration

The processes Post Goods Receipt , Create Delivery  and Create Billing Document  are also involved in the business process.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   SAP_APPL

SAP Enterprise Services As of software component version SAP_APPL

604, Namensraum http://sap.com/xi/APPL/EDX

JAVA software component SAP Java Crpyto Toolkit (J2EE Engine as of  

Release 6.30)

To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:

You have activated the business function.

The necessary certificates have been installed.

The CRL is current.

The connections to the archive and middleware work.

You have made the following Customizing settings for Billing Consolidation Connector .

You have entered all of the partners involved in the business process in the master data.

You have defined the basic settings.

You have defined all inbound and outbound object types.

You have defined the partner profiles.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 137 of 148

Page 138: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 138/148

Page 139: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 139/148

clearing accounts, and table FDSR2 for the planning groups.) These totals record tables are then filled as part of the data regeneration.

See the notes in the documentation for the imp lementation tool. To do this, choose Help Application Help  .

You can also use program RFFDFT604. However, we only recommend this for company codes relevant to Cash Management for which no settings were

made under Determine Account Assignments and Document Splitting. This is because the program only transfers the data from the old totals records

tables to the new ones, and the fields for the new account assignnments are not filled.

Distributed SAP Cash ManagementIf you are using distributed Cash Management (TR-CM link), all the systems need to be transferred to the central Treasury and Risk Management system.

Features

You can then assign the new account assignments when you create payment advice notes and noted items by choosing Cash Management   Incomings

Memo Record   Create  (transaction FF63) and Extras   Addtional Account Ass ignments.

The account assignments are not transferred to Cash Management from all the applications. The account assignments segment  and profit center  are not

transferred for purchase orders and purchase requisitions, for example.

Make sure that any account assignments not relevant to SAP Cash Management are not set as required entries in the planning type field status

definition, since the fields would not be displayed. To check this, choose Cash Management   Structuring   Manual Planning   Define Planning Types 

.

Update to SAP Cash Management

The totals records are now stored in the new totals record tables. All the account assignments not relevant to Cash Management are deleted.

Document Splitting

If you are using New General Ledger Accounting and have activated document splitting, you can also specify for the relevant account assignments that

document spl itting should be included in SAP Cash Management.

This means that when the Financial Accounting documents are updated to Cash Management, the document data is written to the totals records tables (FDSB2

and FDSR2) and the adjustment items from document splitting are copied to table FDSP. The adjustment items explain the additional entries in both totals

records tables .

Document splitting is used to split a document of EUR 100.00 into the segments SG1 EUR 70.00 and SG2 EUR 30.00. The following entries are made in

the tables:

Table Segment Planned Amount (FDWBT)

1 BSEG 100,00

Table View (Field CMVIEW) Segment Planned Amount (FDWBT)

2 FDSB2 Space = Entry View 100,00

3 FDSB2 1= Reset Entry View 100,00–

4 FDSB2 2 = Document Splitting

View (General Ledger View)

SG1 70,00

5 FDSB2 2 = Document Splitting

View (General Ledger View)

SG2 30,00

6 FDSP 1 = Reset Entry View 100,00–

7 FDSP 2 = Document Splitting

View (General Ledger View)

SG1 70,00

8 FDSP 2 = Document Splitting

View (General Ledger View)

SG2 30,00

1. The FI line item is posted in FI with an amount of EUR 100 .00.

2. The Cash Management totals record is updated.

3. When the document sp litting is updated, the totals record is reset from 2.

4. The first totals record is based on the document sp litting.

5. The second totals record is based on the document splitting.

6. Cash Managment adjustment items for 3:

7. Cash Managment adjustment items for 4:

8. Cash Managment adjustment items for 5:

The accumulated CM adjustment items must be zero or approximately zero when rounded.

The new Entry View  parameter is now available for the cash position and liquidity forecast. If the parameter is set, the system displays the Cash

Management update without document splitting. This means that the only lines read from the totals record tables are those that are empty (space = entry

view) in the field view CMVIEW.

For open item accounts, the entries in table FDSP are deleted during clearing. If the bank accounts do not have open items, the entries are deleted when

you execute the IMG activity Reorganize Cash Management  under Cash Management   Tools  .

See also: Account Assignments and Document Splitting

 Note

 Note

 Example

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 139 of 148

Page 140: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 140/148

In-House Cash Module Enhancements 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_INHOUSE_CASH_1

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Services

Application Component EA-FINSERV

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Not relevant

With this business function, you can use various new functions in SAP In-House Cash to manage payments and streamline payment processing among

subs idiaries and with external partners. As well as imp roving your credit position, SAP In-House Cash enables you to maximize your interest accrual and c ash

surplus. You also get an overall view of subsidiary and group transactions and can minimize exposure during cash crunches, reduce processing times, and keep

bank transfer and transaction costs to a minimum.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-FINSERV 605

SAP_APPL 605

Features

 A feature for cash concentration reference enables you to maintain a reference between the bank customer account (BCA) payment orders and the In-House

Cash payment orders. When the cash concentration run takes place, two payment orders are created - one from the BCA and another from In-House Cash.

These payment orders are now linked and the details are available in the logs of the In-House Cash payment order.

 A feature for payment order reversal is available. With this feature, you can reverse payment orders for both cross b ank and external payments. On reversing

a cross bank payment order, the reversal of the generated payment order takes place. On reversing an external payment order, if the generated payment

request is cleared then the clearing document and the payment request is also reversed. There is a provision available which lets you enter the reason for 

reversing the payment request and, if available, the clearing document.

You can unblock and post payment orders in bulk. The final posting of the payment order occurs only when confirmation is received from the external bank. The

addition of a dual control checkbox enables you to control the dual control setting when the In-House Cash account limit is exceeded.

 A feature for unblocking and posting payment orders is available. With this feature, the final posting of a payment order happens only after a confirmation on the

clearing is received from the external bank. Payment orders are posted provisionally until an accepted items message is received from the bank, indicating

that the payment has been debited. On receiving the bank statement from the external bank, it is uploaded to determine if the payment for the corresponding

payment order is cleared. If it has been cleared, the particular payment is selected and unblocked so that it can be finally posted.

 A dual control check feature is available. A flag (no dual) is used to prevent the payment order from going into dual control mode automatically when the account

limit exceeds. If the flag is checked, the payment order would fail to post and would not go to into dual control. If the flag is not checked, the payment order would

go to into dual control when the account limit exceeds.

SAP Treasury and Risk Management 

The following business functions are available in the SAP Treasury and Risk Management  area:

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Instrument (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)

TRM, New Instruments, Enhancements Accounting, Reporting (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3)

TM: Integration in Funds Management (FIN_TRM_PSM_INTEGRATION)

Correspondence Framework

TRM, Correspondence Framework (FIN_TRM_CORR_FW)

TRM, Correspondence Framework 2 (FIN_TRM_CORR_FW_2)

Hedge Accounting for Positions (P-HA)

TRM, Hedge Accounting for Positions (FIN_TRM_INS_HM)

TRM, Hedge Accounting for Positions 2, Additional Scenarios (FIN_TRM_INS_HM_2)

TRM, Financial Risk Management for Commodities  (FIN_TRM_COMM_RM)

TRM, Central Counterparty Clearing (Reversible) (FIN_TRM_CCC)

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 140 of 148

Page 141: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 141/148

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New KeyFigures 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Services

Application Component Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Financial Services (EA-FS)

With this business function, you can use various new functions in SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM).

In the Hedge Accounting for Exposures area, the processes for saving and archiving logs for the effectiveness assessments as well as the hedging relationship

documentation have been enhanced. These developments make the process flows more transparent and support auditors with the audit trail.

The new commodities product group has been set up, which, together with the Triple Point front office system, can be used to link the physical side and paper 

deal side of a commodity futures transaction. The integration with the analyzers enables you to run mark-to-market analyses as well as sensitivity analyses for the

commodity paper deals.

You can map the entire life cycle of listed options (normal style) and calculate their net present values using the Market Risk Analyzer .

In the case of money market transactions, you can enter and amortize premiums and discounts.

The determination of relative limits enables you to monitor and adhere to internal as well as external investment guidelines that may be required by insurance

controls.

You can calculate the key figure modified duration and the yield to maturity (actual rate of return) in one portfolio, which enables you to analyze interest

sensitivity.

The Portfolio Analyzer  helps you determine your portfolio risk; the Sharpe ratio and Jensen's alpha help you better assess the quality of your portfolio yield that is

calculated for benchmarking purposes.

New accounting functions help you post intragroup transactions and impairments, and simplify your closing operations.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component   EA-FINSERV 603

SAP_APPL 603

Business Intelligence content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3 SP08 Only required if you want to use the BI Content

delivered with this b usiness function in SAP 

Business Information Warehouse (BW).

You have activated the enterprise extension Financial Services (EA-FS).

You have activated the enterprise business function TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN).

If you are using the Transaction Manager  and have activated the business function, you then need to make the necessary conversion steps in Customizing for 

the Transaction Manager. To do this, choose Treasury and Risk Management   Transaction Manager   General Settings  Tools  Conversion Programs  .

See also: For more information, see the release information FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN: Required and Optional Migration Steps .

For information on activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the release information FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN: TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial 

Products, New Key Figures (New) and FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN:Changes in the Structure of the IMG for TRM .

Features

Enhancements in Hedge Accounting for Exposures

To improve the transparency of the process flows in the Hedge Accounting for Exposures area, you can save effectiveness test logs in the database.

You can utilize your memory resources by archiving the logs.

To hedge a net investment for a foreign subsidiary, you can now also specify a money market transaction as a hedging instrument.

You can now also assign financial transactions to existing exposures.

Two fields added to the hedge plan (Grouping  and Program) enable you to group hedging relationships to suit your requirements.

New Instruments

You can map the following commodity paper deals:

Commodity futures

Options on commodity futures

Commodity forwards

The system supports processing the financial transactions in the back office from the posting stage, to margin management, through to calculating the net

present values in the Market Risk Analyzer . The Analyzer can also execute mark-to market analyses and sensitivity analyses (VaR) for commodities.

Functions available for analyzing commodity paper deals include the net present value analysis (JBRX), key figure analysis (AISGENKF), and single value

analysis (profit and loss) (AISPL).

The agreement with Triple Point, providing a front office system, enables you to link the physical side and paper deal side of a commodity futures transaction.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 141 of 148

Page 142: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 142/148

You can map the entire life cycle of listed options (normal style). You can use the Exercise Rights function to map the exercise with delivery , exercise with

cash settlement, or the expiration for the following option categories:

Options on stocks

Options on bonds

Options on securities indexes

You can also calculate the net present values of these option categories using the Market Risk Analyzer .

When you enter a money market transaction (fixed-term deposit, cash flow transaction, interest rate instrument, Commercial Paper), you can now also use the

Nominal Amount  field. The system uses the difference between the nominal amount and payment amount to generate a premium flow or discount flow. These

premium and discount flows can be amortized. This enables you to easily map loans issued to subsidiary companies that have not been completely

disbursed, for example. The system then posts the correct amortization amount automatically.

Enhanced Limit Reporting

Enhanced limit reporting in the Portfolio Analyzer  enables you to define and monitor relative limits at portfolio level. This means that you can monitor and adhere to

internal as well as external investment guidelines that may be required by insurance controls.

Within the enhanced limit reporting function, you can navigate to individual transactions. You can check the book values and net present values of individual

transactions and also check limit utilization and limit rates on certain key dates. It is also possible to perform a comparative limit analysis in two portfolios. The

results database is used to calculate and save the data.

New Key Figures

In the Market Risk Analyzer, you can use the key figure analysis (AISGENKF) and results database (AFWKF_RA), (the results of which you can view using

the Analyzer Information System), to calculate in a portfolio the new key figures modified duration and yield to maturity (actual rate of return) for interest-bearing

instruments.

The Portfolio Analyzer  helps you determine your portfolio risk by using the following new key figures to help you better calculate the quality of your portfolio yield

for benchmarking p urposes:Sharpe ratio

Jensen's alpha

Treynor ratio

Tracking errors

Information ratio

Sortino ratio

The key figures are calculated with the function Determination of Risk-Adjusted Measures (PAEPBM_RATIO).

New Accounting Functions for Financial Transactions and Positions

Intragroup trading

You can use this new function to view intragroup transactions in the system for financial transactions with the following product categories:

Stocks (010)

Investment certificates (020)

Bonds (040)

Bond with installment repayment (042)

Investment (160)

To ensure that the overall group result is not affected by intragroup transactions, you need to remove the intragroup transactions from the consolidated accounts.

The Edit Intragroup Transactions function clears profits and losses from the sales by generating clearing flows for the intragroup purchases according to the

profits or losses in the corresponding intragroup sale.

Enhancements Impairments

You can post impairments either with or without the reset function.

You can also record an impairment in foreign currency.

When you post impairment, you can choose to reset the foreign exchange results recorded during the OCI (equity) valuation.

You can convert the security impairment using either the foreign market exchange rate or the book exchange rate.

You can amortize an existing impairment.

In the function Market Values for Special Security Valuation you can now also enter an amount for the net present value in valuation currency.

Enhancements made to the foreign currency valuation of available for sale positions.

You can value monetary items of Available for ale (AfS) positions in a foreign currency so that currency translation differences resulting from changes in

amortized costs can be posted to the profit and loss account.

Other changes to the book value are entered in equity.

More Information

In the main release information FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN: Hedge Accounting, New Financial P roducts, New Key Figures and in the detailed release notes, you can

refer to a list of the new and changed functions. For more information on the individual functions, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component

 Accounting   SAP Financial Supply Chain Management (FIN-FSCM)  SAP Treasury and Risk Management (TRM)  .

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Product 

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 142 of 148

Page 143: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 143/148

Technical Data

Technical name of business function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2

Type of business function Enterprise business function

Available as of  SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Services

Application Component SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Financial Services (EA-FS)

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures

(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

With this business function, you can use various new functions in SAP Treasury and Risk Management. New Exposure Management 2.0  enables you to manage

exposure items for both open commodity items and open currency items. In Hedge Accounting for Exposures, you can map the hedging of commodity p rice risks

using the corresponding hedging transactions in the Transaction Manager.

The complete integration with the analyzers enables you to run analyses for both net present value and value at risk for the exposure positions. To meet the

requirements for the hedging relationship effectiveness tests, in accordance with the accounting princip les IAS39 and FAS133 , you can now run retrospective

and prospective effectiveness tests in Hedge Accounting  based on linear regression analyses for exposures, hedged items, and hedging instruments.

You can also use the new product category forward securities transaction, which has been fully integrated in the position management and accounting areas of 

the Transaction Manager.

Integration

You can use forward securities transactions provided with this business function in Hedge Accounting for Positions as a hedging instrument to hedge market

price risks. Hedge Accounting for Positions is provided with the delivered bus iness function TRM, Hedge Accounting for Positions.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-FINSERV 604

SAP_APPL 604

You have activated the following business functions:

Financial Services (EA-FS)

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)

(available bus iness function)

For information on activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2: TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management,

SWIFT (new) and FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2: Exposure Management 2.0 (New).

Features

Hedge and Exposure Management

In the new Exposure Management 2.0  area, you can create currency and commodity positions on which both Hedge Accounting for Exposures and the

analyzers are based. Open commodity items in Exposure Management  can be hedged in Hedge Accounting for Exposures using commodity futures

transactions (commodity futures, options on commodity futures, and commodity forwards) from the Transaction Manager. For the operative exposure items,

you can run analyses for net present value and value at risk in the Market Risk Analyzer .

You can use the regression analysis to run retrospective and prospective effectiveness tests for exposures, hedged items, and hedging instruments. To test

hedging effectiveness, you can calculate the following parameters:

Gradient of the regression lines

 Axis intercept of the regression lines

Coefficient of determination R²

t-Test

F-Test

The life cycle of forward securities transactions, comprising rollover, advance maturity, dividend adjustment, cash settlement, or physical delivery, can b e

continually mapped in the Transaction Manager, and integrated in position management, accounting, and risk management. You can map forward securities

transactions to the following product categories:

Stocks (010)

Investment certificates (020)

Bonds (040)

Investment (160)

To fulfill the P-GAAP requirements for group accounting involving an investment of over 50% in a company, the new position components Value Adjustment of 

Gains1025, Value Adjustment of Losses,1026 and Original Value Adjustment 1027 have been integrated into position management.

To meet the disclosure requirements for financial instruments in accordance with IFRS 7 (as of 1/1/2007), you receive reports that take into account all the

financial transactions and objects in SAP Treasury and Risk Management and the exposure items. These are then evaluated with regard to the market risk.

See also: IFRS 7 – Reporting

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 143 of 148

Page 144: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 144/148

TRM, New Instruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function   FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Services

Application Component SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Product

(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)

With this business function you can use new functionality within the SAP Treasury and Risk Management  which improves efficiency and fulfills legal

requirements in the area of position management and accounting including enhancements in reporting and straight-through processing.

You can map the entire life cycle of the new financial instruments forward loan purchase, fiduciary deposit and total return swap from start to end, icluding master 

data management, valuation, postings and position management and calculate their net present values using the Market Risk Analyzer .

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-FINSERV 605SAP_APPL 605

You have activated the following business functions:

Financial Services (EA-FS)

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Product (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)

TRM, New Instruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3)

(available bus iness function)

For information on activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3: New Instruments, Accounting 

Enhancements, Reporting (new).

Features

This business function covers the following functions:

New Financial Instruments

Management of the financial instruments forward loan purchase, fiduciary deposit and total return swap) from start to end within SAPTreasury and Risk

Management, including master data, valuation, postings, and position management.

Fiduciary Deposit (new product type 570 Fiduciary Deposit)

Fiduciary deposits are equivalent to asset swaps, in that they behave like a credit portfolio with an interest rate swap. The credit portfolio (the pool of assets) is

chosen by the depositor, who bears all its credit risk.

Forward Loan Purchase (new product type 790 Forward Loans)

 A forward loan purchase is an agreement between two counterparties to enter into a loan contract. The loan is not paid out directly after the agreement but at a

later point in time. All the loan ingredients are fixed at the contract closure. Processing related to the new feature begins in  Loans Management  and continues in

the Transaction Manager  of SAP Treasury and Risk Management (TRM). The approach is to build up the derivative (forward contract) in the TRM application

and reuse many functions of the product category 740. The loans contract is built up in the Loans Management  module using existing functions.

Total Return Swap (new product type 640 Total Return Swap)

With this financial instrument, you can swap the total return of a single asset in exchange for periodic cash flows, or you can swap periodic cash flows for the

total return of a single asset. The periodic cash flow is typically a floating rate, such as LIBOR +/- a basis point spread, and a guarantee against any capital

losses. With a total return swap, the total return (cash flows plus capital appreciation or depreciation) is exchanged, and not just the cash flows. This newfinancial instrument allows the counterparties to swap the total return (cash flows plus capital appreciation or depreciation) of an asset or basket of assets in

exchange for periodic cash flows.

Accounting Enhancements

Enhancements in Single Position Management

You can use the portfolio as a new differentiation criterion for single position management.

You can use HIFO/LOFO as new consumption sequence procedure.

With HIFO (highest in, first out), the position that is sold is the one that has highest acquisition value.

With LOFO (lowest in, first out) the position that is sold is the one that has lowest acquisition value.

You can avail of different consumption sequences procedures depending on the business transaction category.

Manual Posting C onsiders Differentiation Criteria

The manual posting function (transaction FWBS) is able to post in securities account management indicating the differentiation criteria that is used for position

differentiation.

Derivation of Additional Account Assignments

During the consolidation process subassignments for certain group financial statement items are required. The subassignments must be delivered at the

posting point in the general ledger. On behalf of the new derivation tool you can fill the following target fields in the FI document with values:

Business Area

Trading partner's business area

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 144 of 148

Page 145: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 145/148

Partner Profit Center 

Profit Center 

Partner Segment for Segmental Reporting

Segment for Segmental Reporting

Movement Type (Inventory Management)

Company ID of trading partner 

Reference key for line item

This derivation tool is called when documents are being posted to FI. During posting the target fields mentioned above will get updated in the FI document

according to the defined derivation steps.

 Year End Valuation with Reset FlowsFor year end valuation you now can opt to have it reset afterwards.

Retrospective SAC Amortization Method for MBS according to FASB91

This method is based on the cash flows with estimated prepayments embedded in those cash flows. Using the actual prepayments from the date of acquisition

to the reporting date and the expected future prepayments from the reporting date onward, a new effective yield is calculated from the date of acquisition. The

amortized acquisition value is adjusted to the amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied since acquisition. The difference

between the new amortized acquisition value and the actual amortized acquisition value is debited or credited to interest income.

Separating Posting and Paying

Simplifies and enhances the process of payments in SAP Treasury and Risk Management  by enabling payments without posting the deal. It is possible to

post a flow without paying and vice versa. By separating the payment step from the posting step, you can initiate the payment first and the posting later,

enabling you to make urgent payments from financial transactions. When you want to see only the flows which are paid, you can use the new payment journal

(transaction TPM20A).

Rounding Rule for Currency Translation at Valuation

You can choose to round down the valuation amount in valuation currency after currency translation.

You can choose between the book rate and the market rate for the conversion of the amortization amount into valuation currency.

Special security valuation is now also possible for one step valuation procedures

Enhancements for Process Optimization

Additional Tab Pages in C lass Data

Two additional tab pages in class data (transaction FWZZ) are available:

One tab page has been p redefined by SAP and you can cus tomize the names and values of the available fields.

The other tab page can be created by using the BAdI: Additional Tab Page in Class Data(TPM_SEC_CUST_DATA).

New Authorization Check for Security Price Maintenance

The new check is based on the price types. This allows independent companies in one client, to share common market data with separate price types at the

same time.

Enhancement in End-of-Day Process ing

Within the Credit Risk Analyzer  it is now possible to run the End-of-Day Processing (transaction KLNACHT) per company code.

Archiving Raw Exposures and Exposure Positions

Within Exposure Management 2.0  you can archive raw exp osures and exposure positions.

Enhancements in the Transaction Management

Flexible Conversion of Foreign Exchange Rates within the Transaction Management

You can use the rate type for currency conversion to local currency defined for the company code also in financial transactions, in case you don't want to use

the exhange rate type M for currency translation within the financial transactions.

Variable Rate/Price Calculation

The functions for variable interest calculation (transactions TI10, TI11, TI12, TI37, TJ05, TJ05_REV, TJ09) have been changed. Now you can adjust interest

rates and also security prices. The structure nodes are renamed to Variable Rate/Price Calculation.

New Business Application Progr amming Interface (BAPI) for Security Lending (BUS5770)

You can use this BAPI to create, change, reverse, rollover and give notice security lending transactions. You also can use the functions Get Detail and Prepare

Change Structure.

Reporting Enhancements

FAS 157 Reporting

FAS157 reports is compliance reporting of fair values of financial instruments. The report displays the fair values of financial instruments and the system is

able to classify the instruments in 3 levels.Accounting Analyzer 

Positions and subpositions are now integrated as financial objects in the Risk Analyzer. Within the new  Accounting Analyzer  you can report the position

components of financal transactions and positions based on a specific granularity (portfolio hierarchy) with regard to Market Risk Analyzer  and accounting key

figures. This is possible for all instruments in the area of securities.

Clearing Threshold Reporting (CTR)

Example

Examples can be found in the test case descriptions of the business function. Call transaction Switch Framework Customizing  (SFW5) and then call the test

catalog with the same name for this business function TRM, New Instruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3).

More Information

For more information, see release note FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3: TRM, New Inst ruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting (New).

For more informationen, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component    Accounting   SAP Financial Supply Chain Management (FIN-FSCM)SAP Treasury and Risk Management (TRM)  .

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 145 of 148

Page 146: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 146/148

TM: Integration in Funds Management 

Technical Data

Technical name of business function FIN_TRM_PSM_INTEGRATION

Type of business function Enterprise business function

Available as of  Enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Services

Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

Public Sector (EA-PS)

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures

(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

This business function enables you to seamlessly integrate financial transactions and positions from the Transaction Manager (FIN-FSCM-TRM-TM) into SAP

Public Sector Management (PSM). Financial transactions and positions can be assigned to funds and grants. When making postings to accounting, the fund and

grant data is also transferred to correctly reflect the investments on the financial statements at fund and grant level. The positions can be managed at the level of 

the fund and grant so that condition-based flows, such as interest payments, can be automatically assigned to the corresponding funds and grants. The funds

transfer function enables you to change the investment relationship of various funds and grants to positions, without using external payment flows.

You can now also easily manage investments from investment pool participants in investment pools. The system supports the purchase and sale of pool

certificates as well as the issue of certificates by the investment pool.

Prerequisites

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-FINSERV 604

You have activated the following business functions:

Financial Services (EA-FS)

Public Sector (EA-PS)

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

TM, Integration in Funds Management (FIN_TRM_PSM_INTEGRATION)

(available bus iness function)

You need to use SAP Public Sector Management (PSM). You need to make all the necessary settings for Public Sector Management and activate Funds

Managment (PSM-FM). To do this, in Customizing, choose Public Sector Management   Funds Management Government   Basic Settings   Activate Global 

Functions for Funds Management (PSM-FM)  . You also need to activate the account assignment elements Fund  and Grant . To do this, in Customizing for 

Public Sector Management  and choose General Settings for Public Sector Management   Basic Settings: Account Assignment Elements    Activate

 Account Assignment Elements  .

If you have not previously used the Transaction Manager, you need to make the required settings in Customizing for the Transaction Manager.

Required and Optional Migration Steps.

If you are currently using the Transaction Manager, you need to execute the required and optional conversion steps by choosing General Settings  Tools 

Conversion Progams  . Here you set the corresponding migration category and conversion programs.

To enable the Transaction Manager to differentiate between the fund and grant positions, you need to make the following settings in Customizing for the

Transaction Manager:

Choose General Settings Accounting   Settings for Pos ition Management   Define and Assign Differentiations  . You can then create differentiations

with the account assignment elements Fund  and Grant  as differentiation terms and assign them to positions.

You need to have made the necessary settings in the activities under Define Update Types and Assign Usages  and Assign Update Types for Funds

Transfer  by choosing General Settings   Accounting   Funds Transfer   .

Choose Transaction Manager   Securities  Transaction Management   Special Functions: Public Sector   to Assign Transaction Types for Investment 

Pool Participants and use the BAdI: Investment Pool Participant Transactions .

Features

When you create financial transactions, you can now assign one or more funds or grants.

Funds Transfer 

For the majority of product types in the Transaction Manager, it is possible to transfer funds. The funds transfer enables you to transfer a position from a fund or 

grant to another fund or grant. In the Money Market and Securities areas, you can also transfer parts of a position. Unlike the securities account transfer or 

valuation class transfer, the funds transfer enables you to specify both the number of units and the value of the position to be transferred. If the funds are not

transferred at the book value of the position, price/rate gains and losses may be incurred. The system ensures that the transfer does not affect profit or loss for 

the relevant company code and that the position components are transferred porportionally to the target position.

Invesment Pool Participants and Investment Pools

Investment pools are usually set up to group the financial resources of multiple investment pool participants, which can then be invested in this form in the

capital market. This realizes higher returns and simultaneously reduces administration costs. Investment pools and investment pool participants are

represented in the system by a fund or a combination of a fund and grant. The investment made by a participant in an investment pool is mapped in the

system using certificates p urchased by the investment pool participant and certificates issues b y the investment pool. The certificate needs to be created as a

security in the Investment Certificate category.

You can generate these financial transactions automatically. You can also delete generated transactions at any time. The transactions can be displayed with

their structure characteristics in an overview.

 A BAdI is also available with which you can change the transaction conditions.

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 146 of 148

Page 147: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 147/148

The standard reporting for the logical databases and the position list  (transaction TPM12), flow list  (transaction TPM13), and posting journal  (TPM20) includes

the account assignment elements from SAP Public Sector Management.

See also: For more information, see Integration in Public Sector Management in the SAP Library, under Treasury and Risk Management   Transaction

Manager   General Information about the Transaction Manager   .

Correspondence Framework

TRM, Correspondence Framework 

Technical Data

Technical Name of Business Function FIN_TRM_CORR_FW

Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function

Available As O f  Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0

Technical Usage Financial Services

Application component SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)

Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in

Addition

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, new financial product

(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)

You can use this business function to communicate with your business partners using SWIFT (MT3xx, MT5xx) or other channels such as fax or file via the new

correspondence monitor  (transaction FTR_COMONI) and are supported in this with configurable automatic matching/confirmation processes.

Prerequisites

For you to be able to use this business function, the following prerequisites have to be met:

You have installed the following components as of the version given:

Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features

Software Component EA-FINSERV 604

SAP_APPL 604

You have activated the following business functions:

Financial Services (EA-FS)

TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)

TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, new financial product (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)

If you want to transfer old correspondence data (Customizing settings and application data) to the new function, you must execute the migration of data before

activating the business function.

See also: Migration of Correspondence Data

Information on the changes to Customizing and the area menu can be found in the release note FIN_TRM_CORR_FW: TRM, Correspondence Framework 

(New).

Features

The previous correspondence functions have been replaced completely. The new correspondence functions enable you to generate correspondence objects for financial transactions and securities accounts both automatically and manually. You can use the new correspondence monitor  (transaction FTR_COMONI) to

manage correspondence objects. At the same time, you are supported by Status Management and the automatic reconciliation and assignment process. You can

also determine whether the financial transaction status is automatically set to 'settled' in the automatic settlement function, based on the product type.

The system is preconfigured for the following SWIFT messages: You can also make changes to the existing settings and set up other formats.

MT300 Foreign Exchange Confirmation

MT320 Fixed Loan/Deposit Confirmation

MT395 Queries

MT399 Free Format Message

MT502 Order to Buy/Sell

MT509 Trade Status Message

MT515 Confirmation of Purchase/Sale

MT535 Statement of Holdings

MT536 Statement of Transactions

MT540 Receive Free

MT541 Receive against PaymentMT542 Deliver Free

MT543 Deliver against Payment

MT544 Receive Free Confirmation

MT545 Receive against Payment Confirmation

PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Page 147 of 148

Page 148: Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 148/148

MT546 Deliver Free Confirmation

MT547 Deliver against Payment Confirmation

MT548 Settlement Status and Processing Advice

MT566 Corporate Action Confirmation


Recommended